Structural Specs Vol (1) .2 Part1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 1
PROJECT SPECIFICATION
For
WAQF ABLLAN RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
Doha, Qatar
Volume 2 – Part 1 STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATION
01001 General Information 14
01010 Summary of Work 10
01042 Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical 2

Coordination
01045 Cutting and Patching 2
01050 Field Engineering 3
01200 Project Meetings 2
01300 Submittals 16
01400 Quality Control - Testing Services 4
01430 Testing of Glazed Curtain Wall 4
01432 Site Inspection of Glazed Curtain Wall and Windows 3
01470 Inspection and Testing of Water Proofing 3
01500 Construction Facility and Temporary Control 9
01527 Scaffolding 10
01700 Contract Close Out 3
02140 Dewatering 4
02200 Earthworks (Excavation and Backfilling) 11
02221 Excavation Perimeter Retention System Installation 5
02515 Concrete Pavers 5
02525 Exterior Granite Pavers and Cladding 5
03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 38
03345 Concrete Crack Repair 2
03346 Concrete Floor Finishing 4
03410 Structural Precast and Prestressed Concrete 15

SYNA WAQF ABLLAN RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
Doha, Qatar
March 2008
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page 2
PROJECT SPECIFICATION
For
WAQF ABLLAN RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
Doha, Qatar
Volume 2 – Part 1 STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATION
03500 Concrete Screed 7
04200 Concrete Block Masonry 7
05120 Structural Steel 10
05500 Metal Fabrication 12
05600 Ornamental Metal 6

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01001
GENERAL INFORMATION
Page No. 1
1.0 DESCRIPTION
1. Scope: This Section identifies the project and provides a general description of the
work covered by the Contract Documents, the work scheduled to be done by other
Contractors, the reference standards used in specifying the work and other
general matters including coordination, attendance, material alternatives and
substitutes, requirements as to testing work and materials, providing all plant, Bills
of Quantities, etc.
2. Unless specifically stated otherwise for certain items, these specifications shall be
read as instructions to the Contractor. The tender invitation Documents form part
of this contract and shall be read in conjunction with Division 1 Preliminaries and
General Items, they shall be held to apply to the programme of works in its
entirety.
1.1 LOCATION OF PROJECT SITE
The project consists of Block 127 Comprising one Residential Building, Block 128
comprising four Residential Buildings and Block 129 comprising four Residential
Buildings and a Mosque located in Doha.
1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT WORKS
1. The work under this Contract comprises generally the construction, completion
and maintenance of Architectural, Civil and Electro-Mechanical works, including
external works and services, related to the proposed residential complex as
described hereafter:
2. Block 127: One Residential Building of B+G+7
Basement Floor : Parking Floor
Ground Floor : Parking Floor
1st Floor to 7th. Floor : Apartment Floor
Roof and Upper Roof : Water Tanks and Mechanical Equipment
Block 128: Four Residential Buildings of B+G+7
1st Floor to 7th. Floor : Apartments Floor
Block 129: Four Residential Buildings of B+G+7 and Mosque

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01001
GENERAL INFORMATION
Page No. 2
1st Floor to 7th. Floor : Apartment Floor
3. The main structural system comprises reinforced concrete cast-in situ shear walls
and columns together with cast in Situ beams, solid slabs and ribbed slabs.
4. The external walling is a combination of glazed curtain wall system walls and
painted plasterwork. Roofs are covered by precast concrete pavers.
7-3
5. Internal floor finishing to common and public areas are mainly a combination of
granite and marble. Typical apartment floors finishes are mainly ceramic tiles.
Typical toilets have ceramic tiles to wall and floors. Other services and mechanical
area floor finishes include hardened concrete, epoxy paint finished screed and
ceramic tiles.
6. Internal wall finishing to common and public areas are generally either a
combination of granite and marble or painted plasterwork with lobbies and other
areas in marble and granite cladding.
7. Doors and frames leading to common use facilities are hardwood and others are
of Aluminum construction. Hardware, toilet accessories, etc., are in stainless steel.
8. Automatically programmed elevators in the core serves all floor levels including
basement and an additional service/passenger lift serves for all the floors
including basements.
9. Mechanical systems in the building include, heating, ventilation, air-conditioning,

smoke control, automatic temperature control (ATC), building automation/energy
management system (BAS/EMS), (BMS), domestic water, cascades, foul drainage
and fire protection installations.
10. Electrical systems in the building include power supply, main distribution, low
tension switchboards, secondary distribution, final distribution equipment and
sub-circuits, lighting, power, standby generators, earthing and lightning
protection, telephone, fire detection and alarm system.
11. External works comprise walkways; steps; roadways; curbs in a combination of

concrete granite and granite sets; stainless steel flag poles; planting beds and
lighting features.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01001
GENERAL INFORMATION
Page No. 3
1.3 WORK PERFORMED UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS
1. Employer’s Direct Contracts with others: The Employer may during the currency of
the Works employ others on a direct contract basis to execute the following works:
1. Works that are under the Employer’s Power pursuant to the relevant
clauses of the Conditions of Contract.
2. Any special equipment, systems, or any other work deemed to be

necessary for the efficient operation of the building.
3. The contractor may be invited to negotiate or submit prices for one or more
of the aforementioned work categories at the Employer’s discretion.
Direct contract work may be performed concurrently with the Contractor’s work
upon the understanding that the execution of such direct contract work shall be
organized by the Employer so as not to substantially interfere with the regular
progress and completion of the project Works.
Any undue interference occasioned by other contractors employed directly by the

Employer and resulting in the disruption of regular progress or in delay to the
completion of the Works, or any substantial part thereof, shall immediately be
brought to the attention of the Engineer and Employer by written notice from the
Contractor. Upon receipt of such notice, the Engineer shall forthwith examine the
cause and effect of the alleged interference, assess the extent of disruption and/or
delay (if any) to completion of the Works or any substantial part thereof and
advise the Employer accordingly.
The Contractor shall, subject to any instructions issued by the Engineer, proceed
with the Works with his best endeavors notwithstanding any such interference,
and any delay resulting from the circumstances described in this clause shall be
evaluated by the Engineer under Clause 44 of the Conditions of Contract.
Provided always that any claim by the Contractor in respect of delays alleged by
him to be due to interference occasioned by other Contractors employed directly
by the Employer, shall not be entertained unless the written notice required as
aforesaid shall have been given by the Contractor at the time of the alleged delay
and approved by the Engineer in writing.
1.4 ITEMS FURNISHED BY THE EMPLOYER
1. Items supplied by the Employer: The Employer reserves the right to place and
install equipment, furniture, furnishings, etc., in completed or partially completed
areas of the building upon the understanding that the exercising of such right will
not substantially interfere with the regular progress and completion of the Works.
In the event of undue interference being alleged by the Contractor the
requirements of Clause 1.3 hereinbefore shall apply.
2. Partial occupancy by the Employer / tenants: The Employer reserves the right to
occupy completed parts of the Works prior to substantial completion of the whole
of the Works provided that such occupancy does not substantially interfere with
completion of the remaining works. In the event of undue interference being
alleged by the Contractor the requirement of Clause 1.3 hereinbefore shall apply.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01001
GENERAL INFORMATION
Page No. 4
1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1. All references to codes, regulations, specifications and standards refereed to in

the Contract Documents shall, unless otherwise stated, mean the latest edition,
amendment or revision of such reference standard in effect as of the date of these
Tender Documents. The Contractor shall obtain an original copy of the latest
edition of all codes, regulations, standards and technical literature reference to in
the Contract Documents and the same shall be kept on the Project site, properly
indexed and maintained in good order and available to the Engineer at all times.
Upon completion of the works the said codes, standards, etc., shall be handed
over to the Engineer.
2. Proof of Compliance: Whenever the Contract Documents require that a product

complies with Federal Specification, British Standards, ASTM Designation, ANSI
Specification or other association, standards, etc., the Contractor shall present an
affidavit from the manufacturer certifying that the product complies therewith.
Where requested or specified, submit supporting test data to substantiate
compliance.
3. Where the language of any reference standard referred to herein is in the form of
a recommendation or suggestion, such recommendation or suggestions shall be
deemed to be mandatory under this Contract unless conflicting with particular
specification contained herein.
1.6 ABBREVATIONS AND SYMBOLS
1. Reference to a technical society, institution, association or governmental authority

is made in the Specification in accordance with the following abbreviations:
AA Aluminium Association
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
AAN American Association of Nurserymen
AAMA Architectural Aluminium Manufacturers Association
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials
AATCC American Association of Textiles Chemists & Colorists
ABMA American Boiler Manufacturers Association
ACI American Concrete Institute
ADC Air Diffuser Council
AFI Air filter Institute
AGA American Gas Association
AGCA Association General Contractors of America
AGMA American Gear manufacturers Association
AIA American Institute of Architects
AIMA Acoustical & Insulating Materials Association
AIEE American Institute of Electrical Engineers
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
ALS American Lumber Standards
AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association
ANSI American National Standards Institute

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01001
GENERAL INFORMATION
Page No. 5
AOAC Association of Official Agricultural Chemists

APA American Plywood Association
API American Petroleum Institute
AREA American Railway Engineering Association
ARI Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
ASAHC American Society of Architectural Hardware
Consultants
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers.
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWPA American Wood Preservers Association
AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
BIA Brick Institute of America
BRI Building Research Institute
BS British Standard
BSCP British Standard Code of Practice
BSI British Standards Institution
CAGI Compressed Air and Gas Institute
CDA Copper Development Association
CEE International Commission on Rules for Approval of
Electrical Equipment (Europe)
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CS Commercial Standard, U.S. Department of Commerce
CSI Construction Specifications Institute
CTI Cooling Tower Institute
QEWA Qatar Electricity and Water Authority
QM Qatar Municipality
DIN Deutsches Institute for Normung
FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association
FHA Federal Housing Administration
FIA Factory Insurance Association
FM Factory Mutual
FPL Forest Products Laboratory
FS Federal Specification
FSIWA Federation of Sewage and Industrial Waste Association
FTI Facing Tile Institute
GA Gypsum Association
GTA Glass Tempering Association
HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association
IBRM Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers
IEC International Electromechanical Commission
IEE Institute of Electrical Engineers of London
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IES Illuminating Engineering Society
ISO The International Organization for Standardization
MIA Marble Institute of America
MLMA Metal Lath manufacturers Association

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01001
GENERAL INFORMATION
Page No. 6
MS Military Specification
MSSVFI Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valves
and Fittings Industries
MSTD Military Standard
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal
Manufacturers
NAFM National Association of Architectural Metal
Manufacturers
NAPF National Association of Plastic Manufacturers
NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association
NBHA National Builders Hardware Association
NBS National Bureau of Standards
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association
NEC National Electrical Code (NPFA No. 70)
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NEMI National Elevator Mfg. Industry, Inc.
NFC National Fire Code
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NFPA National Forest Products Association
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association
NHPMA National Hardwood & Pine Manufacturers Association
NPA National Particleboard Association
NPCA National Paint and Coatings Association
NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
NSC National Safety Council
NSF National Sanitation Foundation
NSSEA National School Supply & Equipment Association
NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association
NWC National Water Council (UK)
NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration
PCA Portland Cement Association
PCI Pre-stressed Concrete Institute
PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute (USA)
PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute
PS Product Standard, U.S. Dept. of Commerce
RIS Redwood Inspection Service
RTI Resilient Tile Institute
SAE Society of Automotive Engineer
SBI Steel Boiler Institute
SCMA Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association
SDI Steel Deck Institute
SDI Steel Door Institute
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
SJI Steel Joist Institute
SMACNA Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association.
SMFMA Sprayed Mineral Fiber Manufacturers Association, Inc.
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
SPR Simplified Practice Recommendation, U.S, Dept. of
Commerce
SSPC Steel Structures Paint Council
SWFPA Structural Wood Fibre Products Association

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01001
GENERAL INFORMATION
Page No. 7
TCA Tile Council of America

TEMA Tubular Exchange Manufacturing Association
TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association
TPI Truss Plate Institute
UL Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.
UPC Uniform Plumbing Code
USCGS U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey
WCLB West Coat Lumber Inspection Bureau
WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute
WWPA Western Wood Products Association
2. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications for additional abbreviations and for
symbols.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01001
GENERAL INFORMATION
Page No. 8
1.7 ARRANGEMENT OF DOCUMENTS / COORDINATION OF THE WORKS
1. The arrangement of the Specifications into Divisions, Sections, Clauses, Sub-

clauses and paragraphs, and the arrangement of Drawings, shall not control the
division of the Work among Subcontractors, nor establish the extent of Work to be
performed by an particular trade or Subcontractor. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the proper coordination of all Works including that required
between different trades and different Subcontractors, suppliers, utility owners,
governmental authorities, etc.
1.8 DEFINITIONS
1. Where “as shown”, “as indicated” or words of similar import are used, it shall be
understood that reference to the Drawings accompanying the Specification is
made unless otherwise stated. Where “as approved”, “as directed”, “as required”,
“as reviewed”, “as accepted”, or words of similar terminology is used, it shall be
understood that the approval, direction, requirement, permission, authorization,
review, or acceptance of the Engineer is intended, unless otherwise stated.
2. As used in the Contract Documents, “provide” shall be understood to mean

“provide complete in place”, that is, “furnish and install”.
1.9 ATTENDANCE
1. The Contractor shall provide for each trade to attend upon all other trades and for
executing all sundry incidental items necessary for the proper completion of the
Work to the true intent and meaning of the Contract.
2. The Contractor, may from time to time as the Engineer may direct, be required to
provide attendance on other Contractors employed directly by the Employer, and
the Contractor shall comply with any such requirement.
1.10 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
1. Materials, products and equipment shall be properly packaged and protected to

prevent damage during transportation and handling. More particular requirements
for transportation and handling are specified under the technical Sections of the
Specification.
1.11 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1. Manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed,

connected, erected, used, cleaned, serviced and maintained in accordance with
the printed instructions and recommendations of the respective manufacturers,
unless more stringent requirements are specified herein.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01001
GENERAL INFORMATION
Page No. 9
1.12 IDENTIFYING MARKINGS
1. Name plates and other identifying markings shall not be affixed on exposed
surfaces of products installed in finished spaces.
1.13 SPECIFIED, ALTERNATIVE AND SUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS
1. Definition: The term “product” shall mean any material including proprietary goods,
equipment and manufactured items.
2. The specifying of manufacturers or their products by name, trade name, catalogue

number, etc., shall not act to relieve the Contractor either from his responsibility to
meet other specification requirements, or from his responsibility to make material
submittals for approval.
3. Alternative products: References herein to “approved equal” or similar terms shall

mean that the approval of the Engineer is required to any alternative product
proposed by the Contractor. The Contractor’s freedom, however, to propose not
be limited to those products in respect of which the term “approved equal” or
similar has been used in the Contract Documents, and he may proposed
alternatives to any specified products provided such alternatives are equal in all
respects to the quality, durability and performance characteristics of the specified
product subject to the Engineers approval.
4. Substitute products: If the Contractor is unable to obtain the specified product in

spite of his best endeavors, and if he may propose a substitute for the Engineer’s
review and approval, which substitute shall be similar to, and as near as possible
equal if not better than the quality, durability and performance characteristics of
the specified product. A substitute product will only be considered if the Contractor
has proved to the Engineer’s reasonable satisfaction that the specified product is
unobtainable.
5. Engineer’s approval of alternatives and substitutes: The approval of any

alternative or substitute product shall be solely at the discretion of the Engineer
and such approval shall in no way relieve the Contractor of any of his liabilities
and obligations under the Contract. The burden of proof in satisfying the Engineer
as to the suitability of any proposed alternative or substitute product shall rest with
the Contractor, and the Engineer may request and the Contractor shall provide
such supporting data, carry out such tests, etc., as the Engineer may reasonably
require in order to satisfy himself as to such suitability. Any delays or extra cost
suffered by the Contractor because of his failure to propose alternatives within the
time allowed for in the schedule so as to allow the Engineer reasonable time to
review, or because of rejection of alternatives or substitutes found by the Engineer
to be unsuitably, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and he shall not be
entitled to additional payment nor extra time for completion in this respect.
6. Cost effect in approving alternatives and substitutes: Should any alternative or

substitute product be approved by the Engineer, any net increase in cost over and
above the specified product shall be borne by the Contractor and, in the case of a
substitute product, any net saving in cost shall be to the benefit of the Employer.
Any such substitute products where permitted and approved, must conform to the

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01001
GENERAL INFORMATION
Page No. 10
Engineer’s designed space requirements. Any such alternative or substitute

product that does not meet such space requirements, whether approved or not,
shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense and any modification of replaced
systems thereby arising shall also be made at his expense.
7. Submission of details of alternatives and substitutes: With any alternative or

substitute proposal, submit copies of detailed specifications, brochures, etc., and
quotations, in respect of the alternative or substitute materials proposed for the
Engineer’s review and approval.
1.14 COLOUR SCHEDULE
1. A colour schedule shall be submitted by the Contractor for review by the Engineer
after award of Contract. The Contractor and material suppliers shall cooperate in
furnishing required colour samples to aid in the final selections. Where special
colours are selected by the Engineer, furnish accurate reproductions of these
colours, applied to samples of the actual materials to which they will be applied in
the finished product, for review and approval by the Engineer.
1.15 TESTING OF MATERIALS
1. All materials and work will be tested as required in the Contract Documents and/or
as and when required by the Engineer.
2. Samples for testing will be taken at the place of origin, mixing plants or working
site or from the Work as appropriate and as required by the Engineer.
3. Provide all equipment, facilities, labour and supervision for carrying such tests as
are specified herein or as may be required by the Engineer.
1.16 PROVISION OF PLANT
1. Provide all scaffolding, hoists, tackle and other plant, profiles, templates,
centerings and equipment generally required for the proper, safe and efficient
execution of the Works and allow for providing all labour, materials, instructions,
etc., required by the Engineer for testing and measuring the Works and for
weighing, measuring or testing the efficiency of any portion of the Works.
2. The Contractor is particularly to note that scaffolding, staging and the like is to be
provided both for the execution of his own work and that of Subcontractors
employed under this Contract including that required solely for the execution of
work by Subcontractors. All scaffolding and plant shall be erected and used in
accordance with the applicable local laws.
1.17 TENDERING PROCEDURE / CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
1. For details of Tendering Procedure and Conditions of Contract, refer to Volume-1.

The Clause numbers and margin notes (headings) of the Contract Clauses are
reproduced in the Bills of Quantities to facilitate pricing if required.
1.18 BILLS OF QUANTITIES

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01001
GENERAL INFORMATION
Page No. 11
1. The Bills of Quantities shall be deemed to represent the work to be executed and
the obligations to be performed in accordance with the requirement of all other
Documents.
1.19 THE DRAWINGS
1. The drawings to be read in conjunction with the Specification listed on Drawing

No. 00 “List of Drawings” and in Volume-1 conditions of contract.
1.20 CHECKING OF DOCUMENTS
1. Upon receipt of Contract or Tender Documents perform checking as indicated

herein and in Tender Invitation Documents.
2. Upon receipt of Tender Invitation Documents, Bills of Quantities, Specifications,

Drawings and Schedules, immediately check the number of pages contained
therein. Should any be found to be missing, if any writing or figures are indistinct,
or if any of the wordings are thought to be ambiguous or the meaning or intention
is not clear, notify the Engineer immediately and have the matter rectified.
3. The Contractor shall be deemed to have examined all the documents forming the
Contract, to have ascertained the full extent and character of operations and to
have included in the Contract for all costs, expenses, risks, liabilities and
obligations set forth in or implied by the Contract Documents.
4. The Contractor shall execute the Works according to the provisions of the
Contract Documents. The Contract Documents are considered to be
complementary and any work indicated in one, but omitted or not stated in others,
shall be treated as if it was included in all.
5. If the Contractor discovers that any portion of the Work has been omitted from or
is not indicated in any of the Documents, or if any two Documents of the Contract
conflict as to the work to be carried out, the discrepancy shall be reported to the
Engineer, who shall instruct the Contractor which of the two conflicting Documents
is to be taken as correct. No additional payment will be made in connection with
rectification of discrepancies between the various Contract Documents or for any
clarifications provided by the Engineer during the construction period.
1.21 CONFLICTS BETWEEN DOCUMENTS
1. Should conflicts occur between Drawings, Schedules, Specifications and Bills of

Quantities:
1. Specifications govern over Drawings, Schedules, Specifications and Bills

of Quantities.
2. Schedules govern over Drawings and over Bills of Quantities.
3. Drawings govern over Bill of Quantities.
2. Take note that Bills of Quantities are provided for the assistance of bidders in
assembling a Tender Price only; they have no relevance with respect to the Work
required by Specifications, Schedules and Drawings. Units prices stated in the

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01001
GENERAL INFORMATION
Page No. 12
Bills of Quantities, submitted at the time of Tender, may be used in evaluating the
cost of Variation Orders.
3. Any item for which the Contractor has not inserted a price in the Bills of Quantities
shall be deemed to be covered by other prices or rate therein.
1.22 INTERPRETATIONS – CROSS REFERENCE TO THE SPECIFICATION:
1. Where a numerical cross-reference to a Specification Section or clause is given

on drawings or in any other document, the Contractor must verify its accuracy by
checking the remainder of the annotation or item description against the
terminology used in the referenced Section or clause.
2. Where a numerical cross-reference is not given, the relevant Section(s) and

Clause(s) of the Specification will apply, cross-reference thereto being by means
of related terminology.
3. Where a cross-reference for a particular type of work, feature, material or product

is given, relevant clause(s) elsewhere in the referred to Specification Section
dealing with general matters, ancillary products and workmanship also apply.
4. Before proceeding, obtain clarification or instructions in relation to any

discrepancy or ambiguity, which has been discovered.
5. Size: unless otherwise stated:
• Products are specified by their coordinating sizes.

• Cross section dimensions of timber shown on drawings are actual sizes after
planing.
6. Fix Only: means all labours in unloading, handling, storing and fixing in position,
including use of all plant.
7. Supply and Fix: Unless stated otherwise all items given in the schedule of work
and/or on the drawings are to be supplied and fixed complete.
8. Dimensions: The accuracy of dimensions scaled from the drawings is not

guaranteed. Obtain from the Engineer any dimensions required but not given in
figures on the drawings, or calculable from figures on the drawings.
9. Measured Quantities: For purposes of ordering products and constructing the

Works:
• The accuracy and sufficiency of the measured quantities is not guaranteed.
• The specification and drawings shall take precedence over the measured
quantities.
1.23 APPROVAL BY THE ENGINEER
1. Where approval and/or review by the Engineer is required, such approval and/or
review does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01001
GENERAL INFORMATION
Page No. 13
1.24 NOTIFICATION OF OPERATIONS
1. No important operation is to be carried out without full and complete notice in

writing being given to the Engineer and sufficient time to enable such arrangement
of its inspection to be made as the Engineer may consider necessary.
1.25 SPECIALIST WORKS
1. Where works are designated on the Drawings and/or in the Specifications as

“Specialist Works” or “Contractor Designed”, the Contractor is responsible for the
design, fabrication, complete and proper installation and performance of such
designated Works, to the Engineer’s satisfaction, including the connection of
Specialist Works to other building components.
2. Prior to fabrication of designated Specialist Works, submit to the Engineer for

review, original transparency and three copies of all design-build shop drawings,
in accordance with Section 01300.
1.26 INSPECTION BY MUNICIPALITY AND OTHER GOVERNMENT AUTHORITY
1. The Contractor shall at all times give access to representatives of the Municipality
of Qatar and other government authorities for purposes of inspecting the Work
and shall, without additional cost, provide all facilities and any safety equipment
required for this purpose, including scaffolding, hoists, ladders, water or lighting,
and shall provide or make holes, grooves, chases or other means of access to
enable them to carry out their inspections.
1.27 EXPATRIATE LABOUR
1. The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the engagement of
expatriate labour and staff if required, for the housing, health, welfare and
repatriation of same and shall conform in all respects with the conditions and
requirements of the Contract, of any Law, Regulation or Order passed or made or
coming into force after the date of Tender of during the execution of the Works.
1.28 LIAISON WITH POLICE, SECURITY AND LABOUR OFFICERS
1. Provide and maintain close contact with Police and other officials of the areas
covered regarding their requirements for the control of workmen, and other
matters, and provide assistance or facilities which may be required by such
officials for the execution of their duties.
1.29 CUSTOMS AND LOCAL DUES
1. All customs dues, tolls, duties, fees and charges imposed by the State of Qatar for
materials, product, equipment, etc., with the exception of the Contractor’s
construction or plant imported to perform contract work shall be deemed to be
included in the Contract as indicated in the Tender Invitation Documents.
1.30 DOCUMENTS PROVIDED ON BEHALF OF THE CONTRACT
1. Additional Copies of Drawings: After execution of the contract, two copies of

drawings (not counting any certified copy of the Contract Drawings) will be issued

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01001
GENERAL INFORMATION
Page No. 14
to the Contractor free of charge. Additional copies will be issued on request, but
will be charged to the Contractor.
2. Additional Copies of Specifications: After execution of the Contract, two copies

of the Specifications will be issued to the Contractor in accordance with the
Contract. Additional copies will be issued on request, if available, but will be
charged to the Contractor.
3. Additional Copies of Bills of Quantities: After execution of the Contract, two

copies of the un-priced Bills of Quantities will be issued to the Contractor in
accordance with the Contract. Additional copies will be issued on request, if
available, but will be charged to the Contractor.
1.31 LICENCES AND APPROVALS
1. Notwithstanding the fact that prior to the award of the Contract, the Owner will
have applied for a Building License for the construction of the building, it is the
responsibility of the Contractor to pay all related taxes and fees and to obtain the
Building License / permits and all other Licenses, Approvals and Permits from the
Municipal and other Authorities having Jurisdiction, including, but not limited to:
Demolition Permits, Civil Defense Approvals, Drainage Approval, and approvals
for Telephone, Roads, Water, Electricity, etc.
2. Prior to the issuance of the Completion Certificate, it is the responsibility of the

Contractor to obtain an Occupancy Permit from the Municipality confirming that
the building may be used for the purpose intended.
3. During the construction period, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer copies
of all Certificates of Approval, Permits, or Licenses obtained from Municipality
Departments and other Authorities having jurisdiction, which are required for the
performance of the work.
4. Prior to the issuance of the Completion Certificate, the Contractor shall furnish the
Engineer with a complete set of original copies of all the above-mentioned
Certificates, Licenses and Permits.
1.32 DOCUMENTS ON SITE
1. The Contractor shall keep on the site at all times, one copy of the Approval for
Construction Drawings and Specifications, and an up-to-date set of all shop
drawings, reviewed and stamped by the Engineer.
2. The Contractor shall keep on site, in a secure and locked cabinet, copies of all
Municipality Approvals, Certificates, Permits, Licenses, including the Building
License drawing set.
3. The Contractor shall make documents available for reference to the Engineer or
Municipality Inspectors, when requested to do so.
4. The Contractor shall keep on site copies of all standard referenced in the
Specifications, to facilitate quick reference for Construction, Subcontractors,
Engineer and Inspection and Testing Companies.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01001
GENERAL INFORMATION
Page No. 15
1.33 DIVISION OF WORK
1. Work specified in the specifications is divided into sections for ready reference
only and not for the purpose of establishing limits of Subcontractor subcontracts.
2. Division of the Work amongst Subcontractors is the sole responsibility of the

Contractor. The Engineer assumes no responsibility to act as an arbitrator to
establish subcontract limits.
1.34 SITE INFORMATION DOCUMENTS
1. The documents listed in this Section were utilized by the Engineer during the
design of the Works and, as a courtesy, will be made available for review by all
those affected by them.
2. The accuracy of the information contained in the listed documents is the sole
responsibility of the authors of those documents and cannot be guaranteed to be
factual or complete.
3. Site Survey Report:
To be provided by the Geotechnical Company following a Soil Investigation. Refer

Appendix-B where the Soil Investigation Report is provided for information
purpose.
4. Geotechnical Conditions (for information only)
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01010
SUMMARY OR WORK
Page No. 1
1.0 GENERAL
1. Comply with the General Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions

and the requirements of Division 1 – Preliminaries and General Items.
1.1 DIVISION OF WORK
1. Work specified in the specification is divided into sections by the Engineer for
ready reference only and not for the purpose of establishing limits of
Subcontractor subcontracts.
2. Division of the Work amongst Subcontractors is the sole responsibility of the

Contractor. The Engineer assumes no responsibility to act as an arbitrator to
establish subcontract limits.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
1. Specified Options
1. Work of this Contract is based on materials and products specified by:
1. Manufacturer’s catalogued trade names with local sources, and/or
2. References to Standards as stated in clause 1.5 and 1.6 of section

01001 of the specification, or
3. Prescriptive specification, or
4. Performance specification (Specialist’s Works).
2. When a material or product is specified by reference to a Standard only,

the Contractor may select any material or product that meets or exceeds
the specified Standard.
3. When a material or product is specified by prescriptive or performance

specification, the Contractor may select any material or product meeting or
exceeding the specification.
4. When a material or product is specified by reference to a Standard or by

prescriptive or performance specification, upon the Engineer’s request,
obtain from the manufacturer an independent testing laboratory report
showing that the material or product meets or exceeds the specified
requirements, should the material or packaging not bear the stamp or mark
signifying official approval of the Standards body.
2. Number of Items
In case where an item or part of materials, products and equipment is referred to

in the singular manner, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many
items or parts as are required to complete the work.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01010
SUMMARY OR WORK
Page No. 2
3. Quality
1. Products, materials, equipment and articles, (referred to as Products

throughout the Specification) incorporated in the Work shall be new, not
damaged or defective, and of the best quality, comparable with the
Specification, for the purpose intended. If requested, furnish evidence as
to type, source and quality of Products provided.
2. Defective Products, whenever identified prior to the completion of Work,

will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Inspection does not
relieve the Contractor of responsibility for defective products, but is a
precaution against oversight or error. Remove and replace defective
Products at no cost to the Contract and be responsible for delays and
expense caused by rejection.
3. Should any dispute arise as to the quality or fitness of Products, the

decision rests strictly with the Engineer based upon the requirements of
the Contract Documents.
4. Unless otherwise indicated in the Specification, maintain uniformity of

manufacture for any particular or like item, throughout the Work.
5. Unless otherwise specified under trade sections and under Section 01020
– Provisional Sums the contractor is responsible for the cost of sampling,
storage, transportation and testing required to ensure quality of products
and workmanship.
4. Low Pollution Materials
1. Products and materials incorporated in the Work shall be as free as

possible of noxious or toxic volatile emissions or emissions of irritating or
toxic particles, so that the interior air of the completed building shall be as
pollution free as possible. (For example, products emitting benzene,
mercury, lead or other known toxic compounds are not acceptable).
2. Where odourless products are not available, products shall be chosen that
minimize odours within a one-month gas-off period following installation at
normal occupancy ventilation levels. Ventilation levels during the
construction period shall be set sufficiently high to encourage the gassing-
off of materials to their minimum levels prior to occupancy of the building.
3. Products for installation within the air-handling and distribution systems

shall be especially chosen to minimize the introduction of pollutants into
the fresh air supply of the building.
4. When required by Specifications or by manufacturer’s recommendations,

have manufacturer, supplier or accredited agent, inspect work, which
incorporates such products.
5. Do not permit materials to come in contact with other materials (whether in

presence of moisture or otherwise) if such contact will result in corrosion,

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01010
SUMMARY OR WORK
Page No. 3
stain, discolouration or deterioration of completed work. Provide

compatible, durable separators where such contact occurs.
5. Trademarks and labels
1. Trademarks and labels, including applied trademarks and labels, are not
acceptable in the finished Work, except those called for in the
Specifications and those required for operating purposes (for example,
labels on mechanical or electrical equipment which provide identification
essential for maintenance or replacement purposes).
2. Remove trademarks and labels, by grinding if necessary, painting-out

where the particular surface is to be painted, or if this is not possible on
plated parts, by replacing with new plain-plated or non-ferrous metal parts.
6. Availability
1. Immediately upon award of Contract, review Product delivery requirements

and anticipate foreseeable supply delays for any items. If delays in supply
of Products are identified, notify the Engineer in order that substitutions or
other remedial action may be authorized in ample time to prevent delay in
scheduling of Work.
2. In the event of failure to notify the Engineer at commencement of Work

and should it subsequently appear that Work may be delayed for such
reason, the Contractor shall, as determined by the Engineer, at no
increase in Contract Price:
1. Substitute more readily available Products of similar character to

the Engineer’s approval or
2. Temporarily install another Product until such time as specified

Product becomes available, at which time the temporarily installed
product shall be removed and the specified Product installed.
3. At the Engineer’s discretion, such items may be required to be shipped by

air freight at the Contractor’s cost.
7. Storage, handling and protection
1. Handle and store products in a manner that prevents damage,

adulteration, deterioration and soiling to the Products, other building
components, assemblies, other products, the structure, the site and
surrounding property and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions
when applicable. Cost of storage outside the site if needed, shall be
covered by the Contractor.
2. Store packaged or bundled Products in original and undamaged condition,

with manufacturer’s seals and labels intact. Do not remove from packaging
or bundling until required in the Work, except where otherwise specified for
a specification.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01010
SUMMARY OR WORK
Page No. 4
3. Ensure that materials and Products which absorb moisture from the air are
protected with sealed wrappings that prevent moisture from reaching the
products.
4. Ensure that materials and Products that are subject to colour change and
deterioration due to exposure to sunlight are protected with wrappings or
are stored in a manner, which prevents sunlight from reaching the
products.
5. Store Products subject to damage from weather in weatherproof, climate

controlled enclosures that protect Products from heat and humidity.
6. Store cementitious products clear of earth and clear of concrete floors,

away from walls.
7. Keep sand to be used for grout and mortar materials, clean and dry. Store
sand on wooden platforms and cover with waterproof tarpaulins during
inclement weather.
8. Store sheet materials and lumber on flat, solid supports and keep clear of
ground. Slope to shed moisture.
9. Store and mix paints in a ventilated room. Remove oily rags and other
combustible debris from site on a daily basis. Take every precaution
necessary to prevent spontaneous combustion.
10. Remove and replace damaged Products at no cost to the Contract and to
the Engineer’s satisfaction.
11. Refer to Section 01500: Construction facilities and Temporary Controls for
on-site storage requirements.
8. Transportation
1. Pay costs of transportation of Products, including all taxes and duties,

required in the performance of the Work.
2.2 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
1. Unless otherwise indicated in the Specification, install or erect Products in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosures
provided with Products. Obtain written instructions directly from manufacturers.
2. Notify the Engineer in writing, of conflicts between the Specification and

manufacturer’s instructions, so that the Engineer may establish the appropriate
course of action.
3. Improper installation of erection of Products, due to failure in complying with these

requirements, authorizes the Engineer to require removal and re-installation at no
increase in the Contract Price.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01010
SUMMARY OR WORK
Page No. 5
2.3 SETTING OUT
1. Coordinate with Qatar Municipality to establish the plot, lines, restrictions and/or
benchmarks.
2. Other grades, lines, levels and temporary bench marks shall be established by the
Contractor, in accordance with the requirements of Section 01050: Field
Engineering.
2.4 SCAFFOLDING, PLANT AND MACHINERY
1. Provide formwork, scaffolding, conveying equipment, tools and machinery for the
proper execution of the Project.
2. Construct and maintain scaffolding in a rigid, secure and safe manner. Erect
scaffolding as directed in Section 01527: Scaffolding, in accordance with the
requirements of that section.
3. Remove scaffolding promptly when no longer required. Scaffolding in use over

finished floor surfaces shall be mounted on rubber tired wheels.
2.5 WORKMANSHIP
1. General
1. Workmanship shall be the best quality, executed by workers experienced

and skilled in the respective duties for which they are employed.
Immediately notify the Engineer if required work is such as to make it
impractical to produce the required results.
2. Do not employ any unfit person or anyone unskilled in their required duties.
3. Decisions as to the quality or fitness of workmanship in cases of dispute

rest solely with the Engineer, whose decision is final.
2. Examination of Site and Documents
1. Make a careful examination of the Place of the Work, and investigate, at

no cost or risk to the Engineer, matters relating to the nature of the Works
to be undertaken, the means of access and egress thereto and there from,
the obstacles to be met with and the rights and interests which may be
interfered with during the performance of the Work.
2. Make a careful examination of the extent of the Work to be performed and

any and all matters which are referred to in the Contract Documents or
which are necessary for the full and proper construction of the Works and
the conditions under which it will be performed.
3. Examination of Surfaces and Conditions
1. The Contractor shall ensure each Subcontractor examines job conditions

and the work to which his work is to be applied, anchored or connected.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01010
SUMMARY OR WORK
Page No. 6
2. Report unsatisfactory conditions likely to prevent the proper installation of

work.
3. Commencement of the work implies acceptance of conditions.
4. Coordination
1. Comply with requirements of Section 01042 and other Sections of Division

1.
2. Ensure that all Subcontractors cooperate with each other in order that work
will be carried out expeditiously, and will be satisfactory in all respects at
completion of the Works.
3. Ensure that all Subcontractors examine Drawings and Specification

covering the Work which may affect the performance of their own Work.
4. From time to time, examine the work of all Subcontractors and have
corrected, defects and deficiencies, which may adversely affect the Work.
5. Ensure that Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents and

accept responsibility for delays or costs resulting from failure to inspect,
and any replacement required.
6. Be responsible for damage of any kind to the Work. Replace any damaged
materials or work that cannot be repaired or restored to the Engineer’s
satisfaction. Such repairs or replacements shall be made by the trade that
performed the original work.
7. Ensure that all Subcontractors cooperate with other Subcontractors whose

work attaches to or is affected by their own work, and ensure that minor
adjustments are made to make adjustable work fit to fixed work.
8. Ensure that Subcontractors requiring foundations or openings to be left for

the installation of their work furnish the necessary information to the
Subcontractors concerned in ample time.
9. Items to be built-in shall be supplied as and when required by the

Subcontractor building-in the items, together with forms, templates,
anchors, sleeves, inserts, measurements, shop drawings and accessories
required to be fixed to or inserted in the Work and set in place, or instruct
the related Subcontractors as to their location.
10. Pay the cost of extra work caused by, and make up time lost as the result
of, failure to provide the necessary cooperation, information or items to be
fixed to or built into the work in adequate time.
11. Cooperate with other Contractors working on and in the vicinity of the site.
5. Dimensions
1. Wall thicknesses shown on the Drawings are nominal only. In all cases,
determine the actual sizes at the building.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01010
SUMMARY OR WORK
Page No. 7
2. Dimensions of shop fabricated portions of the building shall be verified on

the site before shop drawings and fabrication are commenced.
3. Where dimensions are not available before fabrication is commenced, the

dimensions required shall be agreed upon between the various trades
concerned.
4. The Engineer will not accept claims for extra expense on the part of the
Contract by reason of non-compliance with this article.
6. Concealment
1. In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and
ceilings, except where indicated otherwise.
2. Before installation, inform the Engineer if there is a contradictory situation.

Install as directed by the Engineer.
7. Cutting and Remedial Work
1. Perform cutting and remedial work required to make the parts of the Work
come together and maintain finishes, as specified under Section 01045 –
Cutting and Patching.
8. Location of Fixtures
1. Location of plumbing, heating and electrical fixtures and outlets, ducts,

conduits and pipes shown or specified but not dimensioned shall be
considered approximate.
2. Consult with the Engineer to determine the actual location of items not
dimensioned as may be required to suit job conditions.
3. Relocation caused by failure to determine the actual locations shall be

carried out without charge to the Contract.
4. Inform the Engineer of conflicting installation when identified; install as

directed.
9. Fastenings
1. Provide metal fastenings and accessories in the same texture, sheen,

colour and finish as adjacent materials, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Use non-corrosive (non-magnetic stainless steel) fasteners and anchors

for securing exterior work.
3. Prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals and materials.
4. Prevent chemical reaction between dissimilar metals and materials.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01010
SUMMARY OR WORK
Page No. 8
5. Space anchors within their load limit or shear capacity and ensure they
provide positive permanent anchorage. Wood, or any other organic
material plugs are not acceptable.
6. Fasteners exposed in the finished work shall not be used unless

specifically approved by the Engineer. Where approved, keep exposed
fastenings to a minimum, space evenly and install neatly.
7. Fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material to which

anchorage is made are not acceptable.
10. Power Actuated Fastenings
1. Use powder actuated fastenings only with specific written consent by the
Engineer.
2. Otherwise use low velocity tools. Operators to be qualified and to be in

possession of a valid operator’s certificate.
11. Explosive
1. Explosive shall not be used on any portion of the work unless specifically
requested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
12. Protection of Work in Progress
1. Adequately protect work completed or in progress, equipment, trees,

fencing service poles, wires, utilities above and below ground, paving
located on adjoining properties. Work and items damaged or defaced due
to failure in providing such protection are to be removed and replaced, or
repaired, as directed by the Engineer, at no increase in Contract Price.
2. After building is enclosed, keep floors dry and free from oil or other
contaminants at all times. Clean up all contaminating liquids where likely to
damage surfaces.
13. Inclement Weather
1. For safety reasons, work on the exterior of the building during times of high
winds, sandstorms and rain shall be restricted. The Contractor shall be
deemed to have made allowance for such time which may be lost within
his rates and in the preparation of the schedule of the Work. No extension
of time on account of inclement weather will be granted.
14. Protection From Water
1. The Contractor shall keep the whole of the Works free from water and
allow in his price for pumping, shoring, temporary drains, sumps and the
like, necessary for the purpose, and shall clear away and make good at his
own cost all damage caused hereby. Refer to Division 2 of the
Specifications for dewatering requirements.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01010
SUMMARY OR WORK
Page No. 9
15. Over Loading
1. Prevent over loading of any part of the building, the structure, false work,
formwork and scaffolding. Cost of time delay due to damage created by
accidental over loading will be at the Contractor’s expense.
2. In mechanical rooms and in other rooms where faucets occur, (for

example, washrooms, kitchens) the pipes, ducts, conduits and wires which
pass through floors, shall be enclosed in a 100 mm high metal sleeve
which shall be sealed as indicated under Sections 15100 and 16100.
3. Holes shall be filled in such a manner as to ensure required fire and smoke
separations including the sleeves are maintained.
16. Holes Through Floors and Walls
1. Where holes are made in floors and walls for the passage of pipes, ducts
and conduit and wires the holes shall be sleeved and sealed.
17. Existing Utilities and Services
1. When breaking into or connecting to existing services or utilities, execute

work at times directed by local governing authorities, with a minimum of
disturbance to Work, to occupants of adjacent buildings and to pedestrian
and vehicular traffic and in accordance with the requirements of Division
15 & 16.
2. Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services and utilities. When

inactive utilities and services are encountered, advise the Engineer for
direction, cap-off in a manner approved by Authority having Jurisdiction
and stake or otherwise record location of capped service.
3. All services and utilities which are encountered in the course of the Work
shall be adequately supported, slung up, strutted or otherwise protected
from injury to the satisfaction of the person or authority in whom they may
be vested.
4. Utilities and services include but are not necessarily limited to water mains,
cables for power, pipes and sewers, entertainment and communication
systems.
2.6 FIRE RESISTIVE RATINGS AND SEPARATIONS
1. The building shall be of non-combustible construction.
1. Maintain international life and safety measures and regulations.
2. Comply with NFPA and Local Civil Defense requirements.
2. Fire Resistive Ratings:

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01010
SUMMARY OR WORK
Page No. 10
1. Floor assemblies shall be fire separations with a fire resistance rating of no

less than 2 hours.
2. Roof assemblies shall have a fire resistance rating of not less than 1 hour.
Unoccupied roof assemblies need not have a fire resistance rating.
3. All loads bearing walls and columns shall have a fire resistance rating not
less than that for the supported assembly.
3. Fire Separations:
Each occupancy shall be separated both horizontally and vertically as follows:
1. Fire separation between exit stairs and the remainder of the building shall
be 2 hours.
2. Fire Separation between all mechanical and electrical rooms and the
remainder of the building shall be 1 hour.
3. Fire separation between pantries and other areas shall be 1 hour.
4. Fire separation between Apartments and corridor shall be 1 hour.
2.7 INTERIOR WALL AND CEILING FINISH CLASSIFICATIONS
1. Interior Wall and Ceiling Finishes shall be classified in accordance with the
requirements set out below. ‘Flame Spread’ and ‘Smoke Development’ ratings
shall be based on tests carried out in accordance with NFPA 255 ‘Standard
Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials’.
2. Class ‘A’ Interior Wall and Ceiling Finishes: any construction above suspended
ceilings on all floors shall have a Flame Spread rating of 0-25 and Smoke
Developed rating of 0-450.
3. Class ‘B’ Interior Wall and Ceiling Finishes: in Exists and General Areas shall
have Flame Spread rating of 26-75 and a Smoke Developed rating of 0-450.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01042
ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL
COORDINATION
Page No. 1
1. COORDINATION
1. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the architectural, structural,

mechanical and electrical trades coordinate and interface their work with each
other.
2. No work of any trade shall be performed without proper coordination among the
various trades. Obtain the Engineer’s written clarification for any mis-coordinated
work.
3. Terms of Reference: Some of the requirements for the architectural, structural,

mechanical, electrical coordination are as follows:
1. Coordination:
1. Coordinate progress schedules for all parts of the Work, including

dates for submittals and for delivery of products.
2. Coordinate among Subcontractors and other concerned entities as

necessary to establish and maintain coordination and schedules,
and resolve matters in dispute.
3. Report on progress of work to be adjusted under coordination

requirements and any needed changes in schedules.
2. Coordination Documents:
1. Prepare coordination and interference drawings for installation to

ensure efficient use of available space and proper sequence of
installation.
2. Prepare master schedule, recording responsibilities under each

Section of Division 1 through 16 of the Specification for appropriate
action.
3. Maintain record documents on site throughout construction period,

noting all changes due to modifications and adjustments.
4. After acceptance of original and revised documents, reproduce and

distribute copies to each concerned entity.
3. Coordination of Submittals
1. Prior to submission of the Engineer in accordance with

requirements for Submittals, Section 01300, review shop drawings,
product data, and samples for compliance with Contract
Documents and for coordination among work of all Sections.
Submittals not noted as reviewed by the Contractor will not be
reviewed and approved by the Engineer and will be returned for re-
submittal.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01042
ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL
COORDINATION
Page No. 2
2. Ensure that the work of each Section as shown on the shop

drawings is in accordance with the work of the general trades and
the requirements of other Sections. Details of holes, fixings, etc.,
which are not shown on the drawings but are required by the
Works, shall be submitted to the Engineer, for review and approval.
No holes or fixings shall be made without prior approval by the
Engineer. No claims will be entertained for extra work needed due
to lack of coordination.
3. Check field dimensions and clearances, relation to available

spaces and anchor bolt settings. Provide forms, templates,
anchors, sleeves, conduits inserts and accessories or other
components required to be fixed to or inserted in Work, as
applicable, and set them in place or instruct related subcontractors
as to their locations.
4. Check compatibility with equipment, products and work of other

Sections, electrical characteristics and control requirements.
5. Check motor voltages and control characteristics.
6. Coordinate wiring and control diagrams.
7. Review the effect of any changes on work of other sections.
8. Verify and coordinate maintenance and record documents.
4. Coordination of Substitutions and Modifications:
1. Review proposals and requests from Subcontractors. Check for

compliance with Contract Documents and for compatibility with
work and equipment of other Sections.
2. Do not submit substitutions or modifications requests to the

Engineer, which do not meet the intent of the Contract Documents.
5. Observation of Work:
1. Observe Work for compliance with Contract Documents.
2. Maintain a list of observed deficiencies and defects; promptly

submit to Subcontractors.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01045
CUTTING AND PATCHING
Page No. 1
1. GENERAL
1. Schedules and coordinate work to minimize cutting and patching.
2. Cut, patch and make good to accommodate Work of various Sections and to
leave Work in finished condition. Cutting in this sense shall mean actual cutting of
components to allow new components to pass through or to provide new
openings. Cutting shall not mean mere drilling of holes to accommodate screws,
anchors, bolts or other fasteners as such. Such drilling is part of each Section’s
installation function.
2 RESPONSIBILITY FOR CUTTING AND PATCHING
1. Perform any type of Work which may be required to make its several parts come
together properly to fit into, receive, or be received by Work of each trade, as
shown on, or which may reasonably inferred from, Contract Documents, and
make good as directed. Any cost caused by omission of, or ill-timed or
uncoordinated performance of Work shall be borne by party responsible therefore.
Do not endanger any installed Work by cutting, digging or otherwise
altering, and do not cut or alter Work of any separate contractor without
written authorization.
2. Cut Work shall be corrected by trades performing original Work. Where

adjustments must be made to surfaces, elements or equipment due to errors,
omissions or late coordination data from a trade or separate Subcontractor, the
original specialist trades shall make the adjustment at the expense of the trade or
separate Subcontractor causing the change.
3. Cut structural concrete, steel and any supporting members only according to
written permission issued by the Engineer. In case of cutting or coring of concrete
members, the Engineer may require use of X-rays to determine location of
reinforcing steel. Do not core into or through concrete structure until X-rays have
been taken and copy has been examined by the Engineer and authorization to
proceed has been given. Bear the cost of any reinforcement or remedial Work
required, including X-ray investigation and additional fees for redesign and
administrative costs.
4. Perform cutting in a manner so as to avoid damaging or endangering any portion

of work.
5. Cut, patch and make good to leave Work in a finished condition where new Work
connects with existing and where existing Work is altered.
6. All cutting, chasing and isolated demolition shall be responsibility of Contractor,

who shall either perform these operations with his own forces under this Section
of Work, or in some cases as later set out, engage particular sub-trade
responsible for material affected.
7. Where a trade Section corresponding to any part of existing Work is not included
in Specification, cutting and patching for such portions or Work under this
category shall be done under this Section.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01045
CUTTING AND PATCHING
Page No. 2
8. For architectural and structural cutting and chasing to allow for installation of
mechanical and electrical Work, Sections responsible for various categories of this
Work are as follows:
1. Cutting of holes up to 200 mm in diameter or square: Divisions 15 and 16.
2. Holes or other openings greater than 200 mm in diameter or square, all

chases, bulkheads, furring and related patching; under this Section, except
as otherwise indicated herein.
9. It shall be the responsibility of this Section to determine, prior to construction,

which holes or openings will be required to be sized in excess of 200 mm.
10. All cutting and patching of architectural and structural work required by all
Sections other than those of Divisions 15 and 16, is responsibility of the Section
whose work is to be cut or patched, and shall be made on with the Engineer’s
approval.
11. No cutting shall be performed on structural concrete or steel columns without the
written approval of the Engineer.
3 CUTTING AND PATCHING
1. Use tradesmen qualified in work being cut and patched to ensure that it is
correctly done.
2. Do not cut, drill or sleeve load-bearing members without obtaining written approval
from the Engineer.
3. Obtain written approval from the Engineer for each condition where load-bearing
members are cut, drilled or sleeved.
4. Cut, drill and core drill holes carefully, using only equipment and methods
approved by the Engineer, leaving clean holes no larger than required, after they
are located by Sections requiring them.
5. Make cuts with clean, true, smooth edges to tolerances required and in
conformance with industry practice for applicable class of work. Make patches
indistinguishable from finished work.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01050
FIELD ENGINEERING
Page No. 1
1. RESPONSIBILITY
1. The Contractor is responsible for the true and proper setting out of the Works.
2. QUALITY ASSURNACE
1. The Contractor shall employ and pay for a qualified Land Surveyor to carry out
all setting-out and surveying work; the Surveyor to check all new and existing
structures, and to prepare survey record drawings for submission to the
Engineer.
2. The Land Surveyor shall have a recognized degree and experience in Land
Surveying in a field of sizeable projects and approved by the Engineer.
3. BUILDING LAYOUT
1. Survey Reference Points:
1. Existing base horizontal and vertical control points as designated on

drawings.
2. Locate, confirm and protect control points prior to starting site work.
Preserve permanent reference points during construction.
3. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to the

Engineer.
4. Report to the Engineer when a reference point is lost or destroyed, or

requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations.
5. Require surveyor to replace damaged or lost control points in accordance

with original survey control.
2. Survey Requirements:
1. Establish minimum two permanent working benchmarks on site,

referenced to established benchmarks by survey control points. Record
locations, with horizontal and vertical data in the Project Record
Documents specified in Section 01700.
2. Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out, using high precision
instrumentation.
3. Stake for grading, fill placement, paving and landscaping features.
4. Stake slopes.
5. Stake batter boards for foundations.
6. Establish foundation and column locations and floor elevations.
7. Establish line and levels for mechanical and electrical work.
8. Establish pipe invert elevations.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01050
FIELD ENGINEERING
Page No. 2
9. Establish for manholes, sump pits, catch basins, valve pits, inspection
chamber, telephone manholes, etc., invert and top elevations.
10. Establish and ensure vertically of columns, walls, and parapets.
3. Monitoring:
1. Monitoring and record each suspended slab level, at edge of floor and in
centre (and at every 3 m for power trowelled slabs) after concrete is
placed and finished, for accuracy, to specified lines and levels.
2. Monitor and record deflections and creep of suspended slabs and

columns at key locations designated by the Engineer, on a bi-monthly
basis. Report effects deflections and creep may have on access floor
adjustment and on exterior cladding adjustments.
3. Monitor and ensure that completed work is within specified tolerances.

Indicate promptly to the Engineer any discrepancies and remedial work
required.
4. RECORDS
1. Maintain a complete, accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses,

including a photographic record.
2. On completion of foundations basement slabs, slabs on grade, floor slabs, roof

slab and major site improvements, prepare a certified plan of survey showing
dimensions, locations, angles and elevations of Works.
3. On completion of slab elevations and deflections survey, prepare a certified plan

of survey showing found conditions and changes from previously found
conditions.
5. SUBMITTALS
1. On request of the Engineer, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field

engineering work.
2. Submit certificates, drawings, calculations and photographs, stamped and signed

by Surveyor and Contractor, certifying that elevations and locations of completed
Work are in conformance with Contract Documents, as indicated under items
3.1, 3.2 and 3.3 of this Section.
6. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
1. Promptly notify the Engineer in writing if subsurface conditions at the Place of the
Works differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents.
2. Should the Engineer determine that the conditions do differ materially from a
reasonable assumption of probable conditions based thereon instructions will be
issued for change in the Works.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01050
FIELD ENGINEERING
Page No. 3
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01200
PROJECT MEETINGS
Page No. 1
1. PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
1. Within 15 days after award of Contract, a meeting will be scheduled to review and
agree on administrative procedures and responsibilities applicable during the
course of the Works. The meeting will be chaired by the Engineer.
2. The meeting will be attended by the Engineer, Contractor and major

Subcontractors and by their authorized representatives.
3. Agree with the Engineer on time and location of meeting and notify parties
concerned minimum 5 days before meeting.
4. Agenda will include the following:
1. Appointment of official representatives of participants in the Work;
2. Schedule of Work, progress scheduling.
3. Schedule of submission of shop drawings, samples, colour chips, (Section

01300);
4. Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds,

utilities;
5. Delivery schedule of specified equipment;
6. Assigned Subcontractors and suppliers;
7. Site security;
8. Safety;
9. Procedures for handling Contemplated Variations, Variation Orders, Field

Orders approvals required, mark-up percentages permitted, time
extensions, overtime and other administrative requirements;
10. Record drawings, As-built Records, Data Binders;
11. Maintenance manuals and Spare Parts;
12. Take-over procedures, acceptances, warranties;
13. Monthly progress claims, administrative procedures, photographs,

holdbacks;
14. Appointment of inspection and testing agencies or firms;
5. The Engineer will record minutes and provide copies to those in attendance.
2. PROGRESS MEETINGS

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01200
PROJECT MEETINGS
Page No. 2
1. Progress Meetings will be held on a regular basis throughout the course of the
Work to review the actual progress of work and discuss outstanding issues and
action required.
2. Such meetings to be attended by the Contractor and major Subcontractors, as

well as the Engineer.
The Employer or any of his representatives may attend these meetings.
3. Representative of Contractor and Subcontractors attending shall be qualified and

authorized to act on behalf of the party each represents.
4. Prepare written notice of each meeting, in the form of an Agenda, and distribute
four days in advance of meeting date to all concerned.
5. The Engineer will chair the meetings and will record the minutes, including
significant proceedings and decisions, identifying Action items to be dealt with
prior to subsequent meetings.
6. Following the meeting, copies of minutes will be distributed. Transmit additional

copies to affected parties not in attendance.
7. The Contractor shall provide Progress Reports for review at Meetings.
3. TECHNICAL MEETINGS
1. Technical Meetings will also be held on regular basis throughout the contract
duration. The aim of the meetings are to discuss technical issues related to the
project.
2. The Engineer will chair such meetings which shall be attended by the Contractor,
Subcontractors and specialists as well as the Engineer.
3. The Engineer will record and distribute copies of the Minutes of Technical
Meetings.
4. CONTRACTOR’S MEETINGS
1. During course of the Work, the Contractor shall schedule additional meetings with
Subcontractors, suppliers and others for the purpose of planning and other
matters having to do with the progress of the Work.
2. The Engineer reserves the right to attend Contractor’s meetings with prior notice
to the Contractor.
3. Record minutes of all Contractor Meetings and distribute copies to the Engineer,
prior to next scheduled Progress Meeting.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01300
SUBMITTALS
Page No. 1
1. DESCRIPTION
1. Scope: This Section specifies the requirements and general procedures for
submittals by the Contractor. All submittals shall be in the English language or
accompanied by a certified English translation.
2. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: This Section is intended to amplify, expand

and coordinate the information and requirements contained elsewhere in the
Contract Documents and reference must be made to such Documents (in
particular the relevant Specification Sections) by the Contractor for specific
requirements, in order to determine the full extent of his obligations with regard to
submittals.
1.1 SUBMISSION
1. Submit programmes, reports, shop drawings, samples and other items to the
Engineer.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES
1. Correspondence: Except where more copies are required by stipulation

elsewhere in the Contract Documents, all correspondence to the Engineer and
attachments thereto shall be submitted in one original and three photocopies. A4
size paper shall be used whenever possible.
2. Insurance Policies: Policies of insurance as required by the Conditions of

Contract shall be submitted to the Engineer, and the terms approved by the
Employer, prior to commencement of any construction activity on site. Within
fourteen (14) calendar days of the date of commencement of the mobilization
period the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer policies of insurance for the
Engineer’s and Employer’s review and approval.
3. Contractor’s Site Organization:
1. Within fourteen (14) calendar days of the date of commencement of the

mobilization period and before commencement of construction activity on
site, the Contractor shall submit a full listing of his proposed site staff for
the organization, management and supervision of the Works. The list shall
include all personnel from the Contractor’s Engineer through to foreman
level and shall amplify and reflect the details already given by the
Contractor in the Site Organization Chart submitted with his Tender and
incorporated in the Contract. Such listing shall be supported by
authenticated details of the qualifications and experience of such
personnel, (to the extent not previously submitted with the Tender and
incorporated in the Contract) for review and approval by the Engineer.
2. The Engineer shall have the right to interview any of the Contractor’s
proposed staff before final approval is given and not withstanding any such
final approval the Engineer retains the right to instruct the removal
forthwith of any person employed by the Contractor in or about the Works
who, in the opinion of the Engineer, misconduct himself, or is incompetent
or negligent in the proper performance of his duties, or whose employment
is otherwise considered by the Engineer to be undesirable.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01300
SUBMITTALS
Page No. 2
1.3 PROGRAMME AND PROGRESS OF WORKS
1. General:
1. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all construction programming

as specified hereinafter and as may otherwise be required to ensure that
the Contract Completion and milestone date requirements are met. To this
end the Contractor shall prepare a practicable Construction Programme in
reproducible form showing the order and method in which he proposes to
execute the Works and the dates upon which the various elements, trades
and sections of the works will be started and completed including dates for
submittal and approval of shop drawings and samples for procurement and
delivery of materials and equipment, for construction, installation,
inspection, testing and completion.
2. The Contractor’s Construction Programme shall be based upon the

approved Preliminary Work Programme submitted by the Contractor with
his Tender, and shall clearly indicate milestone dates and the
interrelationships of the various elements of the Works with the works of
other Contractors employed in and about the Site.
3. If, in preparation his Construction Programme, the Contractor finds it

necessary or prudent to depart from the approved Preliminary Work
Programme, he shall advise the Engineer accordingly, stating the reasons
for the proposed departure, and obtain the Engineer’s approval in principal
thereto.
2. Construction Programme
1. The Construction Programme shall be in the form of Diagrams

incorporating activities for all work to be performed by the Contractor, his
Subcontractors and other Contractors to be employed in or about the Site,
supported by computer analysis and schedules and prepared in
accordance with the principles of Critical Path Method (CPM)
programming.
2. The Construction Programme shall be compiled by a Planning &

Scheduling Engineer approved by the Engineer and shall be skilled and
experienced in construction programming of the kind specified for this
project.
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with access to the data base
relating to the Construction Programme and the Contractor shall provide
the Engineer with the said data for loading into the Engineer’s computer,
whether by means of floppy diskettes CD discs or dataline communication.
3. The computer output diagrams shall be clearly and accurately presented

with work activities relating to specific locations or levels grouped for ease
of reference. Each work activity shall have the following information shown
in the diagram.
1. Activity number.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01300
SUBMITTALS
Page No. 3
2. Concise description of the Work.

3. Specification reference or trade code.
4. Location of work or area code.
5. Duration in calendar days.
4. Work activities contained in the Construction Programme shall be such

that the maximum duration of each activity does not exceed fourteen (14)
days with not more than two percent (2%) exceeding this limit. These
requirements shall not apply to non-construction activities such as
procurement of materials, delivery of equipment, etc.
5. The Contractor shall include in the Construction Programme any trade or

material restraints indicating the movement of trades who are performing
the major work. These and any other particular programming restraints
which the Contractor has incorporated in his computer diagrams shall be
brought to the Engineer’s attention at the time of submittal.
3. Computer Analysis Reports
1. In addition to the network diagrams the Contractor shall submit the

following computer analysis outputs:
1. Activity Status Report.
2. Successor / Predecessors Analysis Report listing all the

precedence's and interdependencies between work activities.
3. Subcontractor Reports: Individual reports, sorted chronologically by

early start, for each Subcontractor. These Reports will only have
the early start and early finish dates for distribution to
Subcontractors.
4. Material Procurement Report based on the early start Construction

Programme, for all significant material items. This Report shall
include dates for initial submittal, final submittal, final approval,
release for ordering/fabrication, shipping and delivery to Site.
5. Current Status Report: A listing of actual start and finish dates,

activities already started and completed and percentage completion
of activities still in progress.
2. The Activity Status Report shall have the following minimum data for each
activity:
1. Activity number.
2. Concise description of the Work.
3. Specification reference or trade code.
4. Location of work or area code.
5. Duration in calendar days.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01300
SUBMITTALS
Page No. 4
6. Early start date (calendar).
7. Early finish date (calendar).
8. Late start date (calendar).
9. Late Finish date (calendar).
10. Total float (calendar days).
11. Free float (calendar days).
12. Percentage completion.
13. Remaining duration in calendar days.
4. Supporting Data
1. The Contractor shall also prepare and submit in narrative form the under
mentioned supporting data with the submittal of his Construction
Programme. Any changes in this information shall be submitted with
successive updates and revisions.
1. The proposed number of working days per week.
2. The holidays and other non-working days (except Fridays)

observed during the duration of the Contract (by date).
3. The planned number of shifts per day.
4. The number of hours per shift.
5. The planned usage of major construction plant and equipment on

the Site, on a monthly basis.
6. The planned procurement and delivery of local and imported

materials.
7. The average weekly manpower usage for each trade to be

employed for the Works.
8. The productivity rates for each major work sequence or for any
specific activities required by the Engineer.
9. Explanation of all changes in logic, durations, manpower, plant and

equipment.
10. Actual start and finish dates of activities already completed, and
percentage completion of activities still in progress.
5. Forty-Five (45) Day Programme: At monthly intervals, the Contractor shall

submit a separate programme developed from the approved Construction

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01300
SUBMITTALS
Page No. 5
Programme covering a period of forty-five (45) calendar days and denoting the
Contractor’s and Subcontractor’s daily work activities and their interrelationship
with the work of other Contractors, if any.
6. Construction Programme Revisions and Updates
1. Once the initial Construction Programme is submitted and approved by the

Engineer, the Contractor shall perform monthly updates. The update will
follow a visit to the job site where, in the presence of the Engineer, the
Contractor will record the actual starts and finishes and percentages
complete and, using this data, update the computer analysis. The updated
analysis will be accompanied by a narrative report containing the
supporting data referred to hereinbefore, which shall indicate the
necessary action dates and requirements for material, labour and plant
acquisition. The narrative report shall also focus upon the construction
progress and shall particularly note conditions that may delay progress of
the Work. In the event of such delays, the Contractor shall describe actions
proposed to overcome the adverse conditions to maintain the planned
construction programme.
2. Site Progress Meetings attended by the Engineer, the Contractor, and his
principal Subcontractors will be held monthly immediately following the
monthly site visit referred to in the previous paragraph, specifically to
review the progress of the Works. At this meeting the latest update of the
last approved Construction Programme will be examined with reference to
the records made during the said site visit in order to verify the following:
1. Actual start and finish dates of activities completed during the

period since the previous update or revision.
2. Remaining durations and percentage of completion for all activities

in progress.
3. Logic, time and cost data for variation order work that will be
incorporated into the Construction Programme and Cost Loaded
Construction Schedule.
4. Interim payment due to the Contractor based on percentage

completion of activities in the approved cost Loaded Construction
Schedule.
5. Contractor’s measures to rectify delays from the planned dates.
3. The Contractor shall perform the work in accordance with the latest
approved Construction Programme. If any work is found not to be on
programme during any regular review of the work, the Contractor shall
immediately advise the Engineer in writing of action proposed to bring the
work on programme. The Contractor shall thereupon prepare and submit a
revised construction programme indicating such action, together with a
typed list of revisions to programme logic. Correction and updating of the
programme will be done as often as necessary until the project is on
programme.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01300
SUBMITTALS
Page No. 6
4. Within five (5) working days after receipt of a notice from the Engineer, the
Contractor shall submit a revised Construction programme for any of the
following reasons:
1. When delay in completion of any activity or group of activities

indicates a slippage of the Contract Completion Date or a milestone
date by fourteen (14) calendar days or ten percent (10%) of the
remaining duration of the Contract period, whichever is less.
2. When delays in submittals or deliveries or work stoppage are

encountered which make re-planning of the work necessary.
3. When the programme does not represent the actual execution and
progress of the Works being performed in the field.
4. Where a change in the work sequence is proposed or has been

instituted by the Contractor. Any such change should not, in any
case, be made without the Engineer’s approval.
5. Where the issue of a variation order or other instruction would

significantly effect the programme and/or progress of the Works.
5. In the event the Contractor requests an extension of time for completion of

the Works or requests an extension to the specified milestone dates, he
shall furnish such justification and supporting data as the Engineer may
deem necessary for the evaluation thereof. Submission of proper
substantiation based on revised activity logic, durations and costs is
obligatory with any such request.
6. Should the Contractor choose to reflect part or all of any requested time
extension in a revised Construction, Programme, before the Engineer has
determined the Contractor’s proper time extension entitlement, he shall do
so at his own risk and responsibility and any Programme revised under
these circumstances shall only serve as a revised under circumstances
shall only serve as a tool for monitoring the progress of the works until
such time as the Engineer has determined the Contractor’s time extension
entitlement. The Contractor shall revise his Construction Programme in
accordance with the Engineer’s determination and execute the Works
accordingly.
7. Float belongs to the project and must be used in the best interest of
completing the project on time. Accordingly, any existing float shall be
used to the maximum extent possible to offset unexpected delays, which
occur in connection with the Contractor’s work, acts of God, and
authorized variations in the scope of the Work.
7. Programme Submittal Procedures and Requirements
1. Submittal of the initial Construction Programme for approval shall be in

accordance with the following procedure:

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01300
SUBMITTALS
Page No. 7
1. The qualifications of the Planning & Scheduling Engineer shall be

submitted to the Engineer within seven (7) calendar days from the
date of commencement of the mobilization period.
2. The Contractor shall submit his initial Construction Programme (in

triplicate) within twenty-one (21) calendar days of the date of
commencement of moblization period. Such initial Construction
Programme shall include the following completed documents:
(a) Diagrams shall show the sequence and interdependence of

all items of work required under the Contract, shall indicate
the milestone dates and the work of other Contractors).
(b) Activity Status Report.
(c) Successors / Predecessors Report
(a) Supporting Data.
2. After approval of the Contractor’s initial Construction Programme all

subsequent revision and monthly update submittals shall comprise the
following:
1. Three (3) prints of the Computer Diagrams from the last approved
Construction Programme, suitably marked up in colours to show all
revisions, and signed by the Contractor and all Subcontractors.
2. Three (3) copies of the updated Activity Status Report.
3. Three (3) copies of the updated Successors / Predecessors Report.
4. Three (3) copies of all supporting data.
3. Revisions and monthly updates to the Construction Programme shall be

submitted within five (5) working days of the data date for inputting
revised/updated information to create the revised/updated computer
analysis. The data date for the first monthly update shall be one month
after Construction Programme, and successive data dates shall be at
monthly intervals. The said data date should coincide with the date of the
Site Progress Meeting at which time the records of progress are verified.
4. Each programme submitted shall be signed by all principal Subcontractors

before being submitted to the Engineer thereby confirming that they have
reviewed the said programme. If any Subcontractor has reservations
regarding his ability to comply with the requirements of the programme to
which he has appended his signature, the Contractor shall instruct the
Subcontractor to list such submitted to the Engineer with the programme
submittal for his information. No reservation by any Subcontractor nor the
fact of informing the Engineer in respect thereof, shall relieve the
Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract to complete the works
in accordance with the Contract in the time prescribed therein.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01300
SUBMITTALS
Page No. 8
8. Cost Loaded Construction Schedule
1. Within seven (7) working days of obtaining approval of his initial

Construction Programme, the Contractor shall submit in triplicate for the
Engineer’s approval a Cost Loaded Construction Schedule detailing the
costs of all work activities shown in the Construction Programme based
upon the Bills of Quantities, with the total equalling the Contract price, and
including all necessary supporting details. The Contractor shall submit a
cash flow based upon the bill of quantities and payment terms in
accordance with the conditions of contract.
2. The Cost Loaded Construction Schedule shall be the basis for calculating
interim payments pro-rata to the work performed. Such schedule and the
calculations for interim payment shall employ computerized CPM
techniques.
3. Revisions to the Construction Programme and/or variations in the Work

may require re-allocation of costs and in this case a revised Cost Loaded
Construction Schedule shall be submitted in triplicate with the revised
programme.
4. No single activity shall have a cost allocation greater than QR 350,000

(Three Hundred and Fifty Thousand Qatari Riyals) except for single items
of equipment costing in excess of this limit or where greater cost
allocations for specific activities have been approved by the Engineer.
5. At the time of submitting his cost Loaded Construction Schedule, the

Contractor shall provide the Engineer with two schedules of anticipated
monthly payments, one based on the Early Finish dates and the other on
Late Finish dates in the approved Construction Programme and taking due
account of the terms of payment and advance repayment, etc., stipulated
in the Contract.
9. Programming Costs: All costs in establishing, maintaining, revising and updating

the Construction Programme shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.4 PROGRESS REPORTS
1. In addition to the supporting data and narrative report accompanying the monthly
programme update required pursuant to Clause 1.3 of this section, prepare and
submit the following Progress Reports in a manner and format to be approved by
the Engineer. Such reports shall be cross-referenced where relevant to the
Contractor’s approved Construction Programme.
2. Daily Report:
1. This report shall detail, the labour, material and plant resources being used
on each working day and the allocation of such resources to the various
site activities in progress. Details of subcontractors’ work and resources
shall also be included in the report. Daily Reports signed by the Contractor
must be submitted on the morning of the working day following the day to
which the report relates and may be completed in longhand provided all
entries are legible.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01300
SUBMITTALS
Page No. 9
2. The Engineer shall also sign the Daily Report after making any
amendments or amplification as he may deem fit in order that the Report
shall be a true and adequate record of activities and resources being used
on site on the day concerned. A copy of the Report singed and amended
by the Engineer will be issued to the Contractor for record purposes.
3. Biweekly Submittal and Procurement Report: This report shall detail the
preparation, submittal and approval status of shop drawings, material and
equipment submittals, samples and mock-ups, and also the status of
material and equipment procurement, orders placed, delivery periods and
site delivery dates. Details of subcontractors’ work and their suppliers shall
also be included in the Biweekly Submittal and Procurement Report.
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
1. Shop Drawings: Where the Contract Documents require the Contractor to

prepare shop drawings, the same shall satisfactorily establish actual details of
manufactured or fabricated items and of work to be executed; they shall clearly
identify materials, dimensions, thicknesses, components, attachments, relation
with adjoining work and spaces, and all other pertinent information. Shop
drawings shall clarify and amplify the design drawings and other design
requirements and shall, subject to the Engineer’s approval, incorporate minor
changes in design or construction as may be necessary or otherwise desirable to
suit the requirements of the work.
2. Samples: Where the Contract Documents require the Contractor to submit

samples, the same shall satisfactorily establish that the quality, construction,
workmanship, finish, colour, pattern and any other characteristics of the material
or equipment to be provided, are in conformance with the Contract requirements
and to the Engineer’s reasonable satisfaction.
3. General Provisions
1. The Contractor shall prepare, review, coordinate and submit to the

Engineer for his approval such shop drawings and samples as are required
by the Contract Documents or as may be required by the Engineer during
the course of the Works.
2. During the mobilization period the Contractor shall prepare and submit for
the Engineer’s approval a “Schedule for submission of Shop Drawings and
Samples”. Such schedule shall detail the dates for submission and
approval of each
group or batch of shop drawings and samples required by the Contract

Documents, Specifications, including those required from Subcontractors
and shall make due allowance for time reasonably required by the
Engineer for the processing thereof.
3. The submission of shop drawings and sample shall be made in

accordance with the approved “Schedule for submission of Shop Drawings
and Samples” and with such promptness and in an orderly sequence so as
to cause no delay to the progress and completion of the works nor to the

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01300
SUBMITTALS
Page No. 10
progress or completion of the work of any subcontractor or other

Contractor employed on or in connected with the Works.
4. At the time of making his submission, the Contractor shall inform the
Engineer in writing of any deviation between the shop drawings / samples
being submitted and the requirements stipulated or reasonably implied by
the Contract augments.
5. By submitting shop drawings and samples the Contractor hereby

represents that he has determined and verified all dimensions, relations to
existing work, coordination with work to be installed later, coordination with
information on previously submitted shop drawings and samples, and has
verified their compliance with all the requirements of the Contract
Documents. The accuracy of all such information is the responsibility of the
Contractor and in reviewing shop drawings and samples the Engineer shall
be entitled to rely upon the Contractor’s representation that such
information is correct and accurate.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct location of his work,
irrespective of approval by the Engineer, and shall pay all costs and
expenses incurred by others due to improper location of his work.
6. Subcontractors shall submit their shop drawings and samples through the
Contractor who shall review and coordinate with his own and other
Subcontractors’ drawings and/or samples before submitting to the
Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible in all respects for his
Subcontractor’s shop drawings and samples as if they were his own.
7. Neither the fabrication of prefabricated items, nor the ordering of any work,
materials or equipment, nor the execution of any work on site, shall
commence until shop drawings and samples, relevant to the said items,
work, etc., and required by the Specification, have been submitted and
approved in writing by the Engineer.
4. Preparation and Submittal Requirements
1. Shop drawings to be prepared by the Contractor and by his principal

Subcontractors for the electro-mechanical works, shall be prepared on the
Site of the Works to facilitate proper liaison and coordination between
trades and so as to allow the Engineer ready access for review during the
preparation process.
2. Shop drawings and samples shall be prepared after site dimensions have,
if possible, been taken. Shop drawings shall be prepared in indelible ink on
reproducible transparencies, and using metric units of measurement.
3. Shop drawings shall be dimensioned in the metric system, shall describe

accurately the method of fabrication, installation, applied finishes, types
and sizes of all members and fixings, and shall, where applicable, indicate
methods of marking components for site erection.
4. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions and field conditions and shall
check and coordinate the shop drawings and samples required in

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01300
SUBMITTALS
Page No. 11
connection with a particular trade or Section of the Works with the

requirements of other trades or Sections related thereto.
5. In order to ensure proper coordination, shop drawings and samples for

each system or element of work shall be submitted in a single package.
The Engineer may require in writing that all relevant parts of a system or
element be submitted before any component item is approved.
6. Where the Contract Documents require the Contractor to submit composite

shop drawings these shall show all electro-mechanical services
installations fully coordinated, each service with all others and with
surrounding structural and architectural work. Composite shop drawings
shall be in sufficient detail and of a suitable scale to show overall
dimensions and levels of all ductwork, piping, conduit trunking, equipment,
fixtures, structural members and related architectural features, and shall
indicate clearances between such items.
7. Shop drawings and samples shall be submitted to the Engineer on the Site
of the Works, unless otherwise directed, and each submission shall be
accompanied by a Standard Transmittal Form (in duplicate-self
carbonized). The numbering system, size and format of the shop drawings
and transmittal forms shall be as required and approved by the Engineer.
8. Shop drawings for each Section of the Works shall be numbered

consecutively and the numbering system shall be retained throughout all
revisions. Each shop drawing and sample shall have a clear space for the
official stamps of the Contractor, Subcontractors and the Engineer and, in
the case of samples, the manufacturer’s or supplier’s name, the trade
name, material type, intended application, project title and date of
submission. Where clear space is not available on samples, the Contractor
shall submit with tags or stickers attached thereto. Manufacturer’s
installation directions shall be provided with each sample.
9. Shop drawings shall be prepared in the form of reproducible transparency.

At the time of submission, the Contractor shall notify Engineer in writing of
any deviations in the shop drawings from the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
10. Shop drawings shall conform to the following:
1. Drawings and diagrams shall be of high technical standard easy to

read and understand with clear printing and details of suitable size,
such that the drawings prepared on A0, A1 and A2 format shall be
suitable of reduction to A3 size . Drawings prepared on A3 format
shall be suitable for reduction to A4 format.
2. The presentation shall be clear, with sufficient space between

views and sections.
3. Sufficient space shall be kept above the title block at the right
bottom of the drawing, for notes, references, revisions, etc., in a
sequential order.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01300
SUBMITTALS
Page No. 12
4. Size of the drafted originals shall be:
A1 : 841 mm x 594 mm (between trimming lines)

The standard drawing size is A1.
The A0 size (1189 mm x 841 mm) may be used if there is no

alternative. Other non standard format shall not be used.
5. The scale shall be indicated on the drawing. Recommended scales

are:
- 1:1, 1:2, 1:5, 1:10, 1:25 for details.

- 1:50, 1:100, 1:250 and 1:500 for general features.
-
11. The number of “copies” of shop drawings and samples in each
submission shall be as follow:
- one (1) copy of all drawings, details, diagrams, etc., in a

transparent reproducible form together with three (3) prints
thereof,
- three (3) copies of all manufacturers’ and suppliers’ literature,

brochure, catalogue cuts, performance and test data, etc., one
of which shall be in original form.
- Two (2) of every sample.
The Engineer, after his review, will return one (1) copy of each of the
above (but not the transparency) duly stamped with the approval status.
12. The Contractor and all concerned Subcontractors shall sign and officially
stamp each submitted shop drawing print and sample to certify their
completeness and compliance with the Contract Documents. The original
mother print retained by the Contractor shall not be signed by him or his
Subcontractors in case revisions thereto may later be found necessary.
5. Engineer’s review and approval
1. Shop drawings and samples submitted without the signature and official
stamp of the Contractor (and all concerned subcontractors) and
submissions which, in the Engineer’s opinion, are incomplete, contain
numerous errors, or have not been properly checked or coordinated, will
be returned to the Contractor for completion and re-submission.
2. Except for finish, pattern, colour and other matters in respect of which the
Engineer’s decision is required in accordance with the Contract
Documents, the Engineer’s review and approval of shop drawings and
samples submitted by the Contractor is for general conformance with the

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01300
SUBMITTALS
Page No. 13
design concept and specifications and shall not relieve the Contractor from
responsibility for any deviations from, or errors or omissions in respect of
the requirements of the Contract Documents, unless the Contractor has
informed the Engineer in writing of specific deviations and the Engineer
has given written approval thereto.
3. The Engineer will review shop drawings and samples with reasonable
promptness and will return them to the Contractor with the Engineer’s
stamp and signature applied thereto. The stamp shall contain a statement
as to the status of approval of each shop drawing or sample using the
following classifications:
1. “APPROVED” means the Engineer has no reservations and the

Contractor may proceed with ordering, fabrication, work on site,
etc.
2. “APPROVED AS NOTED” means that the submittal is approved

and the Contractor may proceed as in (1) above, provided he
complies with the Engineer’s comments or notes made in writing
thereon. Notations by the Engineer which may in the Contractor’s
opinion increase the Contract Price or the Time for Completion,
shall be brought to the Engineer’s attention by the Contractor in
writing within 15 days of receiving the Engineer’s comments and
before he places any orders, commence fabrication or otherwise
proceeds with the work to which the shop drawing or sample
related. Unless the Contractor has so advised the Engineer, any
claim for additional payment or extra time for completion in respect
of such notations, will not be entertained.
If, for any reason the Contractor cannot comply with the Engineer’s
comments/ notes, the Contractor shall make any necessary
revision and resubmit as for status (3) below.
3. “NOT APPROVED – RESUBMIT” means that the submittal does

not comply with the design intent or does not comply with the
contract requirements, or is incomplete, or contains numerous
errors, or has not been properly checked or coordinated. The
Contractor shall make all necessary revisions and resubmit.
4. The Engineer’s approval on shop drawing and samples shall not be

construed as an indication that the work represented by the submission
complies with the Contract Documents except as to matters of finish,
pattern, colour and other matters left to the Engineer’s discretion by the
Contract Documents.
6. Contractor’s revisions and resubmissions
1. The Contractor shall make any corrections or amendments required by the

Engineer’s review of shop drawings and samples and shall resubmit until
the “APPROVED” status is achieved. All such corrections or amendments
shall be clearly indicated on the resubmitted drawings by the use of
revision numbers in circles or triangles, or other method approved by the
Engineer.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01300
SUBMITTALS
Page No. 14
2. The Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing on resubmitted shop

drawings and samples to revisions other than the corrections requested by
the Engineer on previous submission. Unless such written notice has been
given, approval of a re-submitted shop drawing or sample shall not
constitute approval of any changes not requested on the prior submission.
3. In the event of written rejection by the Engineer to a particular material or

sample, the Contractor shall submit within fourteen (14) calendar days of
such rejection, samples of three alternative materials for the Engineer’s
approval and the Engineer shall reject or approve all or any of these
materials within fourteen (14) days of their submission. This procedure
shall be repeated until such time as a sample of material is approved by
the Engineer. Failure on the part of the Contractor to obtain the Engineer’s
approval, which shall not be withheld unreasonably, to all or any one
sample or material shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his liabilities
and obligations under the Contract.
4. The Engineer may at any time call upon the Contractor to submit samples
of any material used or to be used in the Work, including those specified
in the Contract by “Brand Name”, for comparison with the specification
and/or approved sample. Should any such sample fail to meet the
requirements of the specification and/or standard of the accepted sample,
then all materials from which the sample has been taken shall be removed
from the Site immediately and all work executed incorporating such
material shall be cut out and made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer
all at the expense of the Contractor. The procedure to be adopted for
obtaining the Engineer’s approval of material to replace that condemned,
shall be the same as the procedure outlined herein for approval of
materials generally.
7. Cost and time Variations
1. No acceptance or approval by the Engineer of any shop drawing or sample

submission made by the Contractor, nor any notes, comments,
stipulations, requests for clarifications, etc., made by the Engineer upon
such submissions during his review and approval thereof, shall constitute
an authorization to any variation in the Contract Price or to any extra time
for completion of the Works.
2. Once shop drawings or samples have been approved by the Engineer’

they shall not be departed from without his written permission, and any
such authorized departure shall not constitute a Variation Order under
Clause 51 of the Conditions of Contract unless expressly so stated in
writing by the Engineer.
1.6 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
1. Progress Record and As-Built Drawings
1. As the work progresses the Contractor shall provide and maintain on site a
complete and accurate record of all changes and deviations from the

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01300
SUBMITTALS
Page No. 15
Contract Documents, or from previously approved shop drawings, for

review and approval by the Engineer.
2. This record shall be updated on a weekly basis and in its final form shall
represent the Permanent Works as finally executed (as-built) and shall
include prints of all finally approved shop drawings (including fully
coordinated as-built composite services drawings) for all elements of the
Permanent Works.
3. In progress record drawings and other record documents shall be available

on site for inspection by the Engineer at all times.
2. Submittal Procedures for As-built Drawings
1. Final as-built record drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
review, not later than twenty (20) days after the date of issuance of the
Engineer’s Certificate of Completion of the Works.
2. After review and approval by the Engineer of the final as-built drawings
and other record documents, the Contractor shall, within ten (10) days
thereof, produce a final set of “as-built drawings” and submit to the
Engineer the following:
- one (1) copy of each as-built drawing in transparent reproducible

form.
- one (1) print of each as-built drawing.
- one (1) set of 3.5” diskettes or CD’s with files of each as-built
drawing.
3. Operation and Maintenance Instruction Manuals
1. At the time of submitting final “as-built” record drawings for the Engineer’s
review, submit also for his review and approval the following:
1. Three (3) copies of all manufacturers’ and suppliers’ literature,

brochures, catalogue cuts, performance characteristics, operation
and maintenance manuals and other pertinent data necessary to
enable the Employer to operate, maintain, dismantle, repair,
reassemble and adjust all part of the Works.
1.7 CAD PRODUCED DRAWINGS
1. The Contractor is encouraged to prepare his shop drawings, progress record

drawings, and final as-built drawings using computer aided design and drafting
techniques (CAD). If the Contractor chooses this option, then the requirement in
the previous clause for the Contractor to submit a microfiche of each drawing shall
be replaced by the requirement to submit a CD or diskette for the drawings to be
produced.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01300
SUBMITTALS
Page No. 16
2. All computer hardware, software, computer room and environmental controls

necessary for the preparation of drawings using CAD shall be provided by the
Contractor at no additional cost should he choose this preferred methods of
drawings production.
1.8 NAMES AND ADDRESSES
1. Upon completion of the Works the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a full
list of names and addresses (including telephone and fax numbers) of all
suppliers, subcontractors and specialists who have contributed to the completion
of the Permanent Works.
1.9 PHOTOGRAPHIC AND VIDEO RECORDS OF CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS
1. Photographs
1. During the progress of the Work, submit in triplicate, coloured photographs

taken once a month by an approved professional photographer consisting
of minimum ten (10) views, all taken where directed by the Engineer. The
prints shall be 200 x 300 mm linen backed. At the completion of all work
final photographs shall be taken as directed by the Engineer.
2. The photographs shall be neatly labeled, dated and identified in a title box
on the back of the photograph showing the date of exposure, Project
name, Project location, direction of view and signed by the Contractor.
3. All negatives shall be retained by the photographer until completion of the

Work at which time they shall be delivered to the Employer in their proper
order and shall become the property of the Employer.
2. Video recording
1. Under the direction of the Engineer (and using the services of an approved
Specialist in video film production if required), prepare a weekly video
recording (on a VHS video cassette) of the current construction progress of
all parts of the Works with accompanying soundtrack to record the date,
weather conditions, special problems, etc.,
2. Up to thirty (30) minutes of recording time per week may be required by

the Engineer such that each month of construction progress will be
recorded on one two (2) hours video cassette. After each recording
session the cassette shall be submitted to the Engineer by noon on the
following day neatly labelled, dated, identified and signed by the
Contractor.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01400
QUALITY CONTROL – TESTING SERVICES
Page No. 1
1. GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality

control services.
2. Quality Control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including
reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing
authorities. They do not include contract enforcement activities performed by the
Engineer.
3. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with

requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of
responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements.
4. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation

procedures, not production of standard products.
1. Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities

are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in
those Sections may also cover production of standard products.
2. Specified inspections, tests and related actions do not limit Contractor’s

quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract
Documents requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality control services required by

the Engineer, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions
of this Section.
5. Samples: Prior to ordering or delivery of any materials or products on site,

contractor shall supply for the Engineer’s review and approval, samples,
schedules, manufacturer’s certificate, etc., for materials and goods which are to
be tested and incorporated in work. No claims for extra cost and time due to
improper submissions will be approved. See Section 01300 – Submittals.
1.3 TRAVEL EXPENSES
1. Where, because of the source of origin or place of manufacturer of a product, it is

necessary for the Engineer, Employer’s representative to visit places away from
the site of the Works for supervision or inspection of items for compliance with the
Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay the cost of executive travelling,
lodging and food for the representatives.
1.4 RESPONSIBILITIES

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01400
Page No. 2
1. Contractor’s Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated as the responsibility of

another identified entity, Contractor shall provide inspections, tests and other
quality control services specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents and
required by authorities having jurisdiction. Costs for these services are included in
the Contract Sum.
1. Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections,

tests and other quality control services are to be performed, the Contractor
shall employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform
quality control services. Costs for these services are included in the
Contractor’s Price.
2. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections,

tests or other quality control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate non-
compliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the
original test was Contractor’s responsibility.
1. The cost of retesting or construction to be revised or replaced by the

Contractor, is the Contractor’s responsibility where required tests
performed indicate non-compliance with Contract Document requirements.
The costs shall be borne and paid directly by the Contractor.
3. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections,

tests and similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested.
Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of
personnel. Auxiliary services required include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Provide access to the Work.
2. Furnish incidental labour and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections

and tests.
3. Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that

require testing or assist the agency in taking samples.
4. Provide facilities for storage and curing of test samples.
5. Deliver samples to testing laboratories.
6. Provide the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for
materials mixes that require control by the testing agency.
7. Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the

Project Site.
4. Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent agency engaged to perform

inspections, sampling and testing of materials and construction specified in
individual Sections shall cooperate with the Engineer and the Contractor in
performance of the agency’s duties. The testing agency shall provide qualified
personnel to perform required inspections and tests.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01400
Page No. 3
5. Coordination: Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required

services with a minimum of delay. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of
removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests.
1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests,

taking samples, and similar activities.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. Unless the Contractor is responsible for this service, the independent testing
agency shall submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, tests
or similar service to the Engineer. If the Contractor is responsible for the service,
submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar
service through the Contractor.
2. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority,
when the authority so directs.
3. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test or similar service include, but
are not limited to the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making the inspection or test.
6. Designation of the Work and test method
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete inspection or test data.
9. Test results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work

complies with Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Qualifications for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service

agencies, including independent testing laboratories, which are pre-qualified by
the Engineer.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01400
Page No. 4
2. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the project shall be
authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in Qatar.
3. For tests that cannot be performed in Doha, Qatar. Bear the cost of carrying out
these tests elsewhere and the contractor shall pay the cost of executive travelling,
lodging and food for the Engineer and Employer’s representative to witness such
tests.
2. EXECUTION
2.1 PROJECT SITE SAMPLES
1. Erect on the site, sample of cladding which shall include portion of structure,
curtain wall and glazed windows, in location agreed by the Engineer.
2. If accepted, such sample may be incorporated in and made part of the Work.
3. See trade sections for detailed list of other site samples required for the project.
2.2 MOCK-UP
1. Prepare mock-up of glazed curtain wall, pre-cast concrete cladding, etc., as

required by different Sections of the Specifications.
2. Remove mock-up not suitable to be incorporated in work as and when directed by

the Engineer.
2.3 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
1. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar

services, repair damaged construction and restore substrate and finishes. Comply
with Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section “Cutting and
Patching”.
2. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect
repaired construction.
3. Repair and protection is Contractor’s responsibility, regardless of the assignment

of responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01430
TESTING OF GLAZED CURTAIN WALL
Page No. 1
1. GENERAL
To carry out inspection and testing of glazed curtain wall in accordance with the Contract
Documents and to follow the directives of the Engineer.
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
1. Compliance with Section 01400.
2. Testing of the curtain wall performance to ensure compliance with requirements

specified in Sections 08800 and 08900 and this Section.
2. APPOINTMENT
1. The Independent Inspection and Testing shall be done by an Independent Testing

company employed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer and shall be
experienced in the testing of exterior curtain wall assemblies.
2. Note that the same testing firm shall be appointed to monitor the tests performed
at the manufacturer’s factory under Section 08900 and to carry out the site testing
under this Section.
3. COST
1. The cost of the Testing firm’s services and equipment for site testing shall be paid
by the Contractor.
2. Should re-testing be required, all costs associated with the re-testing costs shall
be borne by the Contractor.
3. The Contractor shall provide, at no extra cost to the Contract, water, power,
ladders, scaffolding, hoisting, manpower, test chamber, access doors, lighting and
all ancillary items necessary for site testing. The Contractor is also responsible for
overall coordination of site testing with the various Subcontractors who might be
affected by this work.
4. TERMS OF REFERENCE – TESTING FIRM
1. The Test Firm laboratory shall:
1. Provide labour, materials, products, equipment, instrumentation facilities

and services necessary to perform testing work both in the manufacturer’s
factory and on site.
2. Arrange for and provide on-site equipment, air fans, water sprinkler grid
and other miscellaneous equipment.
3. Review and approve test chambers to be erected by the Curtain Wall

Subcontractor, including recommendations for the chamber design and
construction.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01430
Page No. 2
4. Be fully cooperative with the Contractor and Curtain Wall Subcontractor

regarding supply and erection of the exterior cladding prototype onto the
building and subsequent modifications to the prototype that may be
necessary.
5. Monitor the erection of the exterior cladding prototype onto the building,
recording sizes and locations of all components and materials used in the
erection of the prototype.
6. Photograph all aspects of the prototype during its erection, with particular
attention to the components and seals, which will be concealed when the
prototype erection is complete. Photographs will be used to record all
aspects of the installation of the cladding on the building.
7. Seal the exterior cladding prototype to the test chambers as required, to

obtain workable test pressures in the chambers. Make the seals watertight
and air tight, with the assistance of the Curtain Wall Subcontractor.
8. Pre-test the chambers and prototype and ensure all conditions are suitable
to start actual testing before notifying witnesses that actual testing is ready
to proceed.
9. Perform tests specified herein.
10. Submit reports specified herein.
5. WITNESSES
1. Site tests will be witnessed by the Engineer, the Contractor and the applicable
Subcontractors.
2. When pre-testing is complete and found satisfactory, provide notice to the

witnesses, 5 (five) working days in advance of the date when actual testing is to
proceed.
6. TESTS
1. Perform testing as per AAMA procedures and referenced ASTM Standards

therein, and as specified herein.
2. Record weather and temperature conditions during testing periods.
3. Tests required are:
1. Static test – Air Infiltration / Exfiltration – ASTM E783 Field (ASTM E283
Laboratory).
1. Required result: Not exceeding requirements specified in the

applicable Sections of the Specifications and no draft as
determined by the use of a smoke pencil

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01430
Page No. 3
2. Static test – Water Penetration – ASTM E1105 Field (ASTM E283

Laboratory):
3. Static test – Structural – ASTM E330
1. Result required: The inward deflection or any part of the prototype

components shall not be sufficient to cause any member to tough
any part of the main structure or impose loads onto any non-load
bearing interior wall members.
2. Result required: All components shall return to their original

position under zero load, providing that the elastic limits of the
materials have not been exceeded.
3. Result required: Anchorages shall not show permanent set of

shown signs of slackening-off.
4. Result required: No noise shall occur due to movement of

component.
5. Result required: Deflection of members shall not exceed tolerances

specified in Section 08900 of the Specifications.
7. TESTING SEQUENCE AND PRESSURES
1. Perform tests in the following sequential order and to the pressures and
environmental conditions specified.
1. Static, positive and negative: at 38 mm waterhead for air infiltration /

exfiltration.
2. Static, positive: at 20% of maximum design load for water penetration.
3. Static positive and negative: at 50 of maximum design load for structural

and deflection performance.
4. Static positive and negative: at 100% maximum design load for structural
and deflection performance.
5. Repeat static, positive: at 20% of maximum design load for water

penetration.
8. REPORTS
1. On completion of testing, the testing company shall submit five copies of the
certified report to the Engineer for distribution. (One copy each will be provided to
the Contractor and its applicable Subcontractor.) The report shall include:
1. An identification and general description of the test specimen.
2. Scale drawings of the test specimen showing overall dimensions, details of

construction, types of materials, sizes and locations of components, types

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01430
Page No. 4
and locations of seals, connections to the test frame and position of

chambers, location of pressure and deflection gauge and other pertinent
information.
3. Number of repeat tests required and modifications made accordingly to the

test specimen.
4. Photographs, labeled by subject, date and project.
5. A statement, describing any deviations from the procedures herein specified.
6. A list of tests, test results and comparative tables to specified requirements.
7. The effect of tests on finishes and any other deficiencies or failures

disclosed by the tests.
8. Conclusion statements and recommendations.
9. Seal and signature of the testing company responsible for the testing.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01432
SITE INSPECTION OF GLAZED CURTAIN WALL AND WINDOWS
Page No. 1
1. CONFIRMATION OF BUILDING TOLERANCES
1. Prior to commencement of curtain wall installation, the Contractor shall engage a

survey company, acceptable to the Engineer, to record vertical and horizontal
alignments of all substrate supporting members.
2. Make survey record, signed and sealed by surveyor, available to the Engineer. If
survey record indicates that substrate does not meet design tolerances, the
Contractor will undertake corrective measures at no additional cost to the
Contract, prior to installing any portion of the curtain wall.
2. INSPECTION CHECKLIST
1. As installation proceeds, the Engineer will perform on-site inspection of the curtain
wall. The Engineer will visit the site each day that cladding work is being
performed to inspect installation of new cladding and cladding work that previously
was judged not to comply with specified requirements.
2. The Engineer’s inspections shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents, nor from the
obligation to perform quality checks and inspections prior to the inspection by the
Engineer.
3. The following is a checklist of items that will be included in the inspection carried
out by the Engineer. The Contractor will undertake a similar inspection on his own,
prior to the inspection by the Engineer.
1. Make record of weather conditions, including temperature of both

atmosphere and substrate;
2. Check dimensions and deflection of building structure, including

plumpness, to ensure design tolerance of vertical supports is being met
and otherwise confirm that conditions are suitable for installation of curtain
wall;
3. Review anchorages to the building structure, including horizontal and

vertical alignment of supports;
4. Check that provision is being made to compensate for thermally induced

expansion and contractions;
5. Check that provision to prevent sand accumulation has been installed;
6. Check that thermal breaks are provided, are properly located and are
continuous;
7. Check that provision for pressure equalization has been provided.
8. Check that all concealed joints and all items holding components together
(such as screw heads etc.) are made air and watertight;

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01432
Page No. 2
9. Check that air barriers are properly installed, sealed air-tight, are free of
perforations of any kind, that provisions to permit expansion and
contractions are provided and that units will not deflect and ‘pop’.
10. Check that insulation has been installed so that it is continuous, secure
and of the required thickness;
11. Check that spandrel glass is vented as required, to ensure that no build-up
of heat occurs behind spandrel;
12. Check that glass is properly installed and that all lights are within the same
plane and locations within glazing pockets;
13. Check glass bite within glazing pockets;
14. Check that pressure plates are applied in a secure manner and that
pressure on glass is equally applied across the face of each pane so that
no distortion of glass occurs;
15. Check that packing insulation is provided and installed so as to be

thermally efficient and continuous;
16. Check that flashings are properly installed;
17. Check glass for uniformity of colour within glass units and from glass unit
to glass unit;
18. Check glass for distortion or image and obstructions to vision from
whatever cause;
19. Check reflective coating on glass for scratches, pinholes and other faults
and contamination;
20. Check sealed glass units for seal failure;
21. Check edges of glass units for nicks, chips and other defects, which could
give rise to breaking from thermally induced stresses;
22. Check metal finishes for uniformity of colour and for colour-match with
approved samples and mock-ups;
23. Check quality of exposed metal work for quality of joints, flatness,
distortions, rough edges, alignment;
24. Check for continuity and compression of fire-stopping.
25. Check interface of curtain wall and window cladding system with other
building components, particularly with respect to air, thermal and water
tightness and material compatibility.
26. Check curtain wall and adjacent and windows to cladding systems for air
movements within systems and at joints between systems, using artificial
smoke devices;

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01432
Page No. 3
27. Check for compliance with Specification, Drawings, samples, on site

approved mock-up and approved tested prototype;
28. Check that protection against damage is provided
29. Check that provision has been made to prevent alkali run-on from building
structure onto cladding, metal and glass during construction.
30. Check that fixing of curtain wall is done properly and proper anchorage has
been maintained.
31. Check that windows locks are properly installed. Sliding window
mechanism shall be smooth.
32. Check that all accessories are fixed and no parts have been missed.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01470
INSPECTION AND TESTING OF WATERPROOFING
Page No. 1
1. SECTION INCLUDES
1. Compliance with Section 01400.
2. Inspection and testing of Basement waterproofing works to ensure compliance

with requirements specified under Division 7, namely section 07165: Basement
Waterproofing, as designated by the Engineer.
2. APPOINTMENT
1. The inspection firm shall be appointed by the Engineer and shall have detailed
knowledge of the specified waterproofing materials and their installation
techniques.
2. The inspection firm shall be independent, free of affiliations with manufacturers

and waterproofing contractors and shall have minimum 5 years’ experience of
providing waterproofing and roofing inspection services.
3. COSTS
1. The cost of roofing and waterproofing inspection services will be paid by the
Contractor.
4. REPORTING PROCEDURE
1. The inspection firm will report directly to the Engineer.
2. Prior to commencement of inspection work, the inspection firm shall examine the
Drawings and Specifications and become thoroughly knowledgeable with the
requirements of the Work.
3. The inspection firm will submit to the Engineer for review and approval a summary
of the inspection methods and procedures, including sample report forms, it
intends to follow. A copy of the summary will be provided to the Contractor.
4. Prior to start of waterproofing and roofing work the inspection firm will attend a site
meeting with the Engineer the Contractor (and the waterproofing and roofing
trades). The purpose of the meeting will be to ensure that there is a common
understanding of waterproofing and roofing materials and the subsequent
protection required for the completed work.
5. SITE VISITS
1. Inspection firm shall visit the Work each day that waterproofing or roofing material
is being installed.
2. The Contractor (and waterproofing and roofing trades) shall provide adequate
notice to the Engineer (and inspection firm) of times of application for each type of
waterproofing and roofing material.
3. Application of waterproofing and roofing done without providing notice is subject to

rejection by the Engineer and subsequent removal and replacement, including
over burden, at Contractor’s cost.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01470
Page No. 2
6. REPORTS
1. Unless authorized to do so by the Engineer the inspection shall not give direction
or express an opinion to the Contractor (or waterproofing and roofing trades).
2. Reports made by the inspection firm will be submitted in triplicate and delivered by
hand to the Engineer for review and distribution.
3. Reports shall fully detail observations, measurements, weather conditions,

temperature of atmosphere and substrates, condition of substrates, equipment on
site and its condition, condition of waterproofing systems related to compliance
with Drawings and Specification and any other item deemed to be appropriate,
including those listed under the ‘Inspections’ article of this Section.
4. Reports shall log corrections made, or lack of attention by, the Contractor (and the
waterproofing and roofing trades) to deficiencies noted in previous reports.
5. On completion of each type of waterproofing and roofing work, an overview report

will be prepared, detailing findings and conclusions related to requirements of
Drawings and Specifications. Copies of the reports will be attached to the
overview reports.
6. Overview reports will be submitted to the Engineer in triplicate; a copy will be

made available to the Contractor.
7. NON-COMPLIANCE AND SITE CONDITIONS REPORTING
1. The inspection firm will report any inconsistencies observed during the application
of waterproofing and roofing materials and will identify those items, which, in the
opinion of the inspection firm, may not achieve specified requirements and lead to
future problems.
2. On discovery of applications not in compliance with Drawings, Specifications,

good waterproofing practice and not conductive to providing a last watertight
installation, the inspection firm will immediately notify the Engineer, who will issue
corrective instructions to the Contractor (who will advise the waterproofing and
roofing trades).
3. The Engineer will make a written decision in response to any item arising from
reports of the inspection firm. This will be issued to the Contractor (who will
forward it to the waterproofing and roofing trades). A copy of the Engineer’s
decision will be provided also to the inspection firm.
4. Should unforeseen site conditions arise that, in the opinion of the inspection firm,
require a change to the method of application or materials, the inspection firm will
immediately notify the Engineer, who can issue necessary instruction to the
Contractor (and waterproofing and roofing trades).
5. Any puncture or damage occurs to the waterproofing as a cause of negligence of

other subcontractors’ trades shall immediately be reported to the Engineer.
8. INSPECTIONS

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01470
Page No. 3
1. In general, the inspection firm shall:
2. Record weather conditions and temperatures of substrata and atmosphere;
3. Inspect substrata for required finish, cure, dryness, slopes to drains, setting of
drains to correct levels, provision of water seals and ensure that is of appropriate
quality and ready to receive waterproofing.
4. Check materials and installation provided by other trades for compatibility and
suitability to accept waterproofing.
5. Check type, quality and condition of equipment and measuring devices;
6. Check that shelf-life of materials are not exceeded;
7. Check treatment of cracks, treatment of horizontal to vertical junctions,

reinforcements, flashings, ringlets, items penetrating through slabs;
8. Check by measuring that materials are applied to required consistent uniform

thicknesses;
9. Check that waterproofing is completely bonded to the substrate, is homogeneous,

has elasticity and is free of crumbling, powdering, blisters, pinholes and craters;
10. Check that protection is provided following installation and that care is taken to
prevent damage to membrane, flashings and other parts of the system during
subsequent construction of the building;
11. Check that all work is provided as required by the Drawings and Specification;
12. Report immediately to the Engineer any items being installed contrary to the
Drawings and Specification.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01500
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROL
Page No. 1
1. USE OF SITE AND SITE LAYOUT
1. At award of Contract, submit Site Plan showing proposed layout for: access to
hoarding area (gates), site offices (including offices for the Engineer and
appointed personnel), storage sheds, materials handling areas, tower cranes, etc.
2. Revise drawings as required and submit approved plan to the Engineer.
2. PROTECTION OF PROPERTY AND USE OF SITE
1. Contractor shall take every precaution to preserve any adjoining property from
damage, whether public or private, including buildings, fences, roads, trees and
shrubs, situated on or near the site.
2. Make provision for the safety of persons by the provision of adequate fencing,
covered approaches, proper crossings for excavated trenches, protection to
excavations, markings, etc., as appropriate.
3. Support, shore and otherwise protect buildings and property as required. The
Contractor shall be held responsible for making good any damage, which, in the
opinion of the Engineer, is attributable to, or in consequence of carrying out of the
Works.
3. TRAFFIC CONTROL AND ROAD MAINTENANCE
1. It is envisaged that the programme of the Works may require temporary traffic
diversions. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to undertake and plan for
such operations for the successful progress of the Work.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for making arrangements with the

Municipality, and other Public Authorities for access to the site.
3. Maintain full exit facilities for personnel at all times, in case of fire and other
emergency.
4. Provide and maintain free access for permanent or temporary fire extinguishing
equipment to the Works at all times
5. Provide flag persons, signage and coordinate with governmental authorities to

direct traffic as required.
6. Provide safe, convenient, access to and on the site for materials and supplies.
7. Protect and maintain roads, curbs and sidewalks around the perimeter of the site
in good order and to the Engineer’s satisfaction. Replace any item that becomes
damaged. Accordingly, prior to commencing work, report all damaged areas to the
Engineer. Upon completion, restore areas to original condition, unless otherwise
specified.
8. Maintain roads and sidewalks external to the work site free of mud, dirt, sand and
debris at all times during the period of construction, to the Engineer’s satisfaction
and requirements of Authorities having Jurisdiction. Arrange for periodic cleaning,

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01500
Page No. 2
including times following high wind and sandstorms. Wash down roads at least
weekly when earth moving and demolition activities are taking place.
4. TEMPORARY FENCING
1. Provide and erect rigid steel posts and panel hoarding with plywood, or flat metal
sheeting, not less than 2400 mm high, around entire area of construction, to the
Engineer’s satisfaction and to Municipality standards. Maintain the fencing in good
order for the duration of the Work.
2. Provide lockable gate(s) at locations approved. Relocate gate(s) as required by

changes to hoarding for different phases of the Work. Provide security guard at
gate(s) at all times to regulate entry and exit of personnel and equipment.
3. Paint fencing with minimum of three colours, as directed by the Engineer. Maintain
fencing free of advertising and graffiti by others.
4. Provide some artwork on the fences from at least two sides of the boundary.
Designs shall be approved by the Engineer.
5. PROJECT SIGN
1. Erect two sign boards, visible to the public, with top-mounted flood lighting,
showing the name of the Owner and Works, the name of the Engineer, the name
of the Quantity Surveyor, the name of the Interior Design Consultant and the
name of the Contractor. Provide coloured illuminated perspective of the project
(size not less than 2400 x 2400 mm).
2. The signboard shall consist of a painted steel supporting structure securely

anchored to the ground, with the sign panels affixed to it. Provide shop drawing of
proposed signboard for approval of the Engineer before fabrication and
installation.
3. The layout and lettering on the signs shall be to a design approved by the
Engineer.
4. Secondary signboards shall be provided where necessary to identify Specialist

Consultants or Subcontractors. These shall be of a standard type of construction
equal to the primary signboard and shall be approved before commencement of
fabrication and installation. Each sign plate shall be one half the size as those
used for the individual sections of the primary signboard.
5. Comply with regulations and obtain approval of the Municipality of Qatar including
payment of any fees applicable, prior to erecting signboard.
6. Maintain the signboards in good condition during the course of the Work and
remove them prior to completion, making good the effected area, as required.
7. No other signs or advertisements, other than warning signs, shall be exhibited on

the site of the Works.
6. PROTECTION DEVICES

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01500
Page No. 3
1. Erect fencing, barricades, covered ways, tarpaulins, steps, bridges, platforms,

notices and warning boards, and maintain all lights, signals and protective devices
for the protection of the public, and workmen engaged on the Works, in
accordance with local regulations and to the Engineer’s requirements.
2. Prevent access to work for unauthorized personnel (public or anyone not directly
concerned with execution, supervision or inspection of work).
7. STORAGE AREA
1. Allocate an area within the project site for the storage of materials required by all
trades. Identify separate area for materials to be stored under cover.
2. Note that area available for storage on-site is limited. Provide additional storage
areas off-site as and when required.
3. Delivery of materials to the job shall be carefully organized to permit continual

progress of construction, but shall be in small quantities suitable for the restricted
storage area available to the Contractor on the site.
4. Keep the storage areas tidy at all times. No other part of the project site shall be
used as a storage area.
8. TEMPORARY STORAGE SHEDS
1. Provide weatherproof storage sheds/facilities, air conditioned where necessary,

for the storage of products, materials, tools and equipment for the use of the
Contractor and Subcontractors.
2. Perishable materials, including cement, shall have floors raised 150 mm off the
ground.
3. Remove all such sheds and make good area, prior to completion of the Works.
9. TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
1. Comply with fire safety regulations of Qatar Civil Defense requirements.
2. Make arrangements for periodic inspections by Civil Defense representatives and

promptly carry out their recommendations with respect to fire safety practices.
3. Provide and pay for all temporary fire protection required. Fire protection shall be
to the approval of the Authorities having Jurisdiction. Maintain in good order
throughout the Works.
4. Provide portable fire extinguishers throughout the construction areas. Conform

with fire authority requirements regarding locations, type and sizes of
extinguishers. Extinguishers shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall
be removed at completion of the Work.
5. Keep flammable materials on site to a minimum and make arrangements for

proper handling and storage. Gasoline and other flammable liquids, as well as
pressurized gas tanks shall be stored in and dispensed from safe containers.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01500
Page No. 4
Storage of such containers shall be exterior to all buildings included in the Works.
Except as specifically authorized do not allow open fires to be built or permit use
of open type heating devices in the Works.
6. Construction practices, including cutting and welding and the protection of

adjacent material likely to cause fire, shall be in accordance with good standard
practice for such work.
10. TEMPORARY WATER SUPPLY AND SEWAGE
1. Sewage: Temporary connection for sewage disposal that comply with the
authorities concerned manholes.
2. Water: Temporary domestic water connection for use during construction.

Contractor to obtain all necessary permits from Qatar Electricity and Water
Authority and pay for installation as required.
3. Supply and waste pipes shall be run from and to available sources and shall be
maintained by the Contractor in good condition until the permanent system is
installed and ready for use.
4. The Contractor is responsible for the installation and removal of all service
connections.
11. TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
1. Provide and maintain, in compliance with local By-laws and workmen’s

requirements, sufficient temporary toilets and washbasins for the use of all the
workmen on the site.
2. Install temporary toilets and drainage lines to approved sewerage disposal, or

provide weekly disposal of waste container. Maintain sanitary facilities in clean
condition.
3. Note also requirement for separate toilet facilities for the Engineer’s and
Contractor’s site offices.
4. Advise all workers that soiling of building will be cause for immediate dismissal.
Contractor will be held responsible for replacement of all soiled material, including
structural concrete, regardless of origin of problem.
12 TEMPORARY SITE DRAINAGE
1. Provide adequate water collection and diversion without affecting the drainage of
the adjacent properties, and maintain the surface of the site of the Works in a
workable condition for construction operations.
2. Provide temporary drainage, pumps and dry plank walkways in order to facilitate
construction operations.
3. Provide approved method for disposal of water from the dewatering processes.
13. TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01500
Page No. 5
1. Provide and pay for temporary power supply for construction purposes. Arrange
with Qatar Electricity and Water Authority for access/connection; installation to be
at Contractor’s cost.
2. Power distribution for construction purposes shall be provided by Contractor.

Extension cords shall be supplied by the trades concerned.
14. TEMPORARY OFFICES
1. Throughout the course of the Work, the Contractor shall provide a temporary
office on the site, with suitable sanitary facilities, for the accommodation of his site
staff. Office to be staffed with secretarial services and to be open at all reasonable
hours to receive instructions, notices and other communications. Make secretarial
service available for use of the Engineer.
2. The Contractor shall provide illuminated, air conditioned and furnished site office
facilities for the Engineer and appointed personnel throughout the course of the
Work.
3. The Engineer’s site offices to include the requirements included in Table -A of

Project Specification.
15. TEMPORARY COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
1. Install and pay for two separate temporary telephone lines with 8 extensions, a
separate facsimile machine with a dedicated telephone line, and two photocopying
machine one will be suitable for A0 size documents with reduction and zooming
facilities, in the Engineer’s site office for their exclusive use.
2. All charges associated with use of lines to be paid by Contractor to Qatar

Telephone Department directly, except for long distance personal call charges.
16. EQUIPMENT FOR ENGINEER’S USE
1. Provide all material and equipment required to facilitate routine inspections on site
by the Engineer or independent testing agencies.
2. Provide all necessary personnel, equipment and material to facilitate Specified

Testing on site.
17. SECURITY
1. Provide watchman and 24-hour security for the site to protect the Works from theft
and vandalism and to prevent entry by unauthorized persons.
2. Coordinate security access and control into the work site.
3. The construction site and the building shall be properly closed and locked at
nights, holidays and other occasions when the Work is not in progress.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01500
Page No. 6
4. Make temporary exterior enclosures weather tight and dust-proof. Such

enclosures to be designed to ensure security and protect the building interior from
adverse weather.
18. SAFETY AND FIRST AID
1. Apply all necessary measures throughout the entire construction period for the
safeguarding of life and health of all workmen employed on the site, including the
provision and maintenance of adequate First Aid Facilities.
2. The Contractor shall make itself fully conversant with the safety regulations and
requirements of the applicable authorities and shall implement them effectively
throughout the construction of the Works.
19. PRODUCT HANDLING
1. Protection: Use all means necessary to maintain temporary facilities and controls
in proper and safe condition throughout progress of the works.
2. Replacement: In the event of loss or damage, immediately make all repairs and
replacements necessary to the Engineer’s approval and at no additional cost to
the Contract.
20. SCAFFOLDING AND PLANT
1. Refer to Section 01527 for additional requirements regarding Scaffolding and

movable towers.
2. The Contractor shall provide all scaffolding, formwork, hoists, tackle and other
plant, profiles, templates, centerings and equipment for the proper, safe and
efficient execution of the Works.
3. Lifts specified in Division 14 and installed under the Contract, are not to be used
for the movement of materials or labourers during construction.
4. In the case of exterior scaffolding, provide shop drawings and design calculations
prepared by a qualified and experienced engineer in accordance with the
requirements of Section 01527 for review by the Engineer for structural integrity
and safety.
5. Provide all gangways, walkways, planking, decking, temporary platforms,

necessary to construct and afford access to or between all parts of the Works.
6. Construct and maintain scaffolding in a rigid, secure and safe manner. Erect
without damage to the structure or the finishes, independent of walls. Use
scaffolding in such a manner as to interfere as little as possible with other trades.
When not in use, move scaffolding as necessary to permit installation of other
work.
7. Assume all responsibility and liability in connection with any accidents that may
occur in connection with the use of scaffolding and plant.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01500
Page No. 7
8. Remove scaffolding promptly when no longer required. Scaffolding in use over

finished floor surfaces shall be mounted on rubber tired wheels or on plywood
protection.
9. If the Contractor proposes to use climbing tower cranes, or any type of plant which
places any load on the structure, he shall furnish all details of such plant, including
drawings and calculations, to the Engineer for approval before the installation of
such equipment is actually commenced.
21. CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
1. Provide and maintain conveying equipment such as cranes, hoists, derricks and
the like, for the proper execution of the Project.
2. Assume complete responsibility for construction, strength, placing, anchoring and

operation of derricks, cranes, hoists, guy and operating cables and any other
mechanical contrivance used for the Work, to ensure that any load carried thereon
can be safely supported and be free from accidents to persons.
3. Make the use of accessory equipment and conveying systems available to all
trades as required and make necessary arrangements in connection therewith.
Ensure that equipment is operated only by qualified operators.
4. Remove immediately such equipment when no longer required.
5. Where local By-laws and regulations or any Authorities having Jurisdiction require
drawings and specification on accessory and conveying equipment, obtain and
pay for same and assume responsibility for their adequacy.
22. OVERLOADING
1. Take precautions to prevent the overloading of any part of the structure, false
work, formwork or scaffolding during the progress of the work and make good, at
no expense to the contract all damage resulting from such overloading.
2. No part of the structure, load bearing members, exterior cladding or waterproofing

membrane shall be cut, drilled or sleeved without the Engineer’s written approval.
3. The Contractor is responsible for the general cleaning and maintenance of the
premises and the job site and for the coordination and direction of the clean-up
work of all trades.
4. Engage services of a garbage disposal company to carry out daily removal of

garbage skips.
5. Daily as the Work proceeds and on completion, the Contractor shall ensure that
each Subcontractor shall clean and remove from the premises all rubbish, surplus
materials, crates, cartons and other flammable waste at the end of each working
day.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01500
Page No. 8
6. Floors shall be ‘broom cleaned’ or equivalent during the course of the Work.
Additional cleaning of items, including removal of dust, dirt, stains and finger
marks for all finished wood, metal, glass or stone surfaces shall be carried out as
directed by the Engineer before hand over of the Works.
7. Lift shafts, electrical pipe and duct shafts, chases and similar enclosed spaces
which are generally unfinished shall be cleaned and left free of rubbish,
extraneous construction material, mortar drippings, dirt and dust before requesting
the Engineer to make final inspection of the Works.
8. Debris shall be dampened, put in containers and removed by means of materials

hoist or put in sealed containers and removed via designated egress routes.
24. SPECIAL CLEANING
1. All areas in which painting and finished work is to be performed shall be cleaned
prior to the start of such work and shall be maintained in satisfactory condition
throughout painting and finishing operations.
2. Remove oil, grease, loose paint, mill scale, dirt and any foreign substance of
deleterious material from the surfaces to receive sprayed fireproofing in
accordance with the Fireproofing Manufacturer’s requirements. Remove by
sandblasting when scraping, brushing and washing are non-effective.
3. Use steam cleaning for stone cladding and flooring when conventional cleaning
methods do not perform satisfactorily.
25. RODENT CONTROL
1. Throughout the entire construction period implement a programme of rodent

control covering the entire site within the construction limits.
2. Provide suitable covered containers of all edible rubbish and enforce their use by
all members of the workforce on site. Empty containers and have contents
removed from site as often as required to maintain adequate control programme.
26. NOISE LIMITATIONS
1. Contractor is required to keep noise to a minimum at all times. Full cooperation of

all Subcontractors is also requested.
27. REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES
1. Maintain all temporary facilities and controls as long as they are needed for the
safe and proper completion of the Work. Remove all temporary facilities and
controls as rapidly as progress of the Work will permit, or as directed by the
Engineer. Repair and make good all surfaces when temporary facilities are
removed upon completion of the Works.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01500
Page No. 9
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01527
SCAFFOLDING
Page No. 1
1. DEFINITION AND OTHER EXPLANATORY NOTES
1. Base plate: A metal plate with a spigot for distributing the load from a standard or
raker or other load bearing tube.
2. Bay: The space between the centre lines of two adjacent standards along the face
of a scaffold.
3. Brace: A tube placed diagonally with respect to the vertical or horizontal member
of a scaffold and fixed to them to afford stability.
4. Brace Coupler: A coupler used for fixing braces, which may be a right angle
coupler or any other coupler capable of sustaining a safe working load of 5kN.
5. Brick Guard: A metal or other fender filling the gap between the guardrail and
toe-board and sometimes incorporating one or both of these components.
6. Check Coupler or Safe Coupler: A coupler added to a joint under load to give
additional security to the coupler(s) carrying the load.
7. Competent Scaffolder: An operative assigned duties in the erection, alteration,

maintenance or dismantling of a scaffolding or staging who has undergone a
scaffolding training course by an approved training establishment.
8. Coupler: A component used to fix scaffolding tubes together.
9. Foreman Scaffolder: Foreman assigned as in-charge in the erection, alteration,

maintenance or dismantling of a scaffold or staging who has undergone an
advanced scaffold training course by approved training establishment and has at
least five years experience as a scaffolder.
10. Guardrail: A member incorporated in a structure to prevent the fall of a person

from a platform or access way.
11. Joint Pin: An expanding fitting placed in the bore of a tube to connect one tube to
another coaxially.
12. Ledger: A longitudinal tube normally fixed parallel to the face of a structure in the
direction of the larger dimensions of the scaffolding. It acts as a support for the
putlogs and transoms and frequently for the tie tubes and ledger braces and is
usually jointed to the adjacent standards.
13. Lift: The assembly of ledgers and transoms forming each horizontal level of
scaffold.
14. Parallel Coupler: A coupler used to join two tubes in parallel.
15. Putlog: A horizontal tube with a flattened end, to rest in of on part of the brickwork
or structure.
16. Putlog Coupler: A coupler used for fixing a putlog or transom to a ledger, to
connect a tube used only as a guardrail to a standard.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01527
SCAFFOLDING
Page No. 2
17. Reveal Pin: A fitting used for tightening a reveal tube between two opposite
surfaces.
18. Right Angle Coupler: A load-bearing coupler used to join tubes at right angles.
19. Sleeve Coupler: An external coupler used to join one tube to another coaxially.
20. Sole Plate: A timber, concrete or metal spreader used to distribute the load from a
standard or base plate to the ground.
21. Standard: A vertical or near vertical tube, which carries the scaffolding’s weight
and loads imposed to the supporting structure.
22. Swivel Coupler: A coupler used for joining tubes at an angle other than a right
angle.
23. Tie or Tie Assembly: The components attached to an anchorage, or to the

structure, of framed around a part of it, or wedged or screwed into it with a tie
tube. Used to secure the scaffold to the structure.
24. Toe-board: An up-stand at the edge of a platform, intended to prevent materials

or operatives feet from slipping off of the platform.
25. Transom: A tube spanning across ledgers to form the support for boards or units
forming the working platform, or to connect the outer standards to the inner
standards.
26. Universal Coupler: A load-bearing coupler used for connecting two tubes
together at right angles or in parallel.
27. Working Platform: The deck from which operations are carried out.
2. MATERIAL STANDARDS, INSPECTION AND RECORDING
1. Steel Tubes and Fittings:
1. All steel tubing, couplers and fittings used for scaffolding shall conform to
British Standard Specification No. BS 1139.
2. Tubes shall be free from cracks, splits, surface flaws and other defects.
The ends of the tubes shall be cut clean and square.
3. All couplers and fittings shall be properly oiled and maintained. Nuts shall
have a free running fit on their bolts. Bolts with worn or damaged threads
shall be replaced.
2. Aluminum Tubing:
1. Aluminum tubing shall not be mixed with steel tubing or steel fittings due to
different loadings and the fact that steel fittings could crush aluminium
tube.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01527
SCAFFOLDING
Page No. 3
2. Aluminum tube shall not be used if bent more than 15 mm in any 3 m

length.
3. Aluminum tube shall not be straightened; the straight part of the tube may
be cut and re-used, but the remainder shall be disposed of.
4. Aluminum tube shall not be heated by welding or flame cutting, etc.
3. Scaffold Boards:
1. All scaffold boards shall comply with British Standard Specification No. BS
2482.
2. Standard boards are nominally 225 mm wide and 37 mm thick, but 50 mm

and 63 mm are available.
3. Boards shall not be painted or treated in any way, which shall conceal
defects in them.
4. The ends of all scaffold boards shall be bound and protected by metal
hoops.
5. Boards shall not be split up more than 300 mm from the end with the metal
hoop fixed and shall not be decayed or warped by more than 12 mm. The
parts affected may be cut out to obtain shorter boards that shall also
comply with BS 2482.
5. STANDARD SCAFFOLD
1. Unsheeted scaffolds up to 50 m high may be constructed without being

specifically designed, provided that comply with the requirements outlined below
and do not carry greater loads, or have greater bay lengths than those specified in
BS 5973.
2. Where sheets are to be added to a scaffold to afford protection to operatives or

the work, the scaffold shall be specifically designed with consideration given to the
wind forces to which it will be subjected.
3. Where a temporary roof is to be fixed to the top of an access scaffold, the scaffold
and its attachments shall be specifically designed.
4. Firm Foundation:
1. All scaffolds shall be erected on a firm level and consolidated base.
2. Base plates shall be used below each standard on surfaces where there is
the possibility of standards deforming the surface.
3. On surfaces which shall be penetrated by base plates which support

standards, sole plates of timber shall be used beneath the base plates in
order to achieve a greater distribution of the load.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01527
SCAFFOLDING
Page No. 4
4. Sole plates shall be at least 35 mm thick and 219 mm wide. The sole plate
area beneath any one standard shall be at least 1,000 cm2, but if the
ground is soft or has been distributed, this area shall be increased to 1,700
cm2.
5. Jointed Standards and Ledgers:
1. A mixture of longer and shorter tubes shall be used when constructing long
ledgers or tall standards.
2. Joints in completed scaffolds shall not occur in adjacent standards in the

same lift and joints in adjacent ledgers shall not occur in the same bay.
3. Joints in standards shall be made either with joint pins or with sleeve
couplers, and shall be positioned near ledgers.
4. Joints in ledgers shall be made with sleeve couplers and shall be

positioned at a distance not more than one third of the span between
adjacent standards.
6. Fixing of Ledgers to Standards and Transoms, or Putlogs to Ledgers:
1. Ledgers shall be fixed to standards with right angle couplers.
2. A transom shall be fixed adjacent to every standard in every lift for a

scaffold by means of right angle couplers.
3. Intermediate board-bearing tubes may be fixed to ledgers by putlog

couplers.
7. Bracing:
1. Bracing shall be in the form of ledger or cross-bracing and longitudinal or

facing bracing.
2. Ledger bracing shall be positioned at alternative standards in a scaffold

and each brace shall run from a ledger in one lift to the diagonally opposite
ledger the lift above.
3. Longitudinal bracing shall be in the form of a zigzag arrangement of tubes

running from the bottom to the top of the scaffolding between a pair of
adjacent standards;
or:
4. A continuous tube running from the bottom to the top of the scaffold at an
angle of between 35o and 55o to the horizontal;
or:
5. Individual tubes running from the bottom to the top of the scaffold between
a pair of adjacent standards, all sloping the same way.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01527
SCAFFOLDING
Page No. 5
6. Bracing assemblies shall be fixed along the face of the scaffold at intervals
not exceeding 30 m.
8. Stability:
1. The prevention of inward and outward movement of a scaffold shall be

achieved with ties to the facade at a number of points.
2. Only one tie shall be temporarily removed and this shall be replaced before
removing another.
3. Ties shall be staggered in location wherever the building surface permits.
4. A two-lift ‘tied’ raker tube from the scaffold and bridles with right angle
couplers.
5. Tie working loads:
Box, Lip or Through ties: 6.25 kN

Reveal ties: 3.50 kN
Drilled-in anchor ties: 6.25 kN or as recommended by
manufacturer
6. Each tie assembly for sheeted scaffolds shall have at least a 12.5 kN
capacity.
9. Safety Working Platform:
1. All boards, which make up the platform shall rest squarely and evenly on
correctly spaced transoms, and be secured to prevent accidental
displacement.
2. All board shall be of the same thickness.
3. Each board shall have at least three supports unless its thickness or span
is enough to prevent sagging under load.
4. No board shall overhang its end support by more than four times its
thickness, the minimum overhang shall be at least 50 mm.
5. Where men have to sit at the edge of the platform between the structure,
the gap between the platform and structure shall not exceed 300 mm.
6. Guardrails and toe-boards shall be positioned at every edge from which a

person is liable to fall more than 2 m.
7. Guardrails shall be fixed on the inside of standards at a height of between

910 mm and 1.15 m above the level of the platform.
8. Toe-boards shall be fixed on the inside of standards and shall be at least

150 mm high.
9. The distance between guardrails and toe-boards shall not exceed 765 mm.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01527
SCAFFOLDING
Page No. 6
Normal Thickness Maximum Span Minimum Maximum

of Between Overhang Overhang
Board Transoms
Mm M Mm Mm
38 1.50 50 150
50 2.60 50 200
63 3.25 50 250
Fig. 1: MAXIMUM SPAN OF SCAFFOLD BOARDS.
Purpose Minimum Width Practical Width

using
225 mm Boards
Work on spherical or cylindrical metal 600 mm 3 Boards

Structures; work from ladder, folding
trestle, slung or suspended scaffolds.
Access only
Working platform for persons and for 800 mm 4 Boards

Deposit or material (three must be 430
mm passage for
persons, clear of
materials
For support of a trestle or other higher 1.05 m 5 Boards

Platform
Use by masons for dressing or shaping 1.30 m 6 Boards

stone.
Use by masons to support trestles or 1.50 m 7 Boards

other higher platforms.
Fig. 2: WIDTHS OF ACCESS AND WORKING PLATFORMS
10. Safe Ladder Access
1. Access ladders shall stand on firm and level bases at an angle of 4 vertical
to 1 horizontal (that is 75o to the horizontal). They shall be secured by their
stiles to the platforms to which they give access to prevent movement.
2. Ladder clamps and lashings shall be used to secure ladders in place.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01527
SCAFFOLDING
Page No. 7
3. Ladders shall project at least 1 m above the lading place, having one rung
level with or slightly above the landing.
4. Ladders shall be placed inside a scaffold wherever possible and landing

places shall be provided at vertical intervals of no more than 9.0 m.
5. The edges of landing places shall be provided with guardrails and toe-
boards.
6. The opening in landings, through which the ladders pass, shall not exceed
500 mm in width.
11. ERECTION, ALTERATION AND DISMANTLING
1. Erection, alteration and dismantling of a scaffold shall only take place by

Competent Scaffolders under the supervision of the Contractor’s Foreman
Scaffolder.
2. Erection:
1. The erection sequence of a scaffold shall ensure that at no time will be

scaffold reach an unstable condition.
2. Ties shall be fixed in place as erection proceeds, not when the scaffold is
complete.
3. Warning notices stating ‘Danger Scaffold incomplete – Do Not Use’ (see

Tagging System, Clause 6) shall be fixed to those parts of a scaffold which
are incomplete and not for use.
3. Alteration:
1. All modifications to existing scaffolding shall be carried out in such a way

that the stability of the scaffolding is not impaired.
2. Supplementary components shall be added before those which have to be

removed are taken away.
3. If standards are to be removed in order to provide access, additional

standards shall first be fixed to both sides of the proposed opening so that
the total number of standards in the scaffolding is never reduced.
4. Dismantling:
1. Prior to dismantling a scaffold, the scaffold shall be inspected and a safe

procedure for dismantling shall be established by the Contractor’s
Foreman Scaffolder.
2. During dismantling, no component, the removal of which would endanger

the scaffold, shall be removed until steps have been taken to compensate
for its removal.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01527
SCAFFOLDING
Page No. 8
3. If dismantling has reached the stage at which a critical member has to be

removed, the stability of the scaffold shall be ensured by fixing a similar
component in place lower down the scaffold.
12. INSPECTION, MAINTENANCE AND REGISTERS
1. Prior to erection, the Contractor’s Foreman Scaffolder in charge of the Works,

shall inspect the ground area upon which the scaffold is to be positioned and shall
inspect all equipment which shall form any part of the scaffolding staging, means
of access, work platform and lifting.
2. The Contractor’s Foreman Scaffolder shall appoint a competent Scaffolder(s) to

be solely responsible for maintenance works on the scaffolds or staging.
3. Prior to persons being allowed to use the scaffold or staging, or where the scaffold
or staging are altered, adjusted or subjected to rain or heavy winds, and thereafter
at least every seven days, the Contractor’s Foreman Scaffolder shall inspect the
scaffold inclusive of peripheral equipment.
13. TAGGING SYSTEM
1. The Contractor’s Foreman Scaffolder shall place a weather proof plasticated or

equivalent label at each access point and at the boundary of each scaffold section
from the initial erection stage until the final dismantling, which shall state clearly if
the scaffold is ‘ready for use’ or ‘not to be used’. In addition, the label shall state:
- Date Erected, with name and initials of Scaffolder.
- Maximum Loading [in kN/m2].
- Date Inspected, with name and initials of Foreman Scaffolder.
- Date Modified, with name and initials of Scaffolder.
- Date Re-inspected, with name and initials of Foreman Scaffolder.
- Expiry Date of label.
- Dismantling Date.
2. All entries onto the tag shall be made using a permanent ink pen.
3. The Contractor shall ensure that all personnel under his control who come in
contact with scaffolding are trained in the use of the scaffold tagging system.
14. SPECIAL SCAFFOLD
1. All scaffolds and all sheeted scaffolds, together with hanging, Bridging, Birdcage,
Truss-out, Slung and Cantilever Scaffolds, Hoist Towers, Loading Bays and
Protection Fans, shall be designed by a professional engineer, as specified in
Section 01300, in accordance with the requirements of British Standard
Specification No. BS 5973, in accordance with the requirements of British

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01527
SCAFFOLDING
Page No. 9
Standard Specification No. BS 5973. Submit design calculations to the Engineer

for review prior to erecting scaffolding.
2. The Contractor’s engineer shall provide a written erection and dismantling

procedure, together with the scaffolding drawing and his design calculations, for
the Engineer’s review.
3. After erection and prior to work commencing upon the scaffold, the Contractor’s
engineer shall inspect, and approve the scaffold. The Contractor’s engineer shall
record his inspection in the ‘Scaffold Inspection Register’ and the Contractor’s
Foreman Scaffolder shall ‘tag’ the scaffold.
4. Tower Scaffolds
1. Scaffold tower shall only be erected and used on firm level ground.
2. Static towers shall have metal base plates under the standards and, unless
the foundation is concrete, the load shall be spread by timber sole plates.
3. Wheels, or castors, on mobile towers shall not be less than 125 mm

diameter. Castors shall be fixed into the base of the standards and be
fitted with brakes, which cannot accidentally be released.
4. Where joints in standards are necessary, they shall be made with sleeve or
parallel couplers.
5. Ledgers and transoms, at right angles to the standards, shall commence

not more than 150 mm from the bottom to provide a firm base clear of the
castors.
6. Except at working platform level, ledgers and transoms shall be fixed to the
standards with right angle couplers.
7. Lifts shall not exceed 2.7 m on static or mobile towers.
8. Bracing shall be fixed to ledgers and transoms with right angle couplers in
the form of:
1. Plan bracing, i.e. diagonally at the base and working platform and
also at alternative lifts;
2. Diagonal bracing in zigzag fashion to the full height of the tower on

all four sides.
9. The maximum height to which a static or mobile tower shall be erected is

calculated below. The second figure in each ratio represents the smaller of
the two base dimensions of the tower.
TYPE OF TOWER HEIGHT / BASE RATIO
Static Tower used indoors 4:1

Static Tower used outdoors 3.5:1

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01527
SCAFFOLDING
Page No. 10
Mobile Tower used indoors 3.5:1

Mobile Tower used outdoors 3:1
Fig. 3 MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF TOWER SCAFFOLDS
10. The maximum height established shall be the height to the working
platform, not the guardrail.
11. The maximum free-standing height for mobile towers shall be 9.6 m and
for static towers, 12 m.
12. Where the maximum free-standing height or the maximum recommended

height to least base ratio requires to be exceeded, or the tower is likely to
be exposed to appreciable wind loading, the scaffold shall be tied to the
structure it is serving, or shall be designed to ensure stability by means of
ground anchors, guys or kentledge.
13. A ladder for access purposes shall be lashed vertically to one of the
narrow sides inside the base area, with the foot resting on the additional
truss.
14. The ladder shall extend at least 1.05 m above platform level to provide
handhold at the stepping off point.
15. A ladder or trestle shall not be placed on the top platform to extend the
height of the tower.
16. Mobile towers shall have their castors turned outwards to provide
maximum base dimensions and the brakes locked ‘on’ when the scaffold is
in use.
17. Mobile towers shall be moved only by pulling or pushing at the base.
Working platforms shall be clear of persons and materials before towers
are moved.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
Page No. 1
1. REFERENCE
1. Refer to Tender Invitation Documents and Specifications for details of Contract

Closeout requirements, especially the ‘Submittals’ and ‘Testing and
Commissioning’ clauses of all Sections, Divisions 1 to 16.
2. REQUIREMENTS
1. In preparation for the completion of the Work, the following is a minimum to permit
the Engineer to issue a Completion Certificate and recommend final payment:
2. Cleaning:
1. Remove stains, paint, plaster, labels, caulking compound, spots, marks

and dirt from decorative work, electrical and mechanical fixtures and
equipment, fitments, walls, floors, ceilings, doors, windows, partitions.
Vacuum, dust, clean and polish surfaces. Touch-up damaged painted
areas. Replace items, which cannot be cleaned.
2. Clean and polish in strict accordance with manufacturer’s directions glass,

mirrors, hardware, stainless steel, chrome, tiles and plastic laminate.
Replace broken, scratched or disfigured glass, tiles, metal etc.
3. Vacuum clean and dust behind grilles, louvres and screens.
4. Clean resilient flooring using a cleaner approved by the Flooring

Manufacturers.
5. Clean concrete floors exposed in the finished work, including concrete

floors with special finishes. Remove building paper, stains and debris.
Scrub floors with rotary brush and water.
6. Clean ceramic tile floors of mortar splashes and debris. Scrub floors with a
rotary nylon fibre brush and water.
7. Clean other floors in a manner to be approved by the Engineer.
8. Broom clean and wash exterior walks and platforms.
9. Remove dirt and other disfigurations from exterior surfaces.
10. Clean and sweep roofs, gutters, areaways and roads.
11. Clean exterior cladding systems.
12. Mechanical and electrical systems and equipment shall be thoroughly

cleaned and returned to the initial new conditions by replacing used air
filters, used belts in belt drives, lubricating all bearings, adjusting the
thermostatic control system etc. to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
13. Note that the Engineer’s authorization is to be obtained before

commencing with final cleaning specified above.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
Page No. 2
3. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
1. ‘As-built’
1. In accordance with section 01300, Submit to the Engineer complete set of

As-Built architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical drawings
recording all concealed services and variations from Contract Documents
incorporated in the Works during construction.
2. Operational and Maintenance Manuals
1. Collect and assemble all data in logical order and insert in suitable hard
covered, loose leaf binders, A4 size. Mark each section with a labeled tab,
protected with a celluloid cover. Cross-reference binder data to Drawings
and Specifications and provide appropriate listings in accordance with
section 01300.
3. Shop Drawing
1. Submit complete sets of final reviewed shop drawings in accordance with

section 01300 indicating corrections and changes made during fabrication
and installation.
4. Calculation and Test Reports
1. Submit complete sets of final reviewed calculation and test reports, as

required in the Contract Documents, including corrections and changes
made during fabrication and installation.
2. Ensure documents have been stamped and signed by a professional

engineer in accordance with the specification requirements.
3. Submit sets of triplicate, bound separately, and organized into applicable

sections of the project specifications. Submit in hard covered loose leaf
binders to A4 size.
5. Warranties / Guarantees & Maintenance
1. Provide all certificates for warranties / guarantees and maintenance

specified under various Sections of the Specifications in original plus two
copies, sealed and signed by the Contractor, the Subcontractors, the
manufacturer if applicable, and indicating the Engineer’s name, Project
Name and subject covered. Include certificates in operational and
Maintenance Manuals.
2. Warranties and guarantees shall be for a minimum period of 400 days from
the date of the Completion Certificate for the whole work, unless for longer
period stated otherwise in individual Sections.
3. Maintenance shall include for all services, parts replacement, etc., as

noted in the Specifications and Tender Invitation documents.
4. DEMONSTRATION OF SYSTEMS

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
Page No. 3
1. Prior to requesting Completion Certificate, the Contractor / Subcontractors shall

demonstrate to and instruct the Employer’s personnel in the operation and
maintenance of all systems. This shall be done in the Engineer’s presence.
2. Refer to the various Sections of the Specifications for requirements regarding

demonstration of individual systems.
5. EXTEND MAINTENANCE
1. For any extended maintenance service included in the individual Sections of the
Specifications, the Contractor shall allow this to be performed by the
Subcontractor or Supplier responsible for the fabrication and installation of the
applicable systems and shall provide a separate extended maintenance contract
for this work.
2. Accordingly, the Engineer shall have the right of direct access to the applicable
Subcontractor(s) Supplier(s) for maintenance calls, maintenance follow-up,
replacement parts installed due to normal wear and tear.
3. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any mark-up with respect to the cost of
maintenance or supplies so provided.
-End of section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02140
DEWATERING
Page No. 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION
The work included in this Section covers the complete dewatering of the Site as required
during the excavation and construction of the building.
1.2 DEWATERING SYSTEM(S) DESIGN
A. The Contractor shall submit for approval his proposed design and detailed layout
for the dewatering system or systems he intends to install. The proposed
system(s) shall be designed to ensure the following:
1. The lowering of the water table over the site to allow excavation to proceed
and maintaining the water level below the base of excavation as it
proceeds (drawdown period).
2. The reduction of piezometric levels in the underlying strata sufficiently

during the drawdown stage to ensure stability of the excavation.
3. Once excavation is complete the water level in the ground must be

maintained, during the construction period, at least 1.00 metre below the
deepest excavation level until the Engineer decides dewatering may be
stopped. Restoring the water level to its initial position shall be made after
the space between the face of the excavation and the basement wall is
backfilled and once the ground floor slab is completed. In any event, the
decision as to when dewatering operations shall cease or be reduced shall
be exclusively that of the Engineer.
4. That “heave” of the excavation base due to upward ground water pressure
does not occur.
5. The System(s) must run twenty-four (24) hours a day and the design shall
include sufficient standby pumps connected in the system(s) so as to
operate automatically in case of pump failure.
1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
Perform dewatering work in accordance with applicable rules, regulations, codes and
ordinances of local authorities, and in accordance with the requirements of the public
utility owners having jurisdiction over the work. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits,
licenses and certificates and give all notices as required during the performance of the
dewatering work.
1.4 DEWATERING EQUIPMENT AND MONITORING PIEZOMETERS
A. Provide and maintain complete dewatering equipment necessary for lowering and
maintaining the water table at the required levels.
B. Provide all necessary perimeter trenches, pipes, sumps, pumps, etc. as required
for the purpose of collecting and disposing of all excess water inflow into the
bottom of excavations.
C. Provide and maintain minimum six (6) temporary piezometers for monitoring the
water table levels on site on a daily basis during the drawdown and construction

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02140
DEWATERING
Page No. 2
phase. The location and design of the temporary piezometers shall be approved
by the Engineer.
D. Failure of equipment or system(s) installed by the Contractor shall not entitle the
Contractor to additional payment or extra time for completion in respect of any
additional measures necessarily employed by him in order to provide and maintain
dry working conditions.
1.5 DEWATERING SECTION INCLUDES
1. Compliance with sections of Division 1, General Requirements.
2. Dewatering to keep excavations of the basement pits dry and to prevent damage
to the building due to hydrostatic pressure.
3. Work of this section shall be considered as Specialist Work.
All dewatering work for the Works shall be performed and monitored by a single specialist
dewatering Subcontractor. The Contractor shall not divide the responsibility for
dewatering between several trades.
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS
Site Information
1. Refer to drawings prepared by the Engineer as they effect the work of this section
of the Specifications.
4. Refer to report on site investigation prepared by a specialized geo technical

specialist approved by the Engineer
1.8 SUBMITTALS
Methodology: With offer to perform work of this section, submit to the Engineer:
1. A detailed method of the dewatering system proposed, including monitoring

systems and remedial possibilities.
2. A history of successful dewatering experiences.
Note: The Engineer’s approval to the above referred submittals shall not relieve the
Contractor from his obligations and liabilities under the contract and the contractor shall
be responsible for selecting, operating and maintaining an efficient dewatering system(s)
such as to ensure dry working conditions throughout the construction period.
A basis for the approval of a dewatering subcontractor will be the detailed methodology,
and a demonstrated successful historical track record of the proponent as assessed by
the Engineer.
1.9 PROTECTION

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02140
DEWATERING
Page No. 3
Ensure no damage occurs to adjacent buildings and structures and carry out all
necessary protection measures that may be required.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
1. Chemical Grout: Contractor shall demonstrate qualities of product by providing

product test results and lists of previous usage from the manufacturer.
2. Materials: Refer to section 01010 Summary of Work
3. EXECUTION
3.1 DEWATERING
1. Provide a dewatering system to the approval of the Engineer, which depresses

the water table within the shoring of the building excavation, below the bottom of
the lowest pit in the basement. The use of the deep well-point system inside the
basement is recommended as part of the dewatering system. Provide additional
dewatering systems, such as trench drains and sumps, as may be necessary to
obtain requirements of this section, at no extra cost to the Contract.
2. Ensure dewatering system is in accordance with local authorities requirement for

water discharge, standby pumps, and noise control levels.
3. Keep water table low enough to prevent hydrostatic pressure from being applied
to the basement structure.
4. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations,. Keep the bottom of the

excavations dry and suitable for other trades.
5. Prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings and changes to

rock and soil detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations.
6. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and
other dewatering system components necessary.
7. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside
excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to
collection or run-off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage
ditches.
8. Dewatering works shall comply with the requirements of BS 9301.
3.2 CRACK REPAIR
1. The dewatering subcontractor shall be responsible for stopping the leakage of

water through cracks found or which develop in the substrata in order to fulfil his
obligation to maintain the basement and foundations dry during the construction
period, and at no extra cost to the Contract.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02140
DEWATERING
Page No. 4
2. Repair and seal cracks by cleaning the cracks, inject the crack surface with
chemical grout and then when the grout expands by foaming into a seal, inject
additional chemical grout into the crack below the initial surface application.
Follow the chemical grout manufacturer’s printed instructions and use injection
equipment as recommended by the chemical grout manufacturer.
3. Any water entering the basement areas under hydrostatic pressure through cracks
shall be deemed as evidence that insufficient well points and pumps are provided
and the dewatering subcontractor shall provide additional well points and pumps
and drainage tiles at no additional cost to the Contract.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02200
EARTHWORK (EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING)
Page No. 1
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. General: Perform earthwork in accordance with the requirements of the Contract

Documents.
1.02 NATURE OF THE GROUND
A. Examine the Site, record of test borings, and the subsurface exploration reports to
determine all conditions under which the work will be performed.
B. Refer to the Geotechnical Study that had been carried out on behalf of the
Employer that shall be considered for information only and attached here in
appendix -B, which will not be considered to be part of the Tender or Contract
Documents. The Tenderer must make his own full inquiries as to the nature of the
ground and the sub-soil conditions and take all necessary steps to deal with the
soil conditions and allow for all factors in his Tender price.
C. Obstructions of which no records are available, may be encountered. Make

inquiries as to the nature of the ground and sub-soil conditions and formulate
conclusions as to the extent of any such obstructions, old construction, etc., and
remove all materials of any nature to the designed subgrades indicated or
specified.
1.03 SAFETY AND AVOIDANCE OF NUISANCE
A. Perform all work in such a manner as to ensure the safety of the Works, the public
and adjoining sites and so as to cause as little inconvenience as possible to the
public and adjoining Owners, and allow in the Tender for all necessary
precautions to that end.
A. Provide a temporary and strong barrier around the edge of the basement
excavation as a safety measure.
B. Provide proper temporary lighting and access to the basement excavation.
C. Keep stores and material away from the edge of the basement excavation so as
to allow free movement of labourers and staff around the excavations.
D. Use sturdy steel or timber stair to climb up and down the pit. Do not use ladders.
F. All electrical panels and installation shall be properly protected.
1.04 PROTECTION OF ADJOINING EMPLOYER’S PROPERTY
A. Execute earthwork and shoring activities (and Sitework generally) in such a

manner as to ensure no damage shall occur to adjoining owner’s property.
B. The Contractor shall install several settlement observation points (number and
positions to be approved by the Engineer) so as to record, on a weekly basis
actual settlement during excavation drawdown and construction operations until
dewatering is discontinued and the excavations have been backfilled. Submit
these records to the Engineer on a weekly basis.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02200
Page No. 2
1. Compliance with Sections of Division 1, General Requirements.
2. Excavation and backfill work including soil and rock removal as necessary for the
construction of the building and subsequent backfilling around new foundation to
grade level.
3. Excavation and backfill for underground mechanical and electrical utilities, and
buried mechanical and electrical works.
4. Co-ordinate with Section 02221: Excavation Perimeter Retention System, Section

03300: Reinforced Concrete, Section 07165: Basement Waterproofing, and
Divisions 15 & 16.
5. Definition: “Excavation” consists of removal of material encountered to attain

required subgrade elevations and subsequent disposal of materials removed.
1. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable

requirements of governing Authorities having Jurisdiction.
2. Testing and Inspection Service: Employ an independent inspection and testing

company approved by the Employer and the Engineer to perform soil testing,
compaction testing and inspection services for quality control during earthwork
operations as determined by the Engineer. Payment for inspection and testing
included under this section shall be by the Contractor.
3. Concrete Blinding: Ensure concrete blinding specified in Section 03300 and on

the Drawings is provided under that Section immediately after the bearing
(formation) level is reached, to protect the bottom of the excavation from
deterioration and to facilitate waterproofing and concrete works.
4. Dewatering: Fully cooperate with and coordinate with dewatering work specified
under Section 02140 to ensure that no damage due to seepage water and water
under pressure occurs to the excavated surfaces, to bearing surfaces for the
structure and to the various building components.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Test Reports – Excavating: Submit three copies of the following reports

prepared by the inspection and testing company, directly to the Engineer:
1. Condition and suitability of substrates to accept concrete blinding and

foundation.
2. Field density test reports.
3. Test reports on backfill material brought to the site.
4. Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of

bearings tests of each stratum tested.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02200
Page No. 3
5. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each type of backfill

brought to the site.
6. Test reports for compaction of backfill materials.
2. Survey: Submit three (3) copies of a final survey prepared by a qualified surveyor
identifying the final excavation, dimensions and levels, and the location of well
points.
3. Method Statement: Contractor shall provide a method statement indicating

methodology, sequence, equipment intended to be used, for the Engineer’s
reference and approval.
4. Such approval, if given, shall not absolve the Contractor of his responsibility for
safety in every respect, including those affecting adjacent buildings.
5. Permits: Obtain all necessary permits and approvals from Authorities having
Jurisdiction prior to the start of excavation and removal of existing utilities. Provide
copies of permits to the Engineer.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
1. Site Information:
1. Refer to Contract Drawings as they affect the work of this Section and
conduct own site investigation if deemed necessary.
2. Data about subsurface conditions in this document is not intended as a

representation or warranty of accuracy, nor can continuity between soil
borings be assumed. It is expressly understood that the Employer and the
Engineer are not responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn
therefrom on the part of Contractor or Sub-contractor.
3. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by

Contractor at no extra cost to the Contract.
2. Existing Utilities
1. Prior to commencement of any on-site work - Carefully excavate, using

hand means if necessary, and locate existing underground utilities in areas
of Work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of
support and protection during earthwork operations.
2. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping and other utilities be

encountered during excavation, advise the Engineer and consult utility
authority immediately for direction. Cooperate with the Engineer and utility
authorities in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair
damaged utilities to the satisfaction of the utility authority.
3. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the
Employer and others, except when permitted in writing by the Engineer

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02200
Page No. 4
and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been
provided.
4. Provide a minimum of 72 hour notice to the Engineer and receive written

authorization to proceed, before interrupting any utility.
5. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities

indicated and/or required to be removed. Coordinate with utility authorities
for shut-off of services, if lines are active.
3. Use of Explosives: Do not use explosives without prior written permission from
the Engineer and Authorities having Jurisdiction. The Contractor is solely
responsible for handling, storage, and use of explosive materials when their use is
permitted.
4. Protection of Persons and Property:
1. Barricade open excavations and provide warning lights.
2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from

damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, dry or wet
washout and other hazards, created by earthwork operations.
5. Safety of Excavations: The Contractor shall provide proper supports for the
sides of excavations to prevent collapse, using all necessary means, and shall be
responsible for the safety of the excavation and workers concerned.
1.5 ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT
1. The Contractor shall employ services of an experienced specialist sub-contractor

approved by Agriculture and Fisheries/Conservation of Environment and
Prevention of Pollution Authorities of Qatar to apply an overall treatment to the
entire area which is to be covered by concrete slabs, platforms, paving, etc.
2. All chemicals used in the Work shall be approved by the Authorities having
Jurisdiction and be applied as indicated hereunder.
3. The Sub-contractor shall submit a written 10 year guarantee made out to the
Owner and jointly signed and sealed by the Main Contractor, guaranteeing safety
of the building and surrounding areas against termite infestations.
1.5.1 Horizontal Surface Treatment
An aqueous solution of termiticides shall be prepared and applied at a specific rate

(approx. 6 litres / square meter) by means of pressure spraying horizontally to foundation
bases, sub-slab plinth area (slab on grade) prior to casting the concrete slab and after the
compaction of soil.
1.5.2 External Perimeter Trench Treatment
A trench is to be excavated around the external perimeter of the foundation bases is a

depth of 400 mm and width of 300 mm from slab. Apply aqueous solution of termiticide at
a rate as shown by manufacturers catalogues.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02200
Page No. 5
1.5.3 Vertical Surface Treated
The back fill soil surrounding the building and or the external walls from the basement to
the ground level is to be treated by injection to the linear surface.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
Materials for backfilling should comply with BS-6031.
A. Structural Fill
1. Sound, clean, durable, granular materials free from deleterious matter and
in accordance with the following gradations:
ASTM Sieve Size Total % Passing by Weight
51mm 100
38mm 70-100
25mm 55-85
19mm 50-80
9mm 40-70
No. 4 30-60
No. 10 20-50
No. 40 10-30
No. 200 5-15
2. Gradations in the table above represent the limits, which shall determine
suitability of aggregate for use from the sources of supply.
3. Structural fill may be classified as well-graded granular soils – Group 1

(non-plastic soils with a uniformity coefficient exceeding 10).
4. Use structural fill under concrete slabs, sidewalks, paving, under utility
pipes, and at other soil bearing situations for fill within 300 mm measured
horizontally of foundation walls, retaining walls, edges of footings and
other below-grade vertical surfaces as approved by the Engineer, except
where drainage fill is indicated or specified.
5. If sufficient structural fill material is not available from excavations under

this Contract, then additional fill, suitable for use, shall be brought to the
Site from other sources. Both excavated materials from the Site for use as
structural fill, and material brought to the Site for use as structural fill, shall
meet the above requirements.
B. Ordinary Fill
1. Ordinary fill shall be natural soil, well-graded and free from all organic,
weak, compressible and expansive materials, (such as high plastic clays)

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02200
Page No. 6
and also for of materials subject to decay or decomposition, and shall

contain no stone larger than 150 mm in maximum dimension.
2. Ordinary fill may be classified as uniformly graded material – Group 2

(non-plastic soils with a uniformity coefficient of 10 or less).
3. Use ordinary fill for general grading and backfilling except in areas where
structural or drainage fill is required.
4. If sufficient ordinary fill material is not available from excavations under this
Contract, then additional fill, suitable for use, shall be brought to the Site
for use as ordinary fill, and material brought to the Site for use as ordinary
fill, shall meet the above requirements.
C. Drainage Fill
1. Drainage fill shall be fine aggregate, clean, well-graded, free-draining

sand, complying with ASTM C 33.
2. Drainage fill material shall be placed where called for in the Specifications
or Drawings, (e.g. under pipe and utility trenches).
2.2 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Employ and pay all charges for a Soil Testing Laboratory acceptable to the
Engineer, to perform all tests and submit reports specified in this Section.
B. The Soil Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for conducting and interpreting
the tests, shall state in each report whether or not the test specimens comply with
all requirements of the Contract Documents and shall specifically note any
deviations therefrom.
C. Testing of Materials: The Soil Testing Laboratory shall perform all tests herein
specified and any additional tests as may be required and submit test reports to
the Engineer including the following:
One optimum moisture – maximum density curve for each type of soil
encountered in sub-grades and fills under isolated and continuous footings, slabs
on grade and paved areas. Determine maximum densities in accordance with
ASTM D1557
1. Each type of borrow material shall receive:
a. Mechanical Analysis. ASTM D422/AASHTO T88
b. Plasticity Index Determination. ASTM D424/AASHTO T91
c. Moisture-Density Curve Determination. ASTM D1557.
d. CBR test as a measure for bearing capacity when required.
3. The Soil Testing Laboratory shall determine the suitability of materials to

be used for fills and obtain the approval of the Engineer.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02200
Page No. 7
D. Testing of Sub-grade and Fill Layers: Sub-grades and fill layers shall be approved
by the Soil Testing Laboratory and the Engineer before construction of any further
works thereon. Tests of sub-grades and fill layers shall be taken as follows:
1. The top 300 mm of sub-grade resulting from excavation shall have the
maximum density at optimum moisture as hereinbefore specified. In fill
areas, each layer of fill shall meet the required density as hereinbefore
specified. Make at least one (1) field density test of the sub-grade for every
two hundred square metres (200 m2) of raft foundation, paved area or
slabs on grade, but in no case less than three (3) tests. In each compacted
fill layer, make (1) field density test for every overlaying two hundred
square metres (200 m2) of raft foundation, paved area or slabs on grade,
but in no case less than three (3) tests. Perform field density tests in
accordance with ASTM D1556 or ASTM D2167.
2. At foundation wall backfill take at least ten (10) field density tests (ASTM
D1556 or ASTM D2167) at locations and elevations as directed by the
Engineer.
D. Cooperate with the Soil Testing Laboratory in every respect in the performance of
the required tests.
E. If, based on reports of the Soil Testing Laboratory and inspection, the sub-grade
or backfills are found to be below the specified density, the Engineer may require
additional compaction and testing and all this shall be carried out at the expense
of the Contractor.
3.1 GENERAL
Workmanship for excavating shall comply with BS 8000 Part 1, Sections 3.1, 3.2 and 3.3.
Excavation should be true to lines, widths and depths shown on Drawings or to such
lines, depths, dimensions as directed by the Engineer to reach appropriate bearing struts
and/or to accommodate site conditions.
3.2 STABILITY OF EXCAVATION
1. Construction of the perimeter retention system as specified in Section 02221

applies to the building perimeter.
2. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions during excavation for the
Works, particularly in the case of excavations near existing buildings and
underground services, and shall take precautions against damage or collapse by
means of temporary or permanent shoring, strutting, sheet piling or underpinning
of adjacent buildings, and strutting, sheet piling or underpinning of adjacent
buildings, and such other methods, as it deems fit.
3. The Contractor shall be held solely responsible for the safety of buildings
adjoining all excavations and the construction and efficiency of the shoring,
underpinning, strutting, etc., shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Should
any subsistence or other damage occur due to the inefficiency of the shoring,
underpinning, strutting, etc., or any other support provided, the damage shall be
made good by the Contractor at his own expense.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02200
Page No. 8
4. Areas to be excavated, including but not necessarily limited to basements for

pump rooms, elevators, pits, sump pits, etc. under the building and trenches shall
have sides of excavations protected against collapse. Where danger of collapse
exists, side of the excavation shall be shored and braced. Maintain sides of
excavation in a safe condition.
5. Remove shoring and bracing coincident with completed concrete work as

determined by Engineer.
3.3 SETTING-OUT
1. The Contractor shall stake out the work as shown on Drawings, in accordance
with requirements of Section 01050 – Field Engineering.
3.4 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
1. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown. Maintain a tolerance of +/- 25 mm

beneath reinforced concrete foundations and ground bearing slabs.
2. Excavation shall include: the removal of all earth, rocks, boulders, remains of
buildings, services not to be used and all items found but required to be removed,
to permit the construction of the building.
3. In excavating for foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation.

Excavate by hand the last 200 mm to final grade, just before blinding is placed.
Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other
work.
4. Should excavations be extended by error or oversight to depths lower than

required, the Contractor shall raise the bottom of the excavation to the required
level using 17 Mpa plain concrete of the type which is resistant to deterioration
from the chemicals present in the soils and ground water, at no additional cost to
the Contract.
5. After excavation is complete, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the
Geotechnical Inspection and Testing company, prior to pouring any concrete.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR TRENCHES
1. Dig trenches to the uniform width required for particular item to be installed and
sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. Provide 150 mm to 225 mm
clearance on both sides of pipe or conduit. Provide all necessary planking and
strutting.
2. Excavate trenches to depths indicated and required. Slope trenches for piping to
establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations.
3. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 150 mm below required elevation

and backfill with 17 Mpa plain concrete to the underside of pipes or conduit, prior
to installation of pipe.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02200
Page No. 9
4. For pipes or conduit 125 mm or less in nominal size and for flat-bottomed multiple-
duct conduit units, do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand excavate
bottom cut to accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil.
5. For pipes or conduit 150 mm or less in nominal size, tanks and other
mechanical/electrical work indicated to receive sub-base, excavate to sub-base
depth indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, to 150 mm below bottom of work to
be supported, and backfill with 150 mm 17 Mpa plain concrete fill prior to
installation of mechanical/electrical piping conduits, etc.
6. Except as otherwise indicated, excavate for exterior water-bearing piping (water,

drainage) so top of piping is not less than 1000 mm below finished grade.
7. Grade bottoms of trenches as designated by the Engineer, notching under pipe

bells to provide solid bearing for entire body of pipe.
8. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and
backfilling is authorized by the Engineer. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage
or displacement of pipe systems.
9. Backfill trenches with concrete fill where trench excavations pass within 450 mm
of column or wall footings or foundations and which are carried below bottom of
such footings or foundations, or which pass under wall footings of foundations or
as indicated on drawings. Place plain concrete to level of bottom of adjacent
footing or foundation.
10. For piping or conduit less than 750 mm below surface or roadways, provide 150
mm thick concrete base slab support. After installation and testing of piping or
conduit, provide minimum 150 mm thick encasement (side and top) of concrete,
prior to backfilling or placement of roadway sub-base.
11. Comply with the requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
3.6 INSPECTION OF EXCAVATION
1. The Contractor shall report to the Engineer when excavations are ready to receive
permanent materials. No material shall be placed in the excavation until the
Contractor has obtained the Engineer’s agreement that the excavation has been
carried out to the lines and levels required.
3.7 BACKFILL
Workmanship should comply with BS 6031 – Code of Practice for Earthworks. Refer to
Part 2 of this section for backfill for structural, ordinary or drainage fill.
1. Under Piping and Conduit: use granular fill where sub-base is indicated under
piping or conduit, shape to fit bottom 90% of cylinder.
2. Over Piping and Conduit: use granular fill.
3. Placement and Compaction: place fill materials in layers not more than 200 mm
in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02200
Page No. 10
more than 100 mm in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated

tampers.
4. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide

optimum moisture content. Unless otherwise specified, compact each layer to
minimum 95 percent Standard Proctor dry density, or as recommended by the
Independent Inspection and Testing Company. Do not place granular fill material
on surfaces that are muddy.
5. Place backfill and fill materials to required elevations evenly when adjacent to
structures, piping or conduit. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill
against structures or displacement of piping or conduit, by carrying material
uniformly around structure, piping or conduit to approximately same elevation in
each lift.
6. Rock Levelling: Fill depressions in rock at bottoms of excavation caused by

fracturing off of rock as part of the excavation process with concrete fill to obtain a
level surface to accept concrete blinding within the tolerance specified in
paragraph 3.4.1.
7. Backfill around the foundation walls shall begin no earlier than when authorization
is provided by the Engineer for removal of the excavation perimeter retention
system provided under Section 02221 of the specifications.
3.8 TESTING
The Contractor shall coordinate and facilitate testing activities by the independent
Geotechnical Inspection and Testing company as approved under this Contract, to
ensure quality of excavations, bearing strata and compactions.
3.9 SETTLEMENT
1. The Contractor shall make good at his own expense by settlement and related
damaged work, which may occur up to the end of Maintenance Period of the
Contract.
2. Remove and legally dispose off the site all excavated material and found rubble
from the demolition of existing structures on the site. Provide credit for re-usable
materials; dispose or store as directed by the Engineer. Remove the material and
rubble as it is excavated. Do not stockpile excavated material and rubble on the
site.
3. Materials resulting from clearing and grubbing operations must not be buried or
burnt on site. Dispose all such materials to dumps approved by Qatar Municipality.
4. Do not block access roads and street traffic during removal of materials from site.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02200
Page No. 11

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02221
EXCAVATION PERIMETER RETENTION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Page No. 1
2. Engineering, fabrication, supply and installation of the excavation perimeter earth

retention system as necessary to accept and protect the building and its systems.
3. Work of this section is considered as Specialist Work.
1. Codes and Standards: Do work of this section to requirements and approval of

authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Engineering: Have work of this section engineered by a fully qualified engineer

to design and engineer geotechnical structures and earth retention systems in the
State of Qatar. This engineer may be required to demonstrate proven experience
with the design and engineering of this type of work.
3. Sub-contractor
1. Employ a specialist Subcontractor familiar with below grade soil and water
conditions in the State of Qatar and who has proven experience with the
type of work specified in this section.
2. Ensure the Subcontractor’s site foreman is familiar with below grade soil
and water conditions in the State of Qatar and has proven experience with
directing workers in the type of work specified in this section.
4. Testing and Inspection Services: Employ an independent inspection and testing

company approved by the Engineer to perform soil testing, compaction testing
and inspection services for quality control during excavation perimeter retention
system operations as determined by the Engineer. Payment for inspection and
testing included under this Section shall be by the Contractor.
5. Dewatering: Fully cooperate with and coordinate with dewatering trade to ensure
no damages due to seepage water and water under pressure occur to the
excavated surfaces, to bearing surfaces for the structure and to the various
building components. Dewatering work is specified to be provided under section
02140 of the Specifications.
6. Excavation:
1. Excavation work necessary to permit the installation of the excavation

perimeter retention system is by this section.
2. Fully cooperate and coordinate with excavation trade performing work

specified in section 02200 to ensure no interferences with each others
work occurs and to ensure both trades can do their work within similar time
period.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02221
Page No. 2
1.3 JOB CONDITIONS
1. Site Information:
1. Refer to Drawings prepared by the Engineer as they affect the work of this
section.
2. Refer to Report on Site Investigation, which is for information only.
3. Data in the above document, concerning subsurface conditions, are not

intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity
between soil borings. It is expressly understood that the Employer and the
Engineer shall not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn
therefrom by the Contractor. Data is made available for the convenience of
the Contractor.
4. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by

Contractor at no cost to Employer.
2. Existing Utilities
1. Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to

remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during
earthwork operations.
2. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping and other utilities be

encountered during excavation, consult utility authority immediately for
directions. Cooperate with Engineer and utility authorities in keeping
respective services and facilities in operation. Repair any damaged utilities
to the satisfaction of the utility authority.
3. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the
Employer and others, except when permitted in writing by the Engineer
and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been
provided.
4. Provide minimum of 48-hour notice to the Engineer and receive written

notice to proceed before interrupting any utility.
5. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities

indicated and/or required to be removed. Coordinate with utility authorities
for shut-off of services if lines are active.
3. Site Surface Features: Protect existing structures, trees, fencing, service poles,
wires, sidewalks, roadways and adjacent properties from damage while this work
is in progress.
4. Survey Markers: Protect and preserve all geodetic monuments, bench marks and
survey markers.
1.4 ENGINEERING AND DESIGN

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02221
Page No. 3
1. Notification: Give the Engineer sufficient advance notice of engineering data

information and shop drawings submissions, shop fabrications, field installation
and other phases of the work of this section to permit review and inspections of
the work for compliance with the Contract Documents.
2. Engineer retention and tie-back systems to permit unobstructed installation of

membrane and wall reinforcement. In particular, locate tie-back away from
slab/foundation wall junction to ensure no interference with construction of the
foundation wall and waterproofing.
3. Engineer the excavation perimeter retention system to prevent the sides of the
excavation for the building and the mechanical and electrical services to the
building from caving in and from imposing loads on foundation walls and footings
at minimum until 7 days after the Ground Floor slab has been poured and all
below grade waterproofing is completed.
4. Engineer the excavation perimeter retention system to prevent adjacent surfaces

such as roads, streets, sidewalks and landscaping from setting below their original
as found levels and conditions.
5. Engineer excavation perimeter retention system to prevent damage to existing in

ground services such as water lines, sanitary sewer lines, storm sewer lines,
electricity lines, and telephone lines and to ensure services are not disrupted
without prior approval of the authorities under whose jurisdiction those services
come.
6. Engineer excavation perimeter retention system to prevent any damage to

existing adjacent buildings and structures.
7. Design excavation perimeter retention system and submit calculations for the
Engineer’s approval.
8. Design excavation perimeter retention system based on a water table at elevation

2.0 m relative to existing grade level or as shown on the soil investigation report.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. Comply with section 01300 of the Specifications.
2. Engineering and Design Submissions – Prior to Subcontractor Contract

Agreement
1. Assignment of the work of this section of the Specifications is contingent

on the receipt by the Engineer of proposal drawings and documents which
clearly and fully detail the systems and methods proposed by the
Subcontractor to accomplish the requirements of this section as well as the
expected lateral displacement at the top of the excavation perimeter
retention system. The proposal drawings and documents shall bear the
seal and signature of the specialist described in this section. The Engineer
will review the proposal for the design intent of the project.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02221
Page No. 4
2. The proposal shall accompanied by the resumes and references of the

subcontractor, his foremen and his engineers.
3. Shop (Construction) Drawings:
1. Shop drawings shall bear the seal and signature of the Subcontractor
specialist described in this section of the Specification.
2. Show engineering calculations, fabrication, installation, anchorage, tie-

backs if any, layout, member sizes, connection details, into rock anchoring,
types, grades and strengths of materials, standards for compliance of
materials, excavations, dewatering, and relationships and/or connections
to work of other sections of the Specifications. These drawings shall be
sufficiently complete for construction purposes and for the Consultant’s
checking of the engineering and design and interface with other building
systems and components.
4. Schedule:
1. Complete documents for the retention system shall be reviewed by the

Engineer in advance of submittals.
5. Approvals:
1. The contractor and the specialist subcontractor shall be responsible for

obtaining all necessary permits from all regulatory authorities having
jurisdiction prior to commencement of shoring system installation.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
1. Materials Generally: as described in the Subcontractor’s proposal drawings and

documents subject to the Engineer’s approval. Materials shall resist deterioration
due to soil and water conditions and shall provide strengths required by the
engineering without any short term deterioration to those strengths.
2. Submit samples as requested by the Engineer for material submittal approval.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION PERIMETER RETENTION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
1. Accurately locate work of this section using surveying methods. Have locations
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Undertake all necessary procedures to ascertain the location of all adjacent

building elements and services and carry out the work so that no damage occurs
to adjacent buildings and services.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02221
Page No. 5
3. Should adjacent structures, properties show signs of cracking, slippage or other

damages, stop work and prevent further damages from occurring.
4. Make good, to Engineer’s approval, and adjoining property owner’s approval,

damage resulting thereto.
5. If movements of earth retention system occur over and above those calculated,
stop excavation. Immediately employ suitable measurements to prevent any
further movement.
6. Do all excavation necessary for the installation of the excavation perimeter

retention system. Remove and dispose of excavated material.
3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTING
1. Engage an inspection and testing service company for quality control of work of
this section. The cost of inspection and testing services shall by paid for under the
works of this section by the Contractor. The terms of reference for the inspection
and testing firm will be established by the Engineer on acceptance of the
excavation perimeter retention system proposal.
3.3 REMEDIAL WORK
1. The Subcontractor for the work of this section shall be responsible for all costs
and pay all costs for remedial work as may be necessary to adjust retention
system so that lines and levels required are obtained. These costs would include
such items as total replacement of portions of the system not installed correctly or
greatly misaligned etc. The Contractor shall be liable for any delays to the
construction schedule and related costs to the Employer incurred due to the need
for remedial work.
3.4 EXCAVATION PERIMETER RETENTION SYSTEM REMOVAL
1. The perimeter retention system shall be required to be maintained in good

condition until a minimum of 7 days after the Ground Floor slab has been poured
and all below grade waterproofing is complete.
2. This trade shall cooperate and coordinate his work with all below grade trades
and ensure their work is complete or being sufficiently complete to avoid
interference with or damage to any part thereof during the removal of the
retention system.
3. Obtain the Engineer’s authorization before commencing removal of the retention

system. Comply with requirements of Regulatory having jurisdiction regarding
dismantling and removal of retention system.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02515
CONCRETE PAVERS
Page No. 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide concrete pavers in accordance with the Contract Documents.
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere
1. Pre-cast concrete roof tiles.

2. Pre-cast concrete.
3. Interlocking concrete pavers.
1.2 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The fabricator shall have a minimum of 5 years successful experience in the

fabrication of pre-cast concrete units of similar sizes, shapes and finishes to the
units required for this project and shall have adequate facilities to provide the
units.
1.3 STANDARDS
A. Comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following

along with QNBS ( Qatar National Building Specifications ) :
1. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for

Buildings
2. ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates
3. ASTM C39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens
4. ASTM C97 Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of

Natural Building Stone.
5. ASTM C150 Portland Cement
6. ASTM C173 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete

by Volumetric Method.
7. ASTM C260 Air-Entraining Admixture for Concrete
8. ASTM A185 Welded Steel Wire Fabric for concrete

Reinforcement or BS 4483 Steel Fabric
For Concrete Reinforcement.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. Samples: Submit samples as specified in Section 01300. Contractor shall submit

three samples of each type and colour of unit pavers for approval. The sample
submission procedures are intended to assist with the design selection; the

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02515
CONCRETE PAVERS
Page No. 2
Contractor’s assistance is mandatory in this process. Resubmit samples as often

as is deemed necessary by the Engineer to obtain approval. Mock-up shall match
approved samples.
2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings as specified in Section 01300 for the
Engineer’s approval. Show layout of curbs, pavers, patterns and colours,
installation details and interface details with adjacent constructions.
3. Certification: Submit manufacturer’s certification indicating that materials

supplied and installed are in strict accordance with the requirements of this
Section.
1. Mock-Up: Provide sample installation (mock-up) of road pavers, and curbing to

size and location as directed by the Engineer. The mock-up shall be equivalent to
area of 4 m x 4 m. Mock-up shall show installation techniques, quality of
workmanship, patterns and jointing to adjacent construction. Modify mock-up as
often as necessary by the Engineer to obtain approval. Mock-up shall match
approved samples.
2. Samples: Shall be tested in accordance with relevant BS standards. Tests shall

be carried out to verify the transverse strength and water absorption of the pavers.
2.1 MATERIALS
1. Exterior Pre cast Concrete Pavers and Interlocking Concrete Pavers (CT-1):
High compressive strength pavers to BS 6717: Part 1, ASTM C986, and to match
colour, size, pattern and shape as selected by Engineer. Paving blocks minimum
80 mm thick for roads.
2. Concrete Curbs (CT-3): Hydraulically pressed concrete curbs to BS 7263: Part 1

and in situ cast concrete curbs all as shown on the detail drawings to the
Engineer’s approval.
3. Pre cast Roof Tiles: Hydraulically pressed concrete tiles with 600 x 600 x 40 mm
size concrete is mixed with waterproofing material.
4. Steel Dowels: to BS 4482, 12 mm diameter x 150 mm long haunching dowels.
5. Geogrid: Submit manufacturers’ catalogues for approval.
6. Sub-Base: Type 1 granular sub-base material of compacted granular material in

one layer of crushed, hard rock or quarry waste (no chalk) passing a 75 mm BS
sieve, minimum 200 mm sub-base for roads and 150 mm for sidewalks.
7. Bedding Course: minimum 50 mm of sand and fine gravel with a grading C of

BS 882: 1988 vibrated and compacted to provide a close and smooth surface, all
to BS 6717: Part 3.
8. Sand for Joint Filling: clean dry sand, 100% passing a 1.18 mm BS sieve, 10%
passing a 75 IUM BS sieve, mortar sands to BS 1200: 1976.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02515
CONCRETE PAVERS
Page No. 3
9. Joint Filler: between concrete curbs and pavers, and to concrete roads, to be
filled with semi rigid polyethylene joint filler and sealed with 2 part polysulphide
joint filler.
2.2 EQUIPMENT FOR INSTALLATION PAVERS
1. Saw for Curing Pavers and Curb Units: Carborundum or diamond blade powered
circular saw or mechanical block splitter. No hammer or chisel allowed.
2. Vibrator: Mechanical plate type developing a compacting force between 12 to 24

KN
3.1 INSTALLATION
1. Installation of the work of this Section shall only be undertaken after completion of
all grading, drainage and underground works within the Limits of Contract area.
3.2 CONCRETE PAVERS TO ROADS AND SIDEWALKS
1. Excavate to sub-grade to accept new curbs, roads, etc.
2. Inspect sub-grade surfaces to ensure they are suitable to accept work of this
Section.
3. Compaction of Sub-grade: Defer final excavation to formation level until

immediately before compaction of sub-grade. Soft spots must be brought to the
attention of the Engineer to obtain instructions before proceeding. Sub-grade must
be at the optimum humidity for compaction. Where use of a roller is impracticable,
use a suitable mechanical rammer.
4. Sub-grade for Vehicular Areas: immediately before placing the sub-base

material, compact sub-grade with not less than four passes of a roller weighing 8-
10 tonnes or by equivalent other means, to a minimum 98% standard Proctor
density.
5. Place geo-grid over sub-grade of vehicular areas prior to placing granular sub-
base, lap joints 100 mm and turn up 200 mm of foundation/curbs/walls, etc.
6. Placing sub-base granular material: Ensure that sub-grade is free from loose
soil, rubbish and standing water. Take all necessary precautions to ensure
stability of adjacent structures. Place and compact material against or over
structures, membranes or buried services in a sequence and manner, which will
ensure stability and avoid damage.
7. Granular sub-base for vehicular areas: Spread and level in layers and as soon
as possible thereafter compact each layer using plant and methods suitable to the
type of material to 98% standard Proctor density:
- Maximum depth of each compacted layer.

- Type of plant.
- Minimum number of passes per layer.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02515
CONCRETE PAVERS
Page No. 4
8. Surfaces to receive pavers to have sufficient sand, fine gravel, or other approved
fine material applied and surface vibrated to provide a close and smooth surface.
Sand for bedding shall be sharp sand or crushed rock fines, not more than 10%
retained on a 5 mm BS sieve and evenly graded, free from deleterious salts and
contaminants. Maintain at an even moisture content which will give maximum
compaction during any laying period.
9. Lay 40-50 mm of bedding sand screening over the sub-base and level – Do not
compact. Spread sand and screed to a thickness of 25-30 mm.
10. Lay pavers in the pattern as directed by the Engineer. Install pavers 6 mm above
drainage outlets.
11. Compaction and Jointing: Thoroughly compact pavers with vibrating plate
compactor with a minimum of three passes, as laying proceeds, but after infilling
at edges. Apply the same compacting effect over the whole surface. Do not leave
uncompacted areas of paving at the end of working periods, except within 1 metre
of unrestrained edges. Check paving after compacting first few metres, then at
frequent intervals to ensure that surface levels are as specified; if they are not, lift
pavers and relay. Brush sand into joints, re-vibrate surface and repeat as required
to completely fill joints and until pavers are uniformly level, true to grade and free
of any movement. Avoid damaging curbs and adjacent work during vibration.
12. Provide edge restraint to all perimeters of paved areas to eliminate the loss of
bedding course material.
13. Provide paver ancillary fittings, such as rebated pavers, for metal tree surrounds,
precut pavers for Bollard surrounds and transkerb units for level change.
14. Accuracy: Maximum, permissible deviation from the required levels, falls and
cambers to be as follows:
Roads Walkways
Sub-grade + 0 mm + 0 mm
- 25 mm - 25 mm
Sub-base + 0 mm + 0 mm
- 20 mm - 12 mm
Pavement Surface +/- 6 mm +/- 6mm
15. Road gradients should have a minimum longitudinal gradient of 1:100 and cross
fall of 1:40 or as indicated on Drawings.
16. The surface of the completed pavement will be checked longitudinally and
transversely for smoothness with a 3 m straight edge. The surface shall not vary
more than 3 mm in 3 m parallel with the centreline or 6 mm at right angles to the
centreline.
3.3 INSTALLATION - CURBS

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02515
CONCRETE PAVERS
Page No. 5
1. Install concrete curbs to sizes and profiles as shown on Drawings and to approval
of Authorities having Jurisdiction. Top of curbs shall be in plane flush with surface
of sidewalk, or to concrete road access.
2. Laying Generally:
1. Where necessary, cut units neatly and accurately with a masonry saw and
without spalling, to give neat junctions. Bed curbs in mortar, true to line
and level along top and front faces on accurately cast reinforced concrete
foundations and secure with a continuous haunching of concrete. Allow
bedding to set before placing haunching, Keep exposed faces of units
clean and free from mortar droppings.
2. Joints between curbs shall be 3 mm wide; fill with dry sand/Portland

cement mixture and mist with water to allow mixture to set.
3. Haunching Dowels:
1. Insert dowels vertically into foundation while concrete is still plastic,

at 600 mm centres, 50 mm from back face of curb and with 75 mm
projecting. Haunching to be rectangular across section, cast
against formwork, so as fully to enclose and protect dowels.
3.4 CLEANING
1. Wash and sweep pavers, treads, risers and curbs clean of dust and laitance.
2. Leave adjoining areas clean of debris and surplus material.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02525
EXTRIOR GRANITE PAVERS & CLADDING
Page No. 1
1. Compliance with Sections of Division 1 – General Requirements.
2. Installation of exterior granite pavers and cladding. (Fabrication and supply is by

Section 04465).
1.2 RELATED WORK
1. Dimension stone systems: Section 04465.

2. Section 07120: Fluid applied waterproofing.
3. Section 07165: Basement waterproofing.
4. Section 07200: Thermal Insulation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Comply with requirements of Section 01300 – Submittals
2. Samples: Submit three samples of granite pavers and curbing for approval. The
sample submission procedures are intended to assist with design selection. The
Contractor’s assistance is mandatory in this process. Resubmit samples as often
as deemed necessary by the Engineer to obtain final approval.
3. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating layout of pavers, cladding,

position, colour, etc. and interference and installation details for Engineer’s review.
1. Install a 3 m x 3 m paved area, complete with cladding. The mock-up shall show
installation techniques, quality of workmanship, patterns, joints interference detail
with adjacent construction. The mock-up area shall be the standard from which
the work will be judged.
2. Stone used for paving shall be tested in accordance with relevant BS standards.
Tests shall be carried out to verify the transverse strength and water absorption of
material.
3. Cutting of granite – shall be by diamond blade powered circular saw or high

pressure water jet.
2.1 MATERIALS
1. Exterior Granite cladding: Type M6 Granite, polished finish, 20 mm thick, as

supplied by Section 04465; size as indicated on the Drawings. Granite shall be
treated by water repellent agent from the backside.
2. Exterior Granite Pavers: Type M7 Granite, flamed finish, 20 mm thick, as

supplied by Section 04465; size as indicated on the Drawings. Granite to be
treated with water repellent agent.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02525
Page No. 2
3. Exterior Granite risers: Type M8 Granite, polished finish, 20 mm thick, as

supplied by Section 04465; size as indicated on the Drawings. Granite shall be
treated by water repellent agent from the backside.
4. Exterior Granite treads: Type M9 Granite, flamed finish, 30 mm thick, as

supplied by Section 04465; size as indicated on the Drawings. Granite to be
treated with water repellent agent.
5. Setting Mortar Bed: 1:3 Portland cement/sand gauged with Laticrete 3701 latex
admixture, to Engineer’s approval.
6. Cement: Non staining low – alkali Portland cement to BS12 and to ASTM
C150 Type 1, with not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested to ASTM C
114.
7. Mortar Sand: To BS 1200, washed, free of chlorides and sulphides, sampled and
tested to BS 812.
8. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized welded – wire fabric, 50 x 50 x 1.6 mm

diameter wire complying with ASTM A 185 and A82.
9. Sub-Base: Type 1 granular sub-base material of compacted granular material in

one layer of crushed, hard rock or quarry waste (no chalk) passing a 75 mm BS
sieve, minimum 150 mm for sidewalks.
10. Bedding Course: minimum 50 mm of sand and fine gravel with a grading C of BS
882 : 1998, vibrated and compacted to provide a close and smooth surface,
all to BS 6717: Part 3.
11. Sand for joint Filling: clean dry sand, 100% passing a 1.18 mm BS sieve,
10% passing a 75 IUM BS sieve.
12. Mixture of Dry-Grout Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of factory prepared dry-grout
mix and latex additive to comply with the following requirements.
1. Unsanded Dry-grout Mix: Dry-set grout complying with ANSI A118.6 for
joints 3 mm and narrower.
2. Sanded Dry-Grout Mix: Commercial Portland cement grout complying with

ANSI A118.6 for joints 3 mm and wider.
3. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber.
4. Latex Additive: Acrylic resin.
13. Sealant: Multi-component modified polyurethane sealant.
14. Joint Back-up: Round closed cell polyurethane foam rod, with a shared hardness
20, oversized 30 to 50% of joint width, compatible with primers and non-adhering
to sealant.
15. Granite Sealer: As per manufacturer’s bitumen.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02525
Page No. 3
3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
1. Inspect concrete substrate to ensure that surfaces are clean, washed and free of
curing agent or any other chemicals which may affect negatively the bonding of
the setting bed mortar.
3.2 INSTALLATION – PAVERS ON WATERPROOFED CONCRETE SLAB
1. Receive granite pavers from Section 04465.
2. Place reinforcing wire fabric, lapped at joints by at least one full mesh and
supported so mesh becomes embedded in middle of setting bed. Do not butt
edges against vertical surfaces.
3. Place mortar setting bed with reinforcing wire fabric fully embedded in middle of
setting bed. Spread and screed setting bed to uniform thickness at elevations
required for accurate setting of stone to finished grades indicated.
4. Mix and place only as much mortar setting bed as can be covered with stone
before initial set. Cut back, bevel edges, and discard setting-bed material that has
reached initial set before placing stone.
5. Place stone paver before initial set of mortar occurs. Immediately before placing
stone on setting bed, apply uniform 1.5 mm thick, slurry bond coat to bed or to
back of each stone unit with a flat trowel.
6. Tamp and beat stone with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact
with setting bed to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each
unit in a single operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already
set and disturb stone for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting
joints.
7. Fill all expansion and control joint filler, joint-back-up and sealant in accordance
with Section 07900 Joint Sealants. Test sealant for adhesion and staining before
installation, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION – PAVERS ON SAND BED
1. Receive granite pavers from Section 04465.
2. Excavate to sub-grade to accept new cladding and pavers.
3. Inspect sub-grade surfaces to ensure they are suitable to accept work of this
Section.
4. Compaction of sub-grade: Defer final excavation level until immediately before

compaction of sub-grade. Soft spots must be brought to the attention of the
Engineer to obtain instructions before proceeding. Sub-grade must be at the
optimum humidity for compaction. Where use of a roller is impracticable, use a
suitable mechanical rammer. Thoroughly compact sub-grade to a minimum 98%
Standard Proctor density.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02525
Page No. 4
5. Placing sub-base granular material: Ensure that sub-grade is free from loose
soil, rubbish and standing water. Take all necessary precautions to ensure
stability of adjacent structures. Place and compact material against or over
structures, membranes or buried services in a sequence and manner, which will
ensure stability and avoid damage. Spread and level sub-base material and as
soon as possible thereafter compact to 98% Standard Proctor density with a roller
weighing not less than 2.5 tones or other equivalent equipment.
6. Surfaces to receive pavers to have sufficient sand, fine gravel or other approved
fine material applied and surface vibrated to provide a close and smooth surface.
Sand for bedding shall be sharp sand or crushed rock fines, not more than 10%
retained on a 5mm BS sieve and evenly graded, free from deleterious salts and
contaminants. Maintain at an even moisture content, which will give maximum
compaction during any laying period.
7. Lay 40-50 mm of bedding sand screening over the sub-base and level. Do not
compact. Spread sand and screed to a thickness of 25-30 mm.
8. Install with 10 mm joints between granite pavers and vertical adjoining

construction elements to permit expansion/contraction. Install granite paving with
butt joints between pavers.
9. Make granite paver installation level, free of trip hazard with adjacent sidewalk
surfaces. Provide slopes for surface drainage away from building.
10. Maintain layout pattern as indicated on Drawings. Cut pavers as required to fit site
conditions.
11. Compaction and Jointing: Tamp and beat stone with a wooden block or rubber
mallet to obtain full contract with setting bed and to bring finished surfaces within
indicated tolerances. Set each unit in a single operation. Check paving after
compacting first few metres, then at frequent intervals to ensure that surface
levels are as specified; if they are not, lift pavers and relay. Grout joints, tamp and
repeat as required to completely fill joints and until pavers are uniformly level, true
to grade and free of any movement. Avoid damaging cladding and adjacent work
during installation.
3.4 INSTALLATION - CLADDING
1. Receive granite and stainless steel dowels from Section 04465.
2. Install granite cladding to sizes and profiles as indicated on drawings, and to the
extent shown on Drawings. Top of cladding shall be plane, flush with the top
surface on granite pavers
3.5 GROUTING PAVERS AND CLADDING
1. Grout stone joints to comply with ANSI A108.10 and manufacturer’s written
instructions.
2. Do not use sanded grout for polished stone.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
02525
Page No. 5
3. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. Force grout into
joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining stone and other surfaces. After
initial set of grout, finish joints by tooling to produce a slightly concave polished
joint, free from drying cracks.
4. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for 7 days, except as otherwise

recommended by latex additive manufacturer.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
1. Remove and replace stone paving of the following description.
1. Broken, cracked, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone

may be repaired if methods and results are approved by the Engineer.
2. Defective joints.
3. Stone paving, flooring, and joints not matching approved samples and
mock-ups.
4. Stone paving and flooring not complying with other requirements indicated.
5. Stone that has some discoloration after fixing.
2. Replace in a manner that results in stone paving matching approved samples and
mock-ups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of
replacement.
3. In-progress Cleaning: Clean stone paving as work progress. Remove mortar fins
and smears before tooling joints.
4. Clean stone paving after setting and grouting are complete. Use procedures
recommended by stone fabricator for types of application.
5. Apply sealer to cleaned stone according to sealer manufacturer’s written

instruction.
3.7 PROTECTION
1. Prohibit traffic from installed stone for a minimum of 72 hours.
2. Protect stone paving during construction with 100 microns thick polyethelene
sheeting and a layer of gypsum. Where adjoining areas require construction work
access, cover stone paving with a minimum of 19 mm untreated plywood.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page No. 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION
Concrete work shall be provided including all cast in place and pre-cast concrete work
indicated on the Structural, Architectural, Civil, Mechanical, Plumbing or Electrical
drawings and as specified and directed, in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
1.2 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with
the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following along with QNBS –
Qatar National Building Specifications (latest editions):
BS 8110 PART 1:1985 “Code of Practice for the Structural Use of

Concrete”
BS 12 “Portland Cement”
BS 410 “Test Sieves”
BS 812 “Specification for Testing Aggregates”
BS 882 “Aggregates from Natural Sources”
BS 1305 “Batch Type Concrete Mixtures”
BS 1881 “Methods of Testing Concrete”
BS 3148 “Tests for Water for Making Concrete”
BS 3797 “Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete”
BS 4027 “Sulfate-Resisting Portland Cement”
BS 4251 “Truck Type Concrete Mixers”
BS 4449 “Hot Rolled Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of
Concrete”
BS 4461 “Specification for Cold Worked Steel Bars for the
Reinforcement for Concrete”
BS 4757 “Nineteen-wire steel strands for Pre-stressed Concrete”
BS 4466 “Bending Dimensions and Scheduling of Reinforcement
for Concrete”
BS 5328 “Methods of specifying concrete, including ready-mixed
Concrete”
BS 4482 “Specification for Cold Reduced Steel Wire for the
Reinforcement of Concrete”
BS 4483 “Steel Fabric for Reinforcement of Concrete”
BS 4550 “Methods of Testing Cement”
BS 5075 “Concrete Admixtures”
BS 5337 “Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Concrete for
Retaining Aqueous Liquids”
BS 5328 Ready Mixed Concrete
BS 5606 “Code of Practice for Accuracy in Building”
BS 5950 “Structural use of Steel work in building”
BS 8007 “Design of Concrete Structures for Retaining Aqueous
Liquids”
ACI 211.1 “Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,
Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete”
ACI 301.89 “Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings”
ACI 304 “Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing,
Transporting and Placing Concrete”
ACI 305R.91 “Hot Weather Concreting”
ACI 309 “Consolidation of Concrete”

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 2
ACI 315 “Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforcement

Concrete Structures”
ACI 347 “Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork”
AWS D1.4 “Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel”
CRSI “Placing Reinforcing Bars”
AASHTO “Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
M148 Concrete”
AASHTO “Burlap Cloth Made From Jute or Kenaf”
M182
ASTM A185 “Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement”
ASTM A615 “Deformed and plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement”
ASTM C31 “Methods of Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Field”
ASTM C33 “Concrete Aggregates”
ASTM C40 “Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates
for Concrete”
ASTM C88 “Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of
Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate”
ASTM C94 “Ready-Mixed Concrete”
ASTM C114 “Method for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement”
ASTM C117 “Test Method for Material Finer Than 75-um (No. 200)
Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing”
ASTM C125 “Definitions of Terms Relating to Concrete and Concrete
Aggregates”
ASTM C131 “Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-size
Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los
Angeles Machine”
ASTM C138 “Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content
(Gravimetric) of Concrete”
ASTM C227 “Tests for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement Aggregate
Combinations (mortar bar test method)”
ASTM C295 “Standard Practice for Petrographic Examination of
Aggregates for Concrete”
ASTM C142 “Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in
Aggregates”
ASTM C143 “Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete”
ASTM C150 “Portland Cement”
ASTM C156 “Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing
Materials”
ASTM C171 “Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete”
ASTM C231 “Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure
Method”
ASTM C260 “Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete”
ASTM C289 “Test Method for Potential Reactivity of Aggregates
(Chemical Method)”
ASTM C309 “Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete”
ASTM C403 “Time of Setting of Concrete Mixtures by Penetration
Resistance”
ASTM A416 “Uncoated Seven Wire Stress Relieved Steel Strand for
Prestressed Concrete”
ASTM A775 “Epoxy Coated Reinforced Steel Bars”

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 3
ASTM C494 “Chemical Admixtures for Concrete”

ASTM E96 Test Methods for Water Vapour Transmission of
Materials”
ASTM E154 “Methods of Testing Materials for Use as Vapour Barrier
Under Concrete Slabs and as Ground Cover in Crawl
Spaces”.
The CIRA Guide to Concrete Construction in the gulf region special Publication “31”
Copies of ACI Standards can be obtained from the American Concrete Institute
P.O.Box: 19150, Redford station, Detroit Michigan, 48219-0150 U.S.A
Copies of ASTM Standards can be obtained from the American Society for Testing
and Materials, 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia Pennsylvania, 19103 U.S.A
Copies of British Standards can obtained from BSI Standards Linford
Woods, Milton Keynes, MK 14 6LE United Kingdom.
Copies of CIRA Publication can be obtained from Construction Industry Research

and Information Association 6 Storey’s Gate, London SWIP 3 AU.
Copies of all the above codes shall be submitted to the Engineer and shall be kept
on site for easy reference.
B. STRUCTURAL DESIGN CODES AND STANDARDS

1. The following Design Codes and Standards will be used for the structural design
of this project along with QNBS (Qatar National Building Specifications):
Wind loads - ASCE Standard 7-95, Chapter 6 – Wind

Loads
Seismic loads - 1997 Uniform Buildings Code (UBC),

Chapter 16, Division IV - Earthquake Design
Imposed loads - 1997 Uniform Buildings Code (UBC),

Chapter 16, Division I
Concrete design - ACI 318: Building Code Requirement for

Reinforced Concrete.
Steel design - AISC Manual of Steel Construction.
Foundation wall - ACI 318: Building Code Requirement for

Design Reinforced Concrete.
Foundation design - ACI 318: Building Code Requirement for

Reinforced Concrete.
2. All Design Codes and Standards listed above are approved by the Structural
Department of Qatar Municipality.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 4
C. This Specification Section shall govern all cast-in-place concrete work for the
complete project except where more stringent or specialized requirements are
indicated. All work shall be performed to secure for the entire project homogeneous
concrete having the required strength, surface finish, materials, durability, and
weathering resistance, without planes of weakness or other structural defects, and
free of honeycombs, air pockets, voids, projections, offsets of plane and other
defacements of concrete. The Contractor will be fully responsible for any defects or
damage in the building arising from faulty materials or workmanship and the cost of
remedial measures in order to ensure that the completed work complies with the
Contract Documents.
D. Base construction methodology on the construction indicated in the Contract

Documents. No alterations or substitutions of the structural systems shown on the
Drawings will be permitted unless otherwise specified.
E. Supervise and coordinate all phases of the concrete construction process and be
responsible for the complete manufacturing process for all concrete work. All
methods of manufacture and practices of handling raw materials and manufactured
concrete shall be reviewed by the Engineer to execution of the concrete work.
F. Only materials of known quality shall be incorporated in the work. All materials shall
be properly selected, reviewed with the Engineer before use, and maintained during
shipment, storage and use. Construction systems and techniques shall be properly
selected, reviewed with the Engineer before use, and maintained throughout the
complete concrete construction and maintained throughout the complete concrete
construction phase. Adequate spare equipment, parts, additional components and
repair facilities shall be available for all tools and equipment.
G. Regardless of reviews and approvals by the Engineer, be responsible for all

materials, methods and the work, and if any work does not satisfy the Contract
Documents, implement removal, replacement or remedial work and revise
procedures or materials to prevent recurrence of unacceptable work at no additional
cost to the Employer.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit detail fabrication and placement drawings for all Formwork
and reinforcing steel which are correlated with forming and concrete placement
techniques and requirements.
1. Reinforcing shall be detailed based on construction joint locations which shall

have been shown on shop drawings reviewed and approved by the Engineer.
2. The drawings shall be in such detail as to assure that difficulties in execution of

the work in the field are minimized.
3. The drawings shall consist of sections, plans and details clearly showing
locations, sizes and spacing of all reinforcing steel, supporting bars and
accessories. Include on the shop drawings, schedules and diagrams to indicate
bends, sizes and lengths of all reinforcing steel bars.
4. A separate set of shop drawings, which shows the construction joint locations,
shall show all floor openings, wall openings and edges of concrete. Floor, wall

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 5
openings and sleeves for all mechanical, plumbing and electrical work shall be
coordinated with the respective trades and shown on these shop drawings in
accordance with the criteria indicated on the various applicable Sections of the
Specification.
5. No work shall be fabricated until all shop drawings have been reviewed and
approved by the Engineer (with corrections and re-submittals as required by the
Contract Documents). After review and approval by the Engineer furnish all
copies needed for fabrication and erection, and for use of other trades.
6. Be fully responsible for furnishings and installing all materials called or required
by the Contract Documents even though these materials may have been omitted
from the reviewed shop drawings.
7. Submit shop drawings for all Formwork showing location of panel jointing,
cackling, taping, tie bolts, cones, dummy cones, openings, chamfers, inserts,
fittings and accessories for the approval of the Engineer before fabrication of
Formwork.
8. Submit design calculations in accordance with ACI Standard 301, Chapter 4,

Paragraph 4.2, wherever required for the supporting system of the formwork
along with the shop drawings for the supporting system, for approval of the
Engineer.
B. Samples
1. Provide cut lengths of reinforcing as requested by the Engineer for testing or

evaluation by the Laboratory as required by the Engineer. The Contractor shall
not fabricate any reinforcing bars prior to the approval of the Engineer.
2. Provide sample of all materials and concrete accessories of every type proposed
for use including component parts of prefabricated Formwork systems and
manufacturer’s technical literature relating thereto. Prepare mock-ups and carry
out such tests on the proposed prefabricated formwork systems as may be
required by the Engineer in order that he may be satisfied as to the system’s
suitability.
3. Furnish reinforcement and accessories for sample panels and mocked-up

portions of the structure as required using all materials and techniques as they will
be used in actual constructions.
C. Mill Tests: Furnish the Engineer with certified mill test reports for cement, steel
reinforcement, welded wire fabric and pre-stressing strands.
D. Certifications for Admixtures: As specified under admixtures.
E. Test Reports: Submit preliminary test results for the Engineer’s approval at least
three weeks prior to the beginning of the work. In addition to the test reports specified
under “Quality Control”, submit the following directly to the Engineer.
1. Preliminary Design Mix Reports (BS 8110 Section 6).

2. Aggregate Soundness Test Reports (ASTM C88).
Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 6
3. Aggregate Staining Test Reports (ASTM C641).

4. Air Entrapment Test Reports (ASTM C260).
1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Comply with BS 8110, Section 6.
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Hot Weather Concreting: Refer to Clause 1.02 “STANDARDS”.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Preliminary Tests (Trial Tests)
1. Target Mean Strength: The concrete mix shall have at least the required
minimum cement content and mean strength greater than the required
characteristic strength by at least the current margin. The current margin
shall be taken as the lesser of :
a. 1.64 times the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 100

separate batches of concrete of nominally similar proportions of
similar materials and produced over a period not exceeding 12
months by the same plant under similar supervision, but not less
than one sixth (1/6) of the characteristic strength for concrete of
grade 70,100 or 150 or not less than 37.50 kg/Cm2 for concrete of
grade 200 or above.
b. 1.64 times the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 40

separate batches of concrete of nominally similar proportions of
similar materials and produced over a period exceeding 5 days but
not exceeding 6 months by the same plant under similar
supervision, but not less than one third (1/3) of the characteristic
strength for concrete of grade 70, 100 or 150 or not less than 75
kg/Cm2 for concrete of grade 200 or above.
If enough data is not available to satisfy the requirements of either (a) or

(b) above mentioned, the margin shall be taken as two-third (2/3) of the
characteristic strength for concrete of grade 70, 100 and 150 or 100
kg/cm2 for concrete of grade 200 or above. When required characteristic
strength approaches maximum possible strength of concrete a smaller
margin but not less than 75 kg/cm2 shall be permitted. Evidence shall be
submitted to the Project
Manager for each grade of concrete showing that at the intended

workability, the proposed mixed proportions and manufacturing method will
produce concrete of required quality. Declare any change in source of
material and any change in cement content, nature and source of each
material, full details of tests on trial mixes, proposed quantities of each
ingredient per cubic metre of fully compacted concrete.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 7
2. To establish the suitability of any material used in the concrete work, unless specified
otherwise, make preliminary tests and prepare design mixes, in accordance with ACI-
301, Chapter 3, Paragraph 3.8, Method 1 or Method 2, in a design laboratory
acceptable to the Engineer.
3. In addition to the tests required to establish the suitability of materials, make one test
for each design mix to verify that the total Chloride (C1) ion content and total Sulfate
(SO3) content of each mix is within the specified limits. Perform Chloride tests in
accordance with “Standard Method of Sampling and Testing for Total Chloride Ion in
Concrete”.
4. Trial Mixes
a. Where trial mixes are requested by the Engineer, three separate batches of
concrete shall be made using materials likely to be typical of the proposed supply
and preferably under full-scale production conditions. If circumstances make this
inconvenient the batches may be mixed in the laboratory only if approved by the
Engineer
b. Sampling and testing shall be strictly in accordance with B.S.1881. The

workability of each batch of concrete shall be determined and three (3) cubes
made from each batch of concrete for test at 28 days. A further three (3) cubes
from each batch shall be made for test at earlier age. The trial mix proportions
shall be approved by the Engineer if the average strength of nine (9) cubes tested
at 28 days exceeds the specified characteristic strength by the appropriate margin
or if nine (9) cubes tested at an earlier age indicate that it is likely to be exceeded
by this amount. The appropriate margin is the margin as given in Clause 1.6.A1
herein for concrete of nominally similar proportions and of similar materials to the
trial mix. For this purpose if the trial mix does not differ by more than 30 kg/m3 of
cement from a reference mix of similar workability, then the proportions may be
regarded as “nominally similar” and the current margin for the reference mix can
be taken as the appropriate margin for the trial mix. If trial mixes are required to
demonstrate that the maximum free water/cement ratio is not exceeded, two
batches shall be made in a laboratory with cement and saturated sand surface dry
aggregate known from past records of the suppliers of the materials to be typical.
The proposed mix proportions shall be accepted only if both batches have the
correct cement content and free water/cement ratio below the maximum specified
value at the proposed degree of workability.
5. Have a representative present at the laboratory when the preliminary tests are made.
Whenever a change of brand or source for any of the concrete ingredients occurs,
additional “preliminary tests” will be required and the cost of these tests shall be borne
by the Contractor.
B. Plant and Field Tests and Inspection
1. Concrete work will be subject to detailed inspection and tests at the plant and in the
field. Notify the Engineer one day in advance or concrete work. Inspection, field tests
and sampling of concrete taken from the job will be carried out under the direction of
the Engineer. Likewise the conducting of tests carried out by the Contractor in his site
testing laboratory shall be under the direction of the Engineer.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 8
2. Concrete shall be produced in accordance with BS 5328. BS 5328 requires that tests
are made on the constituent materials in accordance with the relevant British Standard,
(refer to Part 2 of this Section), and that control tests are made on concrete to ensure
compliance with the specified requirements.
3. When tested, the concrete shall meet the appropriate requirements specified in BS
5328, i.e.:
a. characteristic compressive strength;

b. specified mix proportions;
c. minimum or maximum cement content;
d. maximum free-water/cement ratio;
e. workability;
f. air content of concrete;
g. temperature of fresh concrete;
h. density of fully compacted concrete.
4. Rate of sampling and testing shall be as specified and/or as directed by the Engineer.
The cost of sampling and testing shall be borne by the Contractor.
5. Facilitate sampling procedure and provide labour and material as required. Notify the
Engineer when reinforcing steel is in place in order to facilitate any inspection he
deems necessary. Submit checking sheets before placing concrete. Do not place
concrete until these inspections have been completed and all deficiencies reported by
the Engineer have been corrected to the Engineer’s satisfaction. Checking sheets
must hold the Contractor’s representative signature.
6. Supply all moulds require for tests as described below, using moulds of the same type
and manufacture for making all test specimens. If field tests show excessive slumps or
other violations of the Contract Documents, the entire batch of concrete from which the
sample in question was taken will be rejected and shall be removed from the site at the
Contractor’s expense. The Engineer will inspect all concrete operations in the plant
and in the field.
7. If ready-mix concrete is used, each load of concrete arriving at the job shall be
accompanied by a delivery ticket which shall be subject to checking the Engineer at the
plant and which shall contain the following information:
a. The strength of the mix of concrete being delivered.
b. The exact time the cement and aggregate were discharged into the delivery truck.
If upon reaching the job the concrete cannot be placed within the time limits stated,
or if the type of concrete delivered is incorrect, the Engineer will reject the load and
it shall be removed from the site at the Contractor’s expense.
c. List of admixtures and concentration percentage.
d. The amount of Concrete slump measured at the Plant.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 9
8. Under the supervision and direction of the Engineer the Contractor will take specimens
of each class of concrete from different locations on the job as follows:
a. At least twelve (12) specimens for each 40 cubic meters or fraction thereof of each
class of concrete and in any case not less than twelve (12) specimens for any one
day’s operations.
b. Test specimens will be taken at pouring locations to give a fair average of the
concrete in the part of the construction indicated.
c. Samples will be obtained in accordance with B.S.1881.
d. At least two slump tests: ASTM C143.
e. Testing shall conform to B.S. 1881 or ASTM C31 in making, curing and
subsequently handling test specimens, except as modified herein. Cubes shall be
engraved with the date of placing and the serial number of the cubes (1 to 12) plus
a universal serial number representing the number of the pour.
f. The cubes shall be placed in laboratory storage on Site under moist curing
conditions at approximately 21oC within 24 hours after moulding and maintained
therein until ready for testing at the Site Laboratory. Three cube specimens will be
tested at seven days, and if the seven day strength is deficient, the Contractor will
be notified. Three cubes will then be tested at 14 days, three cubes of 28 days,
and the remaining 3 cubes will be tested as directed by the Engineer, having been
cured with curing compound for 28 days.
g. Two unit weight and yield tests: ASTM C138.
9. Under the supervision and direction of the Engineer the Contractor will take specimens
of each class of concrete, and an independent Testing Agency, approved by the
Engineer, will perform one test for each 100 cubic metres to verify that the total
Chloride ion content and the total Sulfate content are each within the specified limits.
As soon as the concrete is no longer plastic, but in no event more than 24 hours after
placement, the Testing Agency will perform tests in accordance with the procedures
herein specified under Paragraph 1.6 A3.
10. Keep records of all specimens taken and tests made using a proforma approved by the
Engineer. Such records shall be signed by the Contractor and the Engineer.
C. Change of Current Margin: When the results of a sufficiently large number of tests show
that the previously established margin is significantly too large or too small, a change in
the current margin used for judging compliance with the specified characteristic strength
may be appropriate. Recalculation of the margin shall be carried out as before, but the
adoption of recalculated value will not generally be justified if the two values differ by less
than 18% when based on tests on 40 separate batches or less than 11% when based on
tests on 100 separate batches, or less than 5% when based on tests on 500 separate
batches. This recalculated margin if adopted becomes the current margin for the
judgment of compliance with the specified characteristic strength of concrete.
D. Testing Plan

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 10
1. Each 3 cubes shall be made from a single sample taken from a randomly selected
batch of concrete. The sample shall be taken from the point of discharge from the
delivery vehicle. The characteristic strength of concrete shall comply with the
following requirements:
a. The average strength determined from any group of four consecutive sets of test
cubes exceeds the specified characteristic strength by not less than 0.3 times the
current margin.
b. Each individual test result is greater than 85% of the specified strength.
The current margin shall be taken as given in Paragraph 1.6.A1. If only one cube
result fails to meet the second requirement mentioned above, that result may be
considered to represent only the particular batch of concrete from which that cube
was taken, provided the average strength of the group satisfied the first requirement.
If more than one cube fails to meet the second requirement or if the average strength
of any group of four consecutive test cubes fail to meet the second requirement, then
all the concrete in all the batches represented by all such cubes shall be deemed not
to comply with the strength requirements.
2. Enforcement: When the average strength of four consecutive test cubes fail to meet
the first requirement mentioned in the testing plan, the mix proportions of subsequent
batches of concrete shall be modified to increase the strength. The Engineer shall
decide as to what action may be taken for test cubes that fail to meet the requirements
mentioned. In estimating the quality of the sub-standard concrete and in determining
the action to be taken the following shall be considered:
a. The validity of test results and confirmation that specimen sampling and testing
have been carried out in accordance with B.S. 1881. Concrete shall be judged by
the strength of specified characteristic strength, together with the cement content,
in comparison with the specified minimum cement content.
b. The mix proportions actually used in concrete under investigation.
c. The actual section of the structure represented by the test cubes.
d. The possible influence of any reduction in concrete quality in the strength and
durability of this section of structure.
The Engineer may require tests to be carried on the hardened concrete in structure.
Where tests show that concrete is below specified strength, remove all, or a part of,
the concrete in all of the batches deemed not to comply with the strength requirement
as directed by Engineer. Full cost of removal of low strength concrete and its
replacement with concrete of proper specified strength shall be borne by the
Contractor.
3. Strength: Compliance with the specified characteristic strength shall be judged by

tests made on cubes at an age of 28 days. Not more 5% of the cube test results shall
be allowed to fall below the characteristic strength of concrete.
E. Lightweight Concrete
Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 11
1. Mix Design: Design lightweight concrete mix to produce the following physical
properties.
a. Dry Density : 500 kg/m3
b. Compressive Strength: 214 Kg/cm2.
c. Use minimum amount of water to produce a workable mix.
d. Do not exceed maximum air content recommended by aggregate manufacturer.

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: The products and manufactures specified hereinafter are specified

for the purpose of establishing minimum quality standards. Products equal in quality
to, or better than those specified, will be considered acceptable. The decision of
acceptability will rest with the Engineer.
B. Cement
1. Alkali Content For All Types of Cement: Maximum 0.6 % equivalent of Sodium
Oxide (Na2O) (ASTM C227).
2. Ordinary Cement: B.S.12 or ASTM C150, Type I or K.S.S.36, non-staining.
3. Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement: B.S.4027 or ASTM C150, Type V.
4. Sulphate resisting cement shall be used as directed by the Engineer in all work
below the ground floor level which is in contact with soil or waterproofing or
protection board or vapour barrier.
5. Cement shall originate from sources and manufacturers acceptable to the

Engineer and shall be delivered in sealed bags. Only one brand of cement shall
be used for each type of cement. When received at the batch plant, all bags shall
be intact and cement shall be completely dry. Cement exposed to moisture or
wetting of any kind during shipment or storage shall not be used on the job.
6. State cement or cement with cakes or lumps shall not be used.
7. All cement stored at site shall be kept thoroughly dry and shall be stored in water
tight sheds on a floor raised at least 200mm above ground. Cement stacks shall
have labels indicating dates of manufacture and arrival at the storage site. A
maximum of fifteen bags shall be stocked if the storage period is not more than
four weeks and eight bags if the storage period is over four weeks but not more
than three months. Any cement stored for more than three months shall not be
used without the explicit written permission of Engineer.
8. When tests performed on field show that the cement does not comply with the
original test approvals, the set of cement referring to that test sample shall be
rejected. Rejected cement shall not be permitted in storage areas or on the Site
and shall be removed within twenty four (24) hours.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 12
9. Cement shall be protected from direct exposure to sun. Cement temperature

shall not exceed 50oC.
10. All Type V Cement shall have tricalcium aluminate content not exceeding five
percent (5%).
11. Test for cement fitness, soundness and setting time shall be carried out to BS
4550 for each shipment of cement. The Engineer shall have the right to enter the
construction contractor’s store or his sub-contractor’s and request any further
tests to be carried out on the cement or cement replacement.
C. Aggregate
1. In general, aggregate shall be pre-washed and shall comply with B.S. 882,
“Concrete Aggregates from Natural Sources”, or ASTM C33, and shall be graded
in accordance with these requirements, irrespective of whether concrete is mixed
onsite or elsewhere. The contractor shall nominate the source of supply and shall
provide grading curves of aggregate for approval.
2. Aggregate shall consist of fine sand or stone aggregates and crushed stone,
crushed rock or gravel. Separate stockpiles of fine aggregate and each size of
coarse aggregate gradation shall be used. Each aggregate type shall be from a
single consistent source.
3. Storage piles of aggregates shall be placed on concrete hardstand which has

good drainage. Stockpiles shall have walls separating adjacent materials and
shall be covered to preclude segregation or intrusion of foreign materials and to
preserve the gradation. Sufficient storage shall be maintained to assure
placement of concrete at the necessary rate. Use properly constructed sheds to
protect aggregates from direct sun radiation and from blowing sands. Method of
storing and shading aggregates shall be agreed with the Engineer.
4. Aggregates shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings and
dust and when directed by the Engineer, shall be washed and sieved to remove
deleterious substances.
5. Aggregates shall not contain harmful materials, such as salts, iron pyrites, coal,
mica, shale or similar articles which may reduce the strength or durability of the
concrete. Aggregates shall not contain any material that may be chemically active
with reinforcement or that may react to cause efflorescence or that may be alkali
reactive.
6. Alkali reactive limestone aggregates such as “Dolomitic” shall not be used.
7. The grading of each size of aggregate from each pit, quarry or other sources of
supply shall be determined at least once weekly. The results of such tests shall
be reported to the Engineer and shall be used to check whether the gradings are
similar to those of the samples used in the establishment of batch weight used.
8. Supplier’s certificate shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval of the source
of aggregate.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 13
9. Aggregate for exposed unpainted concrete shall be specially selected for colour
as approved by the Engineer and shall come from a single source.
10. All aggregates shall be screened and washed and shall have less than the
following maximum salt contents as acid soluble chlorides and sulphates. The
table also shows the maximum salt content allowed in the mixed concrete.
Aggregates for coloured concrete must be approved by the Engineer prior to use.
Chlorides Sulphates
Percentage of weight fine aggregate 0.06 0.4
Percent of weight of coarse aggregate 0.03 0.4
Total percent in concrete as percent by weight 0.1 (OPC)

of cement
0.2 (SRPC) 4.0
11. Fine aggregates shall consist of natural sand or crushed gravel sand and shall
comply with BS 882 “Concrete Aggregates from Natural Sources” having hard
and durable particles or other inert materials having similar characteristics
conforming to the following requirements :
a. Fineness Modulus: 2.4 to 3.0 ASTM C125.

b. Fineness modulus shall not vary more than 0.20 from value used in
establishing mix proportions. If greater deviation, the use of such aggregates
shall be discontinued until suitable adjustments in mix proportions can be
made and reviewed.
c. Magnesium Sulfate Soundness: Max. 5% loss, ASTM C88, 5 cycles.
d. Potential Reactivity: Not reactive ASTM C289.
e. Content of Clay Lumps: Max. 1% by weight ASTM C142.
f. Gradation requirements as follows:
Size of sieve Opening Percentage by Weight

(Square Opening) Passing - ASTM C33, C117
3/8 inch (9.5 mm) 100

No. 4 (4.75 mm) 95-100
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 80-100
No. 16 (1.18 mm) 50-85
No. 30 (0.60 mm) 25-60
No. 50 (0.30 mm) 15-30
No. 100 (0.15 mm) 3-10
No. 200 (0.075 mm) 0-5
Other gradations not meeting the above requirements may be permitted

upon submission of relevant data and review by the Engineer.
g. Fine aggregates shall be free of organic materials (ASTM C40) and other
foreign matter.
h. Dune and beach sand are not to be used as fine aggregates.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 14
i. Fine and coarse aggregate shall conform to BS 882. Fine and coarse
aggregates shall be considered separate ingredients. Both shall meet the
grading requirements of BS 882.
j. Aggregate test shall be carried out at the following frequency:

- Test for clay, silt and dust, moisture content and sieve analysis shall be
carried out on every 20 tonnes of fine aggregates and 40 tonnes of coarse
aggregates delivered to the site.
- Chemical analysis shall be carried out on every 100 tonnes delivered to

the site.
12. Coarse aggregates for concrete shall consist of crushed gravel or crushed stone.
The crushing shall be regulated so that the material retained on the No. 8 (2.36
mm) sieve, at least 90 percent by weight shall consist of pieces with at least one
fractured face and at least 75 percent by weight shall consist of material with at
least two fractured faces. In addition, the coarse aggregates shall meet the
following requirements:
a. Magnesium Sulfate Soundness: Max. 5% loss, ASTM C88, 5 cycles.

b. Potential Reactivity: Not Reactive ASTM C289.
c. Abrasion: Max. 10% loss ASTM C131, 100 revolutions.
d. Flat and Elongated Particles: 3: 1 max. 30 % ASTM C125 5 : 1 max. 10%.
e. Content of Clay Lumps : Max. 0.5% by weight ASTM C142.
f. Shale: Max. 2% by weight.
g. Bulk Saturated Surface Dry Specific Gravity: Min. 2.58 ASTM C125.
h. Gradation requirements as follows:

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 15
Size of Sieve Opening Percentage by Weight

(Square opening) Passing ASTM C33
1-1/2 inch 1 inch ¾ inch

(37.5 mm) (25.4mm) (19.0mm)
Size Size Size
2 inch (50.0 mm) 100 - -

1-1/2 inch (37.5 mm) 95-100 100 -
1 inch (25.4 mm) 60-85 95-100 100
¾ inch (19.0 mm) 35-70 60-85 95-100
½ inch (12.7 mm) 20-50 25-60 60-75
3/8 inch ( 9.5 mm) 10-30 15-45 20-55
No. 4 ( 4.75 mm) 0-5 0-10 0-10
No. 8 ( 2.36 mm) - 0-5 0-6
Other gradations not meeting the above requirements may be permitted upon
submission of relevant data and review by the Engineer.
i. The maximum size of aggregates shall be 1 inch (25.4 mm) for columns, walls
and basement slabs, and ¾ inch (19.0 mm) for slabs and beams. In addition, the
maximum aggregate size shall not exceed 20 percent of the narrowest member
that is being concreted, nor shall it exceed 75 percent of the clear spacing
between adjacent steel reinforcement or between reinforcement and adjacent
Formwork.
D. Water
1. Water used for the following:
- Mixing of concrete,
- Ice production,
- Rinsing of aggregates,
- Cooling aggregates,
- Curing of concrete,
- Earthworks, compaction works
shall be clean, fresh and free of harmful matter such as oil, salts, acids, alkali,
sewage, deleterious minerals or organic matter. Water shall be filtered to remove
any colour or residues present due to contamination from water piping or
transportation or storage methods.
2. Water shall comply with the requirements of BS 5328.
3. Water shall be tested in accordance with BS 3148.

E. Admixtures
1. Suitable admixtures of the following approved types may be incorporated in the

concrete only with the prior written approval of Engineer.
A. Water reducing set retarders.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 16
B. Set retarders.
C. Water reducing agents.
D. Air entraining admixtures for lightweight concrete.
2. The Engineer shall advised in advance of the following data :
a. The typical dosage and detrimental effects of under-dosage and over-dosage
b. Chemical name(s) of the main active ingredient(s) in the admixture.
c. Whether or not the admixture leads to the entrainment of air when used at
manufacturer’s recommended dosage.
d. Admixtures containing chlorides in excess of 0.03% by mass of the cement,

nitrates, calcium chloride, sulphides and sulphates shall not be used.
e. Admixtures submitted for Engineer’s approval shall be certified in writing by the

manufacturer to be in compliance with B.S. 5075 OR ASTM C494.
f. Air-entraining admixtures for lightweight concrete shall comply with ASTM C260
or B.S. 5075: PART (2).
g. The type of admixture selected in accordance with the above mentioned

standards must be to the approval of Engineer. All admixtures must be mutually
compatible.
h. Admixture used in the work shall be obtained from reliable manufactures whose
products have previously been used successfully in Qatar or on other
international projects in countries having similar climate to Qatar.
i. Admixtures shall be used in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed

instructions and recommendations and shall be certified by the manufacturer to
be suitable for use during hot weather extremes. Admixtures shall be stored
safe from adverse temperatures in accordance with manufacturer’s printed
instructions or recommendations.
j. The suitability and effectiveness of any admixture approved by the Engineer,

shall be verified by trial mixes with the cements, aggregates and other materials
to be used in the works before final approval is given.
k. Notwithstanding what has been stated above, the Contractor must allow in his
Tender for testing the type of admixture he proposes to use.
l. Admixtures where approved may be added only by using the manufacturer’s

recommended dispensers - no adding of admixture by hand is allowed.
m. The entire amount of materials used for concrete shall have controlled sources
of individual components such that the total mix meets the requirements of the
Contract Documents. Unless specified otherwise, the total Chloride (Cl) ion
content in the entire mix shall not exceed 0.20 percent of the weight of cement

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 17
when SRPC is used and 0.1 percent when OPC is used. The total water-soluble
Sulfate (SO3) content in the entire mix shall not exceed 4 percent SO3 of the
weight of cement in the mix. The total Calcium Chloride (Ca Cl2) content in the
total mix shall not exceed 0.01 percent of the weight of cement.
n. The total alkali content of the concrete mix of Na2O equivalent shall not exceed 3
Kg/m3. All sources of alkali shall be taken into account for calculating the total
alkali content. In particular the contribution of Sodium Chloride whether from
aggregate or from mixing water must included.
F. Reinforcement
1. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed bars complying with B.S. 4449 type 2
deformation having a characteristic strength (fy) not less than 4600 kg/cm2 (460
N/mm2) or complying with ASTM A615 Grade 60 steel for bar diameters 16mm
and larger. Secondary reinforcements, dowels projecting from typical floor beams
to be rebent into concrete topping and all bars that are 12mm in diameter and
smaller shall be Grade 40 (ASTM) Grade 250 (BS) hot rolled mild steel having a
characteristic strength (fy) not less than 2500 Kg/cm2.
2. Where indicated on drawings reinforcing steel bars shall be having a characteristic

strength (Fy) not less than 4600 kg/cm2 (460 N/mm2).
3. Mesh reinforcement and wrapping fabric shall conform to B.S. 4483 OR to ASTM
A185.
4. Epoxy coated reinforcing steel bars shall confirm to ASTM A775-81.
5. Reinforcement shall be cut and/or bent in accordance with B.S. 4466.
6. Bends in reinforcement shall have a substantially constant curvature. Where the

temperature of the steel is below 5oC, special precautions may necessary such as
reducing the speed of bending or, with the Engineer’s approval, increasing the
radius of bending.
7. Where it is necessary to bend reinforcement projecting from concrete, care should

be taken to ensure that the radius of bend is not less than that specified in B.S.
4466.
8. Where it is necessary to reshape mild steel bars previously bent, this should only
be done with the Engineer’s approval and each bar should be inspected for signs
of fracture.
9. No welding of reinforcement should be carried out without the Engineer’s

approval.
10. Bundle and tag reinforcement with suitable identification to facilitate sorting,
transporting, storing and placing at the Site.
11. All reinforcement bars shall be cut and bent to shape as per the approved bar
bending schedule. All bars shall be tagged showing the corresponding bar
number as shown on the relevant Bar Bending Schedule.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 18
G. Bar Supports
1. Spacer blocks with cast in tie wire may be used with written agreement of the
Engineer for support of the bottom layer of reinforcing in the foundation slab only.
The blocks shall be of minimum size and made from cement sand small aggregate
mix to match surrounding concrete strength, appearance and durability.
2. Other support devices and spacers shall be of such materials and of adequate
strength and approved design as to be durable and so as to prevent displacement
and corrosion of reinforcing steel and prevent discoloration and spalling of concrete
cover. The type of spacers acceptable shall be one of the following :
a. High density plastic.

b. Hot-dipped galvanized bar supports with plastic feet.
c. Stainless steel.
3. Individual and continuous slab bolsters and chairs shall be of a type to suit the
various conditions encountered and must be capable of supporting a 140 kg
(1.37KN) concentrated load without measurable permanent deformation of the
reinforcement or indentation of the supporting surface.
H. Testing of Reinforcement Steel
1. Tests will be required by the Engineer on steel reinforcement and they shall be
carried out in strict accordance with the provisions of the above British Standards.
2. Tensile tests providing information on elastic limit, ultimate strength, and stress-
strain curve will be required from each delivery of reinforcement and measurement
will also be required of cross-sectional area and deformation/bond characteristics of
deformed bars.
3. The Contractor is to allow for four tensile and four bond tests, at his own cost, for
each size of bar to be used in the concrete construction.
4. One set of test results for each bar size shall be submitted to the Engineer three (3)
weeks before concrete work commences on Site. Remaining tests will be carried
out at the discretion of the Engineer.
5. Further tests may be called for when the source of supply of reinforcement changes
in which case the cost of such extra testing will be borne by the Contractor. When
any test results do not conform to the above standard the reinforcement steel shall
be removed from the Site and the cost of subsequent testing and any remedial
work shall be borne by the Contractor.
I. Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars
1. All reinforcement shall be bent cold unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
2. All requirements for coated bars shall be met at the manufacturer’s plant prior to
shipment. Submit proper manufacturer’s certificates.
3. Steel reinforcing bars to be coated shall meet with the requirements of one of the
following specifications: ASTM A615, including supplementary requirement S1, and

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 19
A775-81 as approved by the Engineer and shall be free of contaminants such as

oil, grease, or paint.
4. The surface of the Steel reinforcing bars to be coated shall be cleaned by abrasive
blast cleaning to near white metal in accordance with Structural Steel Painting
Council (SSPC-SP10).
5. The coating shall be applied to the cleaned surface as soon as possible after
cleaning and before oxidation of the surface discernible to the unaided eye occurs.
However, in no case shall application of the coating be delayed more than 8 Hrs
after cleaning.
6. The coating shall be applied by the electrostatic spray method and fully cured in
accordance with the printed instructions and recommendation of the manufacturer
of the coating material.
7. The film thickness of the coating after curing shall be 5 to 12 mils (0.13 to 0.30
mm).
8. The thickness of the coating films shall be measured in accordance with Method
G12, (ASTM 775) or other thickness measuring method acceptable to the Engineer.
9. The thickness of the coating films shall be measured on the body of the reinforcing
bar between the deformations or ribs, or both, on a straight length bar.
10. After curing the coating shall be free of holes, voids, cracks, and damaged areas
discernible to the unaided eye.
11. There shall not be more than an average of two holidays (pin holes not discernible
to the unaided eye) per linear foot (30mm) of the coated bar; for example, the
maximum number of holidays permitted in a 40ft (12m) long coated bar would be
80. Holidays at the location of manufacturer’s bar markings shall not be counted.
12. The adhesion of the coating shall be evaluated by bending production coated bars
120o (after rebound) around a mandrel, the bend test for adhesion of coating shall
be made at a uniform rate and shall take up to 90 seconds to complete.
13. The Contractor shall make arrangements and shall ensure that the Engineer has
access at all reasonable times to the manufacturer’s premises where the coating
work is being performed.
The manufacturer shall afford the Engineer all reasonable facilities to satisfy himself
that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. All tests
and inspections shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment,
unless otherwise specified, and shall be so scheduled as not to interfere with the
progress of the works. The Contractor shall bear all costs (including traveling and
substance expenses) of inspection trips made by the Engineer to place outside the
Doha, Qatar as may reasonably be necessary in order to ascertain compliance of
the material with the specification.
14. Coating damage due to fabrication, handling and placing need not be repaired in
cases where the damaged area does not exceed 65 mm2. All damaged areas

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 20
larger than 65 mm2 shall be repaired with patching material in accordance with
ASTM A775 or BS. 7295.
15. The maximum amount of damage shall not exceed 2% of the surface area of each
bar. Patching shall be done in accordance with the patching material
manufacturer’s recommendations.
16. Coated bars represented by test samples that do not meet the requirements of this
specification shall be rejected. At the manufacturer’s option, such bars shall be
replaced or, alternatively, may be stripped of coating, recleaned, recoated, and
resubmitted for acceptance testing in accordance with the requirements of this
specification.
K. Field Installation of Epoxy Coated Reinforced Steel Bars
1. Epoxy coated reinforcing bars supported from Formwork shall rest on coated wire
bar supports, or on bar supports made or dielectric material or other acceptable
materials. Reinforcing bars used as support bars shall be epoxy coated.
2. Epoxy coated reinforcing bars shall be fastened with nylon epoxy or plastic coated
tie wire or other acceptable material. Reinforcing bars shall not be cut in the field
unless expressly permitted by the Engineer.
3. When epoxy coated reinforcing bars are cut in the field the ends of bars shall be
coated with the same material used for repair of coating damage.
4. Equipment for handling epoxy coated bars shall have protected contact areas.
Bundles of coated bars shall be lifted at multiple pick-up points to minimize bar-to-
bar abrasion from sags in the bundles. Coated bars or bundles of coated bars shall
not be dropped or dragged. Coated bars shall be stored on protective cribbing.
Fading of the color of the coating shall not be cause for rejection of epoxy coated
reinforcing bars.
5. A sample of the coating material shall be supplied to the Engineer from each batch.
The sample shall be packaged in an airtight container and identified by Batch
Numbers.
L. Vapour Barrier: Polyethylene sheeting minimum 0.15 mm thick of approved

manufacture tested in accordance with ASTM E96 and E154.
M. Curing Materials
1. Liquid Membrane Compound : AASHTO M148 OR ASTM C309, Type1-D with

fugitive dye and Type2; formulated to disintegrate after 28 days, and guaranteed
not to affect the bond of applied finishes.
2. Polyethylene Film: ASTM C171, 0.10mm thick, opaque black.
3. Reinforced Waterproof Building Pape : ASTM C171, opaque.
4. Burlap: AASHTO M182.
5. Water: B.S. 5328 and B.S. 3148.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 21
6. Method for determining the efficiency of curing compounds shall be in accordance

with ASTM C156.
7. Notwithstanding what has been stated above, the Contractor must allow in his
Tender for testing the type of curing compound he proposes to use.
N. Moist Cure, Hardener and Sealer
1. Hardeners
Materials shall be submitted for the Engineer’s selection and approval.
2. Sealers
Materials are subject to the Engineer’s approval.
O. Waterstops: Extruded shapes formed of virgin polyvinylchloride, tensile strength 134

kg/cm2, minimum elongation 200%. The type and size of the waterstop shall be
suitable to its particular application as recommended by the manufacturer and be
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
P. Formwork
1. For unexposed surfaces and rough work, use Exterior Type Douglas Fir, Grade B-B
(concrete form) plywood, conforming to NBS PS-1, minimum 19 mm thick. Before
reusing forms, withdraw nails and thoroughly clean surfaces to be in contact with
concrete.
2. For exposed surfaces not otherwise specified use special exterior Type Douglas
Fir, Grade A-B plywood, conforming to NBS PS-1, minimum 19 mm thick OR high
density (60-60) overlay plyform, Class 1 EXT-DFPA, sanded grade trade marked by
the American Plywood Association having a hard semi-opaque resin-fibre overlay
on both sides, minimum 19 mm thick and constructed so that finished concrete will
be straight, smooth, dense, free from honeycombs, bulges, or depressions. Keep
joints between plywood sections to a minimum and make tight and strongly backed
so that adjoining edges remain flush and true. Unsightly joint marks will not
permitted. Cover joints on exposed surfaces with smooth-faced fibre reinforced
tape.
3. Location of joints must be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
4. Prefabricated Formwork systems may be used for all classes of concrete provided
the manufacturer’s printed instructions and recommendations are followed and the
system has been approved by the Engineer. Joints between sections of
prefabricated forms shall be taped unless otherwise recommended by the
manufacturer and provided always, in the case of such recommendation, the forms
are water and mortar-tight to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
S. Form Coating : B.P. CCM3 (British Petroleum) OR B.P. CM3 (R) (British Petroleum)
OR Calform (Caltex) OR Form wax of a type which does not import any stain to
concrete not interfere with the adhesion of any finish, sealant, waterproofing material
applied to any concrete surface and must be approved by the Engineer.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 22
T. Form Ties : For securing forms where surfaces will be exposed in the finished work,
use tie screws with removable plastic cones, removable bolts, special removable ties,
tie wires or Series 300 stainless steel snap ties. For all other forms, either bolts or
wires may be used. Use ties of such type that when forms are removed, no metal is
closer than 40 mm from the finished concrete surface.
U. Grout
1. Non-Metallic: To be subject to Engineer’s approval.
V. Pigmented Concrete: Pigments for integrally colored concrete submitted for the
Engineer’s approval shall be certified in writing by the Manufacturer to be in compliance
with ASTM C 979.
2.2 MIXES
A. Proportioning of Concrete
1. Comply with ACI Standard 211.1, or BS 8110-85, Section 6, Para. 6.2.4. Assume full
responsibility for the strength, consistency, water/cement ratio, and handling of
concrete. Cement, fine aggregate and the various sizes of coarse aggregate shall be
measured by weight.
2. Water/Cement Ratio: A maximum water/cement ratio of 0.40 shall be allowed for all
reinforced concrete.
The water / cement ratio shall be continuously checked at the mixer with due allowance
being made for water (if any) contained in the aggregates. Under no circumstances is
additional water to be added between the mixer and the place of concrete placement.
Additionally the water / cement ratio shall be checked by tests carried out on fresh
concrete at the time of placement and by slump test, all as described in Section.
3. Cement Content:
a. Reinforced Concrete
A minimum cement content of 380 Kg/m3 is required for all reinforced concrete
works with a minimum 28 days compressive strength of 40 N/mm2.
b. Other Concrete
One other mix to be used for blinding concrete and for this cement content
sufficient for a minimum compressive strength of 17.5 N/mm2 shall be used. The
cement shall be sulphate resisting and the minimum cement content to be used
shall be 275 Kg/m3.
4. Requirements for Fresh Concrete: Workability of concrete shall be such that the
concrete is suitable for the conditions of handling and placing so that after compaction it
surrounds all reinforcement and completely fills the formwork. Workability shall be
assessed by means of the slump test or compacting factor test. An acceptable value for

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 23
the mean slump for each concrete mix shall be agreed with the Engineer and a value of
65 mm can be taken as a guide. Following are the limits of workability of concrete for
these tests :
Slump + 25 mm or CF + .03 where required value is 0.9 or more.
+ .04 where the required value is less than 0.9 but

more than 0.8.
+ .05 where required value is 0.8 or less.
The amount of water shall be measured by volume or by weight. The batch weights of
aggregates shall be adjusted to allow for a moisture content typical of the aggregates
being used. The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be within + 3% of the
quantity of cement, water or total aggregates being measured and within + 5% of the
quantity of any admixture being used. All measuring equipment shall be maintained in a
clean, serviceable condition. The mixer shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 1305
or B.S. 4251 where applicable. The mixing time shall be not less than that used by the
manufacturer in assessing the mixer performance.
5. Mix Design
5.1. General
The mix shall be a special prescribed mix in accordance with BS 5328 and as
specified in this document except that the relative proportions of the fine and
coarse aggregates and the workability of the concrete shall be determined by
the tests carried out on site before normal production of concrete commences.
Blinding concrete shall be a designed mix with a minimum compressive strength

of 17.5 N/mm2.
5.2 Trial Tests
a) Grade C40 and C50 Concrete
The trial mix proportions must be in accordance with this specification for
cement content and water cement ratio. As this is a prescribed mix, as
defined in BS 5328, the actual strength of the concrete will be above the
design strength. The trial mixes will be concerned with aggregate
proportions and workability, in order to produce a concrete which can be
properly placed and compacted to obtain a dense impermeable concrete
which can adequately resist the ingress of damaging salts.
Superplasticisers and other admixtures are to be submitted to Engineer for
approval and if required shall be used in the trial mixes. For example, the
required workability for large foundations will differ from that for tall thin
sections of structural concrete cast above ground and the trial tests should
allow for both cases. When a suitable mix has been established to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, then six separate trial mixes shall be prepared
and six 150 mm3 tests cubes shall be made from each trial mix.
The 36 cubes shall be tested at 28 days and the mean strength and
standard deviation established. Additionally 4 initial surface absorption

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 24
tests (ISAT) on 12 non-oven dried (air dried), samples shall be made in

accordance which BS 1881 Part 5.
The trial mix shall be accepted if:
- The mix proportions and slump are as defined in this specification.
- The standard deviation is less than 3.5 N/mm2.
- The strength of any cube is not more than 7 N/mm2 below or above
the mean strength.
- The strength of any cube is not below 40.0 N/mm2.
- If the absorption rates are less than the following.
Time After Starting Test ISAT Results mL/m2/s
10 min 0.25
30 min 0.17
1 hr 0.10
It will not be necessary for the test to run for 2 hours.
b) Grade C15 Concrete (SRPC)
The trial mix proportions will be left to the discretion of the Construction
Contractor. Three separate trial mixes shall be prepared and three
preliminary tests cubes shall be made from each mix for testing at 28 days.
The trial mix proportions and water/cement ratio shall be approved if the
average strength of the nine cubes is not less than 25 N/mm2 and the
least strength is not below 15 N/mm2. Once the trial mix proportions and
water/cement ratio have been accepted for the grade C15 concrete, then
they shall not be changed without the agreement of the Engineer. No
works cube tests will be made for the grade C15 concrete, but the
Engineer will monitor the mix proportions and water/cement ratio.
5.3 Admixtures
No air entraining agent is to be used.
If necessary and only with the Engineer agreement, a naphthalene sulphonate

superplasticiser may be used to increase workability of the Concrete. It shall
comply with BS 5075, Part 3, Specification for Superplasticising admixtures, or
ASTM-C-494-80, Type G.
Acceptable brands are:
- Supaflow R from Don Construction Chemicals, or equal approved.
No admixtures will be permitted to be used in the concrete without the express

permission of the Engineer and in no circumstances will admixtures containing

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 25
chlorides or other corrosive agents be allowed. Their compatibility with the type
of cement used must be proved.
Construction Contractor shall submit technical details of proposed admixture for

the Engineer’s review and shall perform a trial batch and casting to substantiate
the manufacturers claims for workability, retardation and air entrapment (0.0 to
1.0 percent maximum).
An effective quality control system is to be maintained to ensure that the correct

quantity of admixture is used at all times. The equipment to be used for
dispensing and the method of incorporating the admixture in the concrete shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
The dispensing unit shall be translucent so that the operator can see the
discharge of the admixture.
The use of more than one admixture is not permitted.
5.4 Setting Time
The concrete mix, including any admixture used, shall be designed to have an
initial setting time of not less than 3 hours nor more than 12 hours. Initial set
shall be deemed to have occurred when the concrete has started to stiffen and
lost its workability to the extent that it cannot compacted around the
reinforcement.
6. Water Retaining Construction:
All water retaining construction shall comply with BS 8007.
Where the concrete is required to be watertight, the Construction Contractor shall take
full responsibility for ensuring that such construction is completely watertight and free
from penetration of dampness. Any leaks or signs of dampness appearing during the
construction and maintenance period of the contract shall be made completely dry by
the Construction Contractor at his own expense, and shall remain dry after remedial
work without further attention for a period equal to the contract maintenance period. The
method proposed by the Construction Contractor for dealing with shrinkage cracks,
leaks, dampness or other defective work shall have no adverse affect on the finished
structure.
Any bolts or fastenings for formwork involving fixings embedded in or passing through
the concrete shall be such as not to impair the water tightness of the structure and shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The use of bolts necessitating through holes
is strictly prohibited.
In addition to any design joints detailed on drawings, P.V.C. waterstops shall be used in
all vertical day by day construction joints in walls except where approved by The
Engineer.
B. Classes of concrete

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 26
Minimum
Characteristic
Type and Use
Cube Strength
(28 days)
N /mm2
25 Blinding Concrete
60 Columns, Shear walls
45 Beams, Foundation, Slabs
Where a sudden change in weather conditions occurs or is imminent during continuous

casting operations such as will, in the Engineer’s opinion, affect the quality of the concrete,
the specified characteristic cube strength for cast-in-place reinforced concrete shall be
increased by 50 Kg/cm2.
3.1 FORMWORK
A. General
1. The responsibility for the safety and adequacy of the whole of the formwork shall rest
entirely with the Contractor. Coordinate the work of all other trades affecting or affected
by work of this Section.
2. Except when they are varied by the requirements of these Specifications, the
requirements of the British Standard Specification and/or Codes of Practice shall form a
binding part of these Specifications.
3. Give 24 hours minimum notice to the Engineer as to when formwork will be ready for
inspection and allow sufficient time for inspection and adjustment.
4. Any work showing signs of damage through premature loading shall be demolished and
reconstructed at the Contractor’s expense.
B. Workmanship
1. Reference shall be made to BS 5975 and appendix “C” of the Concrete Society
Technical Report No.13, ‘Formwork and the CIRIA Data Sheet’ “Concrete Pressure
on Formwork”.
2. Except for few areas having suspended false ceiling within the project, most of the
structure is either exposed or receiving applied finish. Therefore, tolerances
specified under this part are more stringent then those specified in 5606 or ACI 301.
3. Provide cambers as specified on drawings.
4. All formwork shall be constructed plumb, true, water and mortar tight, sufficiently
rigid and strong to prevent sagging between supports and to maintain true position
and shape during and after placing of concrete without bowing and distortion.
5. Exceptional care shall be taken to minimize fins, ridges, offsets, leaking of fins and
other defects.
6. Only workmen experienced in formwork shall be used for this work.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 27
7. Supports shall be designed to withstand the worst combination of self-weight and

other loads including formwork, reinforcement, wet concrete, construction and wind
loads together with all incidental dynamic effects caused by placing vibrating and
compacting of concrete.
8. Forms for beams and girders shall be designed to permit removal of at least one side
without shock to the partially set concrete and without disturbing the bottom portion
of the forms or its supports.
9. Prefabricated formwork shall be used in strict accordance with manufacturer’s

printed instructions and approved shop drawings.
10. Provide 15 x 15 mm wrought hardwood fillet or other suitable material in the angles
of the formwork as shown on Drawings or as required by the Engineer to provide
chamfers in columns and beams and walls.
11. Anchor bolts, plates, sleeves, pipes, inserts, fixtures, electrical boxes, reinforcing
steel, duct openings, conduits, etc., shall be installed as per Drawings. Ample time
shall be allowed for the proper installation of such items. All steel items (other than
reinforcement) embedded in concrete shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
12. Form Cleaning: All forms shall be thoroughly cleaned before placement of concrete
and suitable temporary openings provided to permit removal of undesirable materials
from the interior without disturbing the whole formwork. All surfaces in contact with
concrete shall be wetted or treated with an approved form releasing agent before
placing of reinforcement. All formwork shall be thoroughly cleaned of any old
concrete or any other deposit before re-use.
13. Ensure that during concreting, formwork and supports are inspected by experienced
workmen and that any portion which shows signs of sagging or displacement is
straightened.
14. All formwork shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer. This approval,
however, does not relieve the Contractor of any of his liabilities and responsibilities
under the Contract.
15. Notwithstanding what has been stated above, the Contractor must allow in his
Tender for testing the type of form releasing agent he proposed to use.
3.2 REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with B.S. 4449; B.S. 4461; B.S. 4482; B.S. 4483 OR ACI 301,
Chapter 5, Paragraph 5.1, and ASTM A775-81.
B. Fixing
1. Comply with BS 8110, Section 7, Para. 7.3 OR ACI Standard 301, chapter 5, Para.
5.5. Reinforcement shall be secured against displacement outside the specified
limits unless specified otherwise:
a. The actual concrete cover shall be not less than the required nominal cover
minus 5 mm.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 28
b. where reinforcement is located in relation to only one face of a member (e.g. a

straight bar in a slab) the actual concrete cover shall not be more than the
required nominal cover plus :
(i) 5mm on bars up to and including 12mm size.
(ii) 10mm on bars over 12mm up to and including 25 mm size.
(iii) 15mm on bars over 25mm size.
2. Spacer chairs or other supports detailed on Drawings, together with such other
supports as may be necessary shall be used to maintain the reinforcement in its correct
position. In a member where the nominal cover is dimensioned to the links, spacers
between the links and formwork shall be of the same dimension as the nominal cover.
3. Non-structural connections for the positioning of reinforcement shall be made with steel
wire, tying devices or by welding. Care should be taken to ensure that the projection
ends of ties or clips do not encroach into the concrete cover.
4. The position of reinforcement shall be checked before and during concreting, particular
attention being paid to the position of top reinforcement in cantilever sections. Where
there is delay in depositing concrete after the placement of the reinforcement the
Engineer may require the Contractor to restore the reinforcement to a satisfactory
condition and may require protection of same from further corrosion.
5. Surface Condition of Reinforcement : Reinforcement shall not be surrounded by

concrete unless it is free from mud, oil, paint, retarders, loose rust, loose mill scale,
grease or any other substance which may adversely affect the steel or concrete
chemically or reduce the bond. Badly rusted or pitted reinforcement will be rejected.
Mechanical brushes shall be used in cleaning steel bars.
6. All reinforcement will be properly stored under cover to avoid contact with the ground,
moisture, dust and salts and to avoid distortion once bent to shape. Improper storage
will be sufficient cause for rejection of reinforcement.
7. Laps and Joints of Reinforcement : Laps and joints shall only be made by methods
specified and at the positions shown on the Drawings or as agreed by the Engineer.
8. The splice lengths of all reinforcing bars which have to be spliced shall, unless
otherwise shown on the drawings, be in conformity with the following :
a. Plain round bars (50 db) 500mm minimum.
b. Deformed bars (60 db) 600mm minimum.
c. Epoxy coated bars (65 db) 500mm minimum.
d. Fabric (175mm minimum, but overlap measured

between outermost wires of each sheet not less than
pitch of secondary reinforcement wires).
e. Spliced bars are to be securely tied together.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 29
9. Splices to be staggered to the approval of the Engineer and the fabric is to be securely
tied layer to layer.
10. All reinforcement shall be placed accurately in position and securely fastened in place
to prevent displacement during the placing of the concrete. Particular care shall be
taken to ensure that the protective cover to reinforcement specified on the drawings is
obtained by the use of approved plastic tipped steel chairs for lower reinforcement and
cranked bars for upper reinforcement. All bars shall be securely tied together at every
alternate intersection, or as approved by the Engineer.
11. Ends of bars which are left projecting for any period exceeding 4 weeks shall be
painted with heavy coat of neat cement grout which shall be removed prior to
continuation of concreting.
12. Concrete cover to reinforcement shall be as shown on the drawings and the allowable
tolerances shall be in accordance with BS 8110: PART 1: 1985.
13. Tie wire shall be annealed iron wire not less than No. 16 Gauge or approved fasteners,
unless shown otherwise on the drawings.
14. Reinforcement that has in any way been previously used shall not be reused in the
work.
15. Welding of Reinforcement: Welding on site shall be avoided if possible, but where
suitable safeguards and techniques are employed and provided that the types of steel
(including high yield steel to B.S. 4449 and B.S. 4461) have the required welding
proportions, it may undertaken. Generally, however, all welding shall be carried out
under controlled conditions in a factory or workshop. The competence of the operators
shall be demonstrated prior to and periodically during the welding operations.
16. Cutting and Bending Reinforcement: Reinforcement shall be cut and/or bent in
accordance with B.S 4466. Bends in reinforcement shall have a substantially constant
curvature. Where the temperature of the steel is below 5oC, special precautions may
be necessary such as reducing the speed of bending or, with the Engineer’s approval,
increasing the radius of bending. Where it is necessary to bend reinforcement
projecting from concrete, care should be taken to endure that the radius of bend is not
less than that specified in B.S. 4466. The Engineer’s written approval shall be obtained
before cutting or heating any reinforcement detailed on the drawings. All reinforcement
bars, coated and uncoated, shall be bent cold unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer. Where it is necessary to reshape steel previously bent, this shall only be
done with the Engineer’s approval and each bar shall be inspected for signs of fracture.
17. Reinforcement, particularly grade 460 should not be subject to mechanical damage or
shock loading prior to embedment. It is permissible to bend grade 275 reinforcement
projecting from concrete provided that care is taken to ensure that the radius of bend is
not less that specified in BS. 4466. Grade 460 bars should not be rebent or
straightened without the Engineer’s approval.
3.3 MIXING CONCRETE
A. Ready Mixed Concrete
1. Comply with ASTM C94.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 30
2. Add mixing water only at the Site.
3. Discharge the concrete completely at the Site within ninety minutes after the
introduction of the water to the aggregates. In hot weather reduce this time limit so
that no stiffening of the concrete shall occur until after it has been placed.
4. Begin the mixing operation within thirty minutes after the cement has been
intermingled with the aggregates.
B. Batch Mixing at Site (if permitted by Governmental authority having jurisdiction)
1. Comply with BS 8110:85, Section 6, OR ACI 301, Chapter 7, Paragraphs 7.2 and 7.5.
2. Excessive mixing requiring the addition of water to preserve the required consistency
will not be permitted. Mix concrete to a consistency, which can be readily placed
without segregation.
3. Where admixtures are specified, equip mixers with a device for measuring and
dispensing the admixture.
C. Hand Mixed Concrete and all site mixed concrete are not permitted.
3.4 JOINTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Construction and Control Joints
1. Comply with BS 8110, Section 6, Paragraph 6.12, OR ACI 301, Chapter 6,

Paragraph 6.1 and B.S. 5337.
2. Construction joints other than when formed at movement joints shall be kept to a
minimum possible consistent with convenience of construction and design
consideration. Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to locations of
construction joints.
3. Where it is necessary to introduce construction joints, careful consideration shall be

given to their exact location. The location of construction joints shall be subject to
agreement between the Engineer and the Contractor before any work commences.
Construction joints shall be at right angles to the general direction of the member
and shall take due account of shear and other stresses.
4. Concrete shall not be allowed to run to a feather edge and vertical joints shall be
formed against a stop board. The top surface of a layer of concrete shall be level
and reasonably flat unless design considerations make this undesirable. Joint lines
shall be so arranged that they coincide with features of the finished work.
5. Kickers (i.e. a starter stub) shall be at least 70 mm high and carefully constructed
and shall be cast along with the main concrete.
6. Immediately prior to recommencement of concreting on a joint, the surface of the

concrete against which new concrete will be cast shall be free from laitance and
shall be roughened to the extent that the largest aggregate is exposed but not

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 31
disturbed. Care shall be taken that the joint surface is cleaned immediately before
the fresh concrete is placed against it.
7. Saturate the cleaned surface with water and slush with a coating of 1:1 ½ cement-
sand grout. Place new concrete before grout has attained its initial set. Clean
horizontal construction joints and pour the cement-sand mortar over joints in walls to
a depth of 25 mm before depositing concrete. In walls, do not space construction
joints more than 15 metres apart, unless otherwise shown.
8. In addition to the joint preparation mentioned above, construction joints in vierendeel

girders should be treated with approved bonding agent.
9. Particular care shall be taken in the placing of the new concrete close to the joint.
This concrete shall be particularly well compacted and vibrated.
10. Control joints for control of thermal cracking should be formed using crack inducers
or waterstoppers having built-in inducers. Control joints shall be introduced in
slabs-on-grades, tanking walls and retaining walls at spacings indicated on
structural drawings. Control joints in concrete topping to PC beams at typical floors
and at other locations in slabs and cast-in-place beams shall be formed in
accordance with the details shown on structural drawings.
B. Waterstops: Comply with B.S. 5337, Appendix D, Paragraph D4, OR ACI 301, Chapter
6, Paragraph 6.3. Clamp waterstops at top to prevent displacement.
C. Embedded Items
1. Comply with ACI 301, Chapter 6, Paragraph 6.4 and 6.5.
2. Accurately set anchorage devices by line and transit, and coordinate the locating of
all anchorage devices to be set for the accommodation of the work of other traders.
3. Locate anchor bolts and/or threaded type inserts and bars as shown on the
Drawings and on shop drawings. Obtain necessary templates from the mechanical
trades as required for the proper setting of anchor bolts and other items for
mechanical equipment, as required.
4. Assist other trades in the installation of piping, pipe sleeves, conduit and similar
items where such items are to install in concrete. Provide frames to securely hold
anchor bolts and anchorage devices in place during construction, and take care
that no displacement occurs during the pouring of concrete. Under this Section
furnish and set items not furnished by other trades using approved standard type
items suitable for their intended purpose.
3.5 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Comply with ACI Standard 301, Chapter 8, Para. 8.1 for preparation before placing and
with BS 8110:85, Section 6, Para 6.5 and 6.8. Notify the Engineer 24 hours before
each pour so that the forms and reinforcement may be examined. Do not place concrete
until inspection has been or waived.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 32
B. Concrete shall not be mixed or placed at shade air temperature below 2oC on a rising
thermometer, or at a shade air temperature below 3oC on a falling thermometer. When
the shade air temperature is 32oC and rising, special precautions shall be taken during
concrete operations, such as shading of the aggregates, formwork and plant, cooling of
the mixing water or other methods approved by the Engineer so that the temperature of
the concrete when placed shall not exceed 30oC. The temperature of the concrete can
be reduced by cooling the water and the aggregate. Aggregates shall be shaded from
direct sunlight, mixing water cooled by refrigeration or the addition of ice. Ice added to
the mix shall be crushed, shaved or chipped and thoroughly mixed to ensure rapid and
complete melting.
C. Fresh concrete place at these temperatures shall be shaded from the direct rays of the
sun to the satisfaction of the Engineer for a period of 24 hours. Concrete is not to be
mixed and placed when the shade air temperature is 38oC or above.
D. Before concrete is placed, clean mixing and conveying equipment from hardened
concrete and foreign matter. Check forms for construction and detail. Secure
reinforcement sleeves and inserts in correct position. Forms shall be free of water and
all debris. Sprinkle with water any semi-porous sub-grade to eliminate suction. Water
shall be removed from excavation before depositing concrete, such water shall not be
allowed to wash over newly formed concrete.
E. Comply with ACI Standard 301, Chapter 8, Para 8.2 for conveying concrete. Concrete
shall be transported from the mixer to the formwork as rapidly as practicable by methods
which will prevent the segregation or loss of any of the ingredients and maintain the
required workability. Concrete shall normally be placed and compacted without addition
of water. Care shall be taken to avoid displacement of reinforcement or movement of
formwork and damage to faces of formwork.
F. Care shall be exercised to prevent segregation of concrete and to prevent splashing the
forms while placing concrete. Concrete shall be placed through canvas elephant
trunking only equipped with suitable hopper heads. Chutes or trunking shall be of
variable lengths so that the free fall of the concrete from the end shall not exceed one
metre and a sufficient number shall be used to ensure that the concrete surface is
approximately level at all times. Where alternative provisions can be made, which are
acceptable to the Engineer, then low slump concrete can be dropped vertically through
greater heights than one metre.
G. Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by vibration, pressure, shock or other means

during the operation of placing and thoroughly worked around the reinforcement, around
embedded fixtures and into corners of the formwork to form a solid mass free from voids
and which will have required surface finish when formwork is removed. Vibration shall
be applied continuously during the placing of each batch of concrete until the expulsion
of air has practically ceased and there is no secretion of ingredients. Care shall be
taken that the vibrator is not used any closer than 75 mm from the formed surface.
Where permanent pre-cast concrete formwork is used in the structure, its energy
absorption should be taken into account when deciding on the method of vibration to be
used and the Engineer’s prior approval shall be obtained in respect thereof.
H. Concrete which has achieved its initial set and cannot be properly compacted shall not
be placed in the forms.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 33
I. Concrete topping: Before application the surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted and
brushed over with a coat of neat cement grout. The topping shall be placed before the
grout has started to set.
J. Slope surfaces to drains where indicated. Slope shall be as indicated on Drawings.
3.6 CURING
A. General
1. Comply with BS 8110, Section 6, Para. 6.6 and 6.8 and ACI Standard 301, Chapter
12.
2. The methods of curing and their duration shall be such that the concrete will have
satisfactory durability and strength, and the member will suffer a minimum distortion,
be free of excessive efflorescence and will not cause by its shrinkage, undue
cracking in the structure. To achieve these objectives, it may be necessary to
insulate the concrete so that it is maintained at a suitable temperature or so that the
rates of evaporation of moisture from the surfaces are kept to appropriate values, or
both. Different curing or drying treatments will be appropriate to different members
and products. Where necessary special care should be taken to endure that similar
components are cured as far as possible under the same conditions.
3. Providing proper temperature and moisture conditions for curing of concrete is much
more critical and important in hot weather, than under normal temperatures. It is
therefore of first importance that curing be promptly commenced, ample in coverage
and continued without interruption.
B. Curing Methods
1. Ponding with water: Effective for flat surfaces. Curing water shall not be more than
11oC (52oF) cooler than the concrete to prevent cracking and shall be free of
substances that may stain or discolour concrete.
2. Wet Saturated Material: Wet saturated material shall be held in close contact with
concrete surfaces and maintained continuously in damp and moist condition so that
a film of water remains on the concrete surface throughout the curing period. Wet
saturated materials shall be kept wet at all times for a minimum of seven days after
stripping.
3. Intermittent Spraying with Water: Care must be taken that newly finished concrete
is not damaged by water erosion. If sprinkling is done at intervals, care must be
taken to prevent the concrete from drying between applications of water.
4. When curing concrete with water other than ponding, do not allow the surface to dry.
Continuous cooling and drying of curing concrete is not allowed.
5. Top of columns and walls shall be cured after initial setting. As soon as formwork is
loosened water curing shall be applied to sides of columns and walls, and shall
continue uninterrupted for a minimum of seven days.
6. Slabs and flat surfaces shall be cured only by flooding. Flat concrete surface shall
be covered immediately after concrete is placed, tamped and leveled, with

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 34
polyethelene sheet and flooded with water as soon as initial hardening of concrete
occurs. Covering surface shall follow progress of concrete placement until the whole
surface is covered and flooded. Polyethelene sheet may be removed after 24 hours
and regular flooding maintained for a minimum of 7 days.
7. Use special thermometers of sufficient length of stem to monitor the concrete

temperature of the raft foundation slab as soon as concrete is poured to the required
level. Monitor temperature of concrete for 7 days and provide the Engineer with
daily records.
8. Curing Compounds
a. In situations where there is lack of adequate supplies of clean water, curing

membrane solution carefully applied at the right coverage rate (two coats, one at
right angles to the other), immediately after placing concrete, will ensure a
practicable curing.
b. Concrete surface shall normally be damp when the coating is applied. Curing
compounds shall not be used if bond is necessary such as in base slab of two
course floor, since it prevents the topping from bonding.
c. Conventional curing compounds shall not be used if a special finish is to be

applied. In such cases, special resin solutions that would not affect adhesion of
finishes may be used as approved by the Engineer.
C. Normal Curing Periods : Seven (7) days is the minimum curing period for all cast-in-
place concrete under normal weather conditions (temperatures around 24oC (75oF) and
normal wind speed). This period shall be extended to a minimum of ten (10) to
fourteen (14) days under hot weather or drying wind conditions.
3.7 STRIKING OF FORMWORK
A. Comply with BS. 8110:85, Section 6, Para.6.9.3 OR ACI 301, Chapter 4, Para. 4.5.
B. Do not remove forms or supports until the concrete has thoroughly hardened and has
attained sufficient strength to support its own weight and construction live loads to be
placed thereon, without damage to the structure. In general, do not disturb forms or
supports until the concrete has attained at least 40% of design strength for side forms
and 80% of design strength for bottom forms. Be responsible for proper form removal
and replace any work damaged due to inadequate maintenance or improper or
premature form removal.
C. The following shall be the minimum periods before striking formwork, unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer, at normal temperatures :
1. Vertical formwork to columns,

walls and large beams ... 24 Hours
2. Beam sides ... 24 Hours
3. Beam soffits formwork ... 15 days
4. Props to beams ... 21 days

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 35
5. Soffit formwork to slab ... 7 days
6. Props to slab ... 15 days
D. The removal time may be decreased with the Engineer’s approval where surface
temperature of concrete is 16oC and above; refer to Table 6.6, Section 6 of BS 8110,
Part 1: 1985.
E. Formwork for vertical sides of beams, columns and walls may be removed as soon as
the concrete has hardened, but not before 24 hours, by taking sufficient care to resist
damage from form removal operations. Suitable curing methods shall be implemented
immediately and followed rapidly where necessary, with protection from low or high
temperatures using suitable means of insulation.
F. Care shall be exercised in form removal to prevent chipping of corners and other
damage. Experienced foremen shall supervise form removal.
G. Removal of bottom form linings between props prior to the removal of supports may be
permitted, provided the formwork has been designed to allow such removal without
disturbing the supports.
H. No new permanent structure shall be erected on any part of the already erected
structure while the latter is still supported by formwork unless walls are built above
another wall carried on a properly supported base. This requirement does not prohibit
the use of props to take the load of more than one level of framing.
3.8 TOLERANCES
A. Comply with B.S. 5606 OR ACI Standard 117-81, Part 5, unless noted otherwise.
1. Plumb (allowable variation)
a. In the lines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls, and in arises :
In any 3 m 3mm
Maximum for the total height of the structure 15mm
b. For exposed corner columns, control-joint grooves and other conspicuous

lines:
In any 6m 3mm
Maximum for the total height of the structure 7.5mm
2. Exposed slab soffits, beam soffits and in arrises, measured before removal of
supporting shores:
In any 3m + 3mm
In any bay or in any 9.6m + 5mm
Maximum for the total height of structure + 10mm
3.9 CLEANING FINISHED EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 36
A. In the event that efflorescence, stains, oils, grease or any unsightly accumulation of
foreign materials are visible on the exposed exterior and/or interior surface of finished
concrete, the Engineer may require remedial action to be taken to remove these
blemishes. Such action may cover all exposed concrete or when irregular lapping can
be avoided, only such parts as are affected by the stains or other unsightly
appearances. No such remedial action is allowed unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
3.10 PATCHING
A. Comply with ACI 301, Chapter 9.
3.11 FINISHING
A. General Requirements for Flatwork: Strike off top surfaces of finished fill and
monolithic slabs true and level within a tolerance of 3 mm in 3 meters and measured
with a 3 metre straight edge placed in any direction at any location.
B. Monolithic Floor Finish: Level surface and remove excess laitance by tamping,
screeding, and preliminary wood floating. When the slab has hardened sufficiently so
that water and fine material will not be worked to the top, compact the surface with
motor-driven floats of the disc type and trowel smooth with two steel troweling
operations. Do the second troweling after the concrete has become so hard that no
mortar will adhere to the edge of the trowel, and exert heavy pressure to thoroughly
compact the surface. Leave floors with a smooth, hard finish free of blemishes and true
to a maximum tolerance of 3mm in 3 metres. Monolithically finish surfaces scheduled to
receive the following :
1. Hardener and Sealer.
C. Motor Float Finish: Level surface and remove excess laitance by tamping, screeding,
and preliminary wood floating. When the slab has hardened sufficiently so that water
and fine material will not be worked to the top, compact the surface with motor-driven
floats of the disc type. Leave floors/roofs with a smooth finish and true to a maximum
tolerance of 3mm in 3 metres. Motor float finish surfaces scheduled to receive the
following :
1. Membrane Waterproofing.
D. Rough Slab Finish: Tamp the concrete using special tools to force the aggregate away
from the surface, then screed with straight edges to produce a reasonably true and
uniform surface. Rough slab finish surfaces scheduled to receive the following :
1. Floor beds.
E. Wood Float Finish: Tamp the concrete using special tools to force aggregate away from
the surface, then screed with straight edges to bring surfaces to the required lines. While
the concrete is still green, wood float to a true and uniform plane to a 3 mm in 3m
tolerance with no coarse aggregate visible.
1. Driveway, Ramps and Parking.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03300
Page No. 37
F. Interior Exposed Concrete Surfaces of Slab, Beams, Columns and Walls: Unless
otherwise shown, leave a smooth finish, even-textured and free of blemished. Repair or
replace defective areas, as directed. As soon as the face forms are removed, remove all
fins and other projections carefully, level offsets and grind where necessary. Repairing,
replacing and pointing and filling voids shall be done to the Engineer’s satisfaction. Patch
as specified under paragraph “Patching”. Interior exposed concrete surfaces at tower
block are scheduled to receive paint as per architectural drawings.
3.12 LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE
A. Place lightweight concrete in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, using

equipment and procedures to avoid segregation of mix and loss of air content. Maintain
thickness and slopes as shown on Drawings. Leave top surfaces in acceptable condition
to receive subsequent application.
B. Cure lightweight concrete as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.13 FLOOR SLABS ON GRADE
A. Examine condition of porous fill and remedy any unsatisfactory portions prior to applying
vapour barrier.
B. Cover porous fill with vapour barrier of polyethylene sheeting. Do not lay sheeting until
immediately prior to placing of reinforcing mesh and concrete, in order to prevent damage
to the film. Seal seams as recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Do not place concrete over vapour barrier until all breaks have been patched and sealed.
3.14 HARDENER AND SEALER
A. Apply in accordance with the approved manufacturer’s printed instructions, on the

following concrete floor surfaces :
1. Areas designated with HC.
3.15 GROUTING
A. Mix grout in accordance with the approved manufacturer’s instructions to a consistency

which will permit placement. Place grout so as to ensure complete bearing and
elimination of air pockets.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
SECTION 03314- PRE STRESSED & POST TENSIONED STRUCTURAL
CONCRETE
Page No.1
1.1.1 Scope
(1) This specification provides the minimum requirements for post-tensioning

materials which are a part of this prestressed concrete structure.
(2) The provisions of this specification shall also govern for non-structural
applications.
(3) For concrete specifications refer to section 03300.
1.1.2 Definitions
(1) Tendon — the complete assembly consisting of anchorage and prestressing

steel with sheathing when required. The tendon imparts prestressing forces to
the concrete.
(2) Bonded Tendons — Tendons which are bonded to the concrete through
grouting or other approved means, and therefore are not free to move relative
to the concrete.
(3) Anchorage — the means by which the prestressing force is permanently

transmitted from the prestressing steel to the concrete.
(4) Prestressing Steel — that element of a Post-tensioning tendon which is

elongated and anchored to provide the necessary permanent prestressing
force.
(5) Sheathing — Enclosure around the pres tressing steel to avoid temporary or
per manent bond between the prestressing steel and the surrounding concrete.
(6) Coupling — The means by which the pres tressing force may be transmitted
from one Partial-length prestressing tendon to another.
1.1.3 Prestressing Steel
(1) Strand — Strand used in Post-tensioning tendons shall conform to ASTM

A416, “Specifications for Uncoated Seven-Wire Stress - Relieved Strand for
Prestressed Concrete”.
(2) Wire, or strand, not specifically itemized in ASTM A421 or A416, may be used
provided they conform to the minimum requirements of these specifications and
have no properties which make them less satisfactory than those listed in
ASTM A421 or A416.

Doha, Qatar
Marchy 2008
03314
Pre Stressed & Post Tensioned Concrete Structural
Page No. 2
1.1.4 Bonded Tendons
(1) Anchorages—the anchorages shall develop at least 95 percent of the actual

ultimate strength of the prestressing steel, tested in an unbonded state without
exceeding anticipated set. The actual strength of the prestressing steel shall
not be less than specified by the applicable ASTM Standard, and shall be
determined by tests of representative samples of the tendon material in
conformance with ASTM Standards. The anchorage shall be so arranged that
the prestressing force of the tendon may be verified prior to removal of the
stressing equipment.
(2) Sheathing — Sheathing material for bonded tendons shall be strong enough to
retain its shape and resist unrepairable damage during construction. It shall
prevent the entrance of cement paste from the concrete. Material left in place
shall not cause harmful electrolytic action nor deteriorate. The inside diameter
shall be at (east 1/4 in. larger than the nominal diameter of single wire, bar or
strand tendons, or in the case of multiple wire, bar or strand tendons, the inside
cross area of the sheathing shall be at least two times the net area of the
prestressing steel. Sheathing shall be capable of transmitting forces from grout to
the surrounding concrete.
Sheathing shall have grout openings at each end and at all high points except
where tendon curvature is small and the tendon is relatively level, such as in
continuous slabs.
Drain holes shall be provided at low points if the tendon is to be placed,
stressed and grouted in freezing climate.
(3) Grout — (see Section 1.2, “Recommended Practice for Growing of Post-
Tensioned Prestressed Concrete.”)
(4) Couplings — Couplings of bonded tendons shall be used only at locations

specifically indicated and/or approved by the Engineer. Couplings shall not be
used at points of sharp tendon curvature All couplings shall develop at least 95
percent of the actual ultimate strength of the Prestressing steel without
exceeding anticipated set. The coupling of tendons shall not reduce the
elongation at rupture below the requirement of the tendon itself. Couplings
and/or coupling components shall be enclosed in housings long enough to
permit the necessary movements, and fittings shall be provided to allow
complete grouting of all the coupling components.
(5) Multiple Tendons — Tendons composed of multiple strands, wires of bars in a

common sheath should be tensioned simultaneously unless the effects of
interferences between the elements are considered.
(6) Ultimate Strength — Ultimate strength for bonded tendons shall not be taken
greater than the ultimate capacity of the anchor ages or couplings when they
are located at critical sections under ultimate load. Bond transfer lengths
between anchorages and the zone where full prestressing force is required

Doha, Qatar
Marchy 2008
under service and ultimate loads shall be sufficient to develop the specified
ultimate strength of the prestressing steel.
03314
Page No. 3
(1) Multiple Tendons — Tendons composed of multiple strands, wires, or bars in

a common sheath should be tensioned simultaneously unless the interferences
between the elements are considered.
(2) Ultimate Strength — Ultimate strength for unbonded tendons shall not be
taken greater than the ultimate capacity of the anchorages or couplings.
1.1.5 Static Test Requirements
(1) Static Tests — the test assembly shall consist of standard production quality
components and the tendons shall be at least 10ft. long. The test assembly
shall be tested in a manner to allow accurate determination of the yield
strength, ultimate strength and percent elongation of the complete tendon to
insure compliance with this specification. The specimen used for the static test
need not be one that has been subjected to dynamic loading.
1.1.6 Specification Compliance Requirements
(1) Conformance Testing — the adequacy of a tendon system shall be confirmed

by satisfactory static and dynamic conformance tests in
accordance with the minimum requirements outlined in Section 3.18.
(2) Compliance — Data shall be submitted to show compliance with the provisions
of Section 3.1.8.
(3) Prestressing Steel — certified mill test results and typical stress-strain curves
shall be submitted when requested. The typical stress-strain curve shall be
obtained by approved standard practices. For materials not covered by section
3.1.4 guaranteed tensile strength, yield strength, elongations composition and
other pertinent data shall be submitted. In this case, samples from each heat
(or lot in case of strands), properly marked, shall be provided for verification of
prestressing steel quality.
1.2 Recommended Practice for Grouting of Post-Tensioned Prestressed

Concrete
1.2.1.1 Scope and purpose
(1) These recommendations cover the grouting of post-tensioning tendons of

prestressed concrete members.
(2) The purpose of grouting is to provide permanent protection to the post-

tensioning steel and to develop bond between the prestressing steel and the
surrounding concrete.

Doha, Qatar
Marchy 2008
03314
Page No. 4
1.2.1.2 Definition of Terms

All terms and symbols shall be as defined below and in “Guide Specifications
for Post-Tensioning Materials”, Section 3.1.3.
(1) Admixture — any material added to the grout other than portland cement and
water.
(2) Duct — the hole or void provided in the concrete for the post-tensioning
tendon.
(3) Grout — A mixture of cement and water with or without admixtures.
(4) Grout Opening or Vent — an inlet, outlet, or vent in the duct for grout, water or
air.
(5) Post-Tensioning — the method of prestressing concrete in which the tendon is

stressed after the concrete has reached a specified strength.
(6) Post-Tensioning Tendon — the complete assembly consisting of anchorage

and pre stressing steel with sheathing when required. The tendon imparts
prestressing forces to the concrete.
1.2.2 Materials
(1) Portland Cement— Portland cement should conform to one of the following:
Specifications for portland cement —ASTM C150 Type I, II Or III.
Cement used for grouting should be fresh and should not contain any lumps or
other indication of hydration or “pack set”.
(2) Water – the water used in the grout 5 be potable, clean and free of injurious
quantities of substances known to be harmful to Portland cement, or
prestressing steel.
(3) Admixtures — Admixtures, should impart the properties of low water content,
good flow ability minimum bleed, and expansion if desired. Its formulation
should contain no chemicals in quantities that may have harmful effect on the
prestressing steel or cement Admixtures containing chlorides (as CL in excess
of 0.5% by weight of admixture, assuming 1 pound of admixture per sack of
cement), florides, sulphites and nitrates should not be used
Aluminum powder of the proper fineness and quantity or other approved gas
evolving material which is well dispersed through the other admixture may be
used to obtain 5% to 10% unrestrained expansion of the grout.
All admixtures should be used in accordance with the instructions of the
manufacturer.

Doha, Qatar
Marchy 2008
03314
Page No. 5
1.2.3 Ducts
(1) Forming — (a) Formed Ducts — Ducts formed by sheath left in place should
be of a type that would not permit the entrance of cement paste. They should
transfer bond stresses as required and should retain shape under the weight of
the concrete. Metallic sheaths should be of a ferrous metal, and they may be
galvanized.
(b) Cored Ducts — Cored ducts should be formed with no constrictions which
would tend to block the passage of grout. All coring material should be
removed.
(2) Grout Openings or Vents — All ducts should have grout openings at both
ends.
For draped cables all high points should have a grout vent except where cable
curvature is small, such as in continuous slabs. Grout vents or drain holes
should be pro vided at low points if the tendon is to be placed, stressed and
grouted in a freezing climate. All grout openings or vents should include
provisions for preventing grout leakage.
(3) Duct Size — For tendons made up of a plurality of wires, bars, or strands, duct
area should be at least twice the net area of the prestressing steel.
For tendons made up of a single wire, bar or strand, the duct diameter should
be at least ¼ inch larger than the nominal diameter of the wire, bar or strand.
(4) Placement of Ducts — After placing of ducts, reinforcement and forming is

complete, an inspection should be made to locate possible duct damage. Ducts
should be securely fastened at close enough intervals to avoid displacement
during concreting.
All holes or openings in the duct must be repaired prior to concrete placing.
Grout openings and vents must be securely anchored to the duct and to either
the forms or to reinforcing steel to prevent displacement during concrete
placing operations.
1.2.4 Equipment
(1) The grouting equipment should include a mixer capable of continuous

mechanical mixing which will produce a grout free of lumps and undeserved
cement. The equipment should be able to pump the mixed grout in a manner
which will comply with all provisions of this recommended practice.
(2) Accessory equipment which will provide for accurate solid and liquid measures
should be provided to batch all materials.

Doha, Qatar
Marchy 2008
(3) The pump should be a positive displacement type and be able to produce an
outlet pressure of at least 150 psig. The pump should have seals adequate to
prevent introduction of oil, air or other foreign substance into the grout, and to
prevent loss of grout or water.
03314
Page No. 6
(4) A pressure gauge having a full scale reading of no greater than 300 phi should
be placed at some point in the grout line between the pump outlet and the duct
inlet.
(5) The grouting equipment should contain a screen having clear openings of 3
mm maximum size to screen the grout prior to its introduction into the grout
pump. If a grout with a thyrotrophic additive is used, a screen opening of 4 mm
is satisfactory. This screen should be easily accessible for inspection and
cleaning.
(6) The grouting equipment should utilize gravity feed to the pump inlet from a
hopper attached to and directly over it. The hopper must be kept at least
partially full of grout at all times during the pumping operation to prevent air
from being drawn into the post-tensioning duct.
(7) Under normal conditions, the grouting equipment should be capable of

continuously grouting the largest tendon on the project in no more than 20
minutes.
1.2.5 Mixing of the Grout
(1) Water should be added to the mixer first, followed by Portland cement and
admixture, or as required by the admixture manufacturer.
(2) Mixing should be of such duration as to obtain a uniform thoroughly blended

grout, without excessive temperature increase or loss of expansive properties
of the admixture. The grout should be continuously agitated until it is pumped.
(3) Water should not be added to increase grout flow ability which has been
decreased by delayed use of the grout.
(4) Proportions of materials should be based on tests made on the grout before
growing is begun, or may be selected based on prior documented experience
with similar materials and equipment and under comparable field conditions
(weather, temperature, etc.). The water content shall be the minimum
necessary for proper placement and when Type I or Type II cement is used
should not exceed a water-cement ratio of 0.45
The water content required for Type Ill cement should e established for a
particular brand based on tests.
1.2.6 Grouting
1.2.6.1 Preparation of the duct

Doha, Qatar
Marchy 2008
(1) Flushing of metal ducts should be optional with the post-tensioning contractor.
(2) Ducts with concrete walls (cored ducts) should be flushed to ensure that the
concrete is thoroughly wetted.
03314
Page No. 7
1.2.6.2 Injection of the grout
(1) All grout and high point vent openings should be open when grouting starts.
Grout should be allowed to flow from the first vent after the inlet pipe until any
residual flushing water or entrapped air has been removed, at which time the
vent should be capped or otherwise closed. Remaining vents should be closed
in sequence in the same manner.
(2) The pumping pressure at the tendon inlet should not exceed 250 psig.
(3) If the actual grouting pressure exceeds the maximum recommended Pumping
pressure, grout may be injected at any vent which has been, or is ready to be,
capped as long as a one-way flow of grout is maintained. If this procedure is
used, then the vent which is to be used for injection should be fitted with a
positive shut-off
(4) When one-way flow of grout cannot be maintained, the grout should be
immediately flushed out of the duct with water.
(5) Grout should be pumped through the duct and continuously wasted at the outlet
pipe until no visible slugs of water or air are ejected and the efflux time of the
ejected grout should not be less than the injected grout. To insure that the
tendon remains filled with grout, the outlet and/or inlet should be closed. Plugs,
caps or valves thus required should not be removed or opened until the grout
has set.
1.2.7 Temperature Considerations
(1) Concrete temperature — The temperature of the concrete should be 10° C. or

higher
from the time of grouting until job cured.
(2) Grout temperature — Grout should not be above 32o C. during mixing or
Pumping. If necessary, the mixing water should be cooled.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
Marchy 2008
03345
CONCRETE CRACK REPAIR
Page No. 1
1. GENERAL
Provide complete crack repair to areas as directed by the Engineer.
2. Supply of materials, labour, tools and equipment for the repair of concrete cracks
due to shrinkage and thermal movements during construction and the treatment of
construction and control joints.
3. Quick repair injection works to stop water leakage.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
1. Purpose of the work of this section is to protect finishes from substrate cracking
and to avoid corrosion of reinforcement, and to prevent concrete damage in
concrete elements exposed to the corrosive outside environment.
2. Except as noted below, work shall include the treatment by injection of all cracks
exceeding .2mm in width in basement structural elements. See Section 07572.
3. The repair of surface cracks in slabs that will receive a Traffic Coating (TC) shall
be the responsibility of that trade. See Section 07572: Traffic Coating.
1. Have work performed by a specialist contractor with minimum 5 years experience

in this field.
1.4 SAMPLE REPAIRS
1. Provide sample sections of 1 m length for each type of repair for approval by the
Engineer. Approved samples shall become minimum standard for repairs.
2. PRODUCTS
1. Polyurethane injection grout.
2. Epoxy grout.
3. Epoxy mortar.
4. Two part polysulphide Sealant.
5. Epoxy resins.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03345
CONCRETE CRACK REPAIR
Page No. 2
1. Inspect all areas subject to crack repair carefully, including construction and
control joints, and establish and mark on site scope of work.
2. Review scope and repair methods with Engineer.
3.2 TIMING
1. Execute crack repairs only when crack width is maximum, i.e. at concrete
temperatures 25oC or lower.
3.3 PREPARATION
1. Prepare cracks in accordance with product manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Protect work of others from damage due to work of this section.
3.4 METHODS OF REPAIR
1. Establish repair methods for each area, the crack size and type in consultation
with the Engineer.
2. Unless otherwise determined during these consultations, areas subject to varying

operating temperatures such as basement slabs and walls, and ground floor slab,
in contact with gradework, shall be repaired with injected polyurethane grouts. All
other areas subject to constant operating temperatures, shall be repaired with
epoxy grouts, injected or surface applied as directed by the Engineer.
3. Major concrete crack repairs shall be subjected to an inspection and reporting

from a specialized company in this respect. The report of the specialist shall
indicate the extent of cracks, locations any special consideration and method of
repairs.
3.5 APPLICATION
1. Apply repair materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Prior to full scale work, provide a sample application for the Engineer’s review.
3. Remove all excess material and leave surfaces ready to receive specified finishes
without further preparation.
4. Finished repairs shall match approved samples.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03346
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING
Page No. 1
1. GENERAL
1.1 SECTIONS INCLUDES
1. Compliance with Sections of Division 1, General Requirements. Refer to section

03300 Cast-in-place concrete for some of the concrete floor finishes.
2. Finishing and curing of cast-in-place concrete floor, stair and roofs.
3. Power Trowel: The approach for this building is for all concrete horizontal
surfaces that are directed by the Engineer, to be finished using the power trowel
technique, to avoid the use of concrete toppings and to avoid the use of mortar
beds for the installation of applied finishes such as traffic coating. Seamless
flooring, tiles, carpets, etc. This means conduits and other services cannot be
buried within mortar beds and therefore must be placed and embedded in
concrete. This means the slabs must be finished in the first instance, suitable to
accept applied finishes installed with the thin-set techniques such as adhesive and
thin-set mortars.
1.2 RELATED WORK
1. Reinforced Concrete: Section 03300.

2. Concrete Screeds: Section 03500
3. Fluid Applied Waterproofing: Section 07120
4. Cementitious Waterproofing: Section 07145
5. Traffic Coating: Section 07572
6. Refer to Architectural Finish Schedule for areas to receive surface hardeners,
sealers, and paint finishes.
1. Subcontractor, Foreman and Lead Concrete Finishers: Must be fully

experienced with the application and finishing of concrete surfaces as specified
herein. Accordingly, work experience records and references must be submitted
to the Engineer for approval prior to commencing work. Should work experience
records and references of performance, indicate unsatisfactory experiences, the
Contractor shall replace the Subcontractor and/or Foreman and/or Concrete
Finishers with Subcontractor and/or Foreman and/or Concrete Finishers having
experience and knowledge satisfactory to the Engineer.
1. Coordination: It is mandatory for the Contractor to fully coordinate

concrete work with the forming trades, the concrete placing trades, the
electrical and mechanical trades, to ensure work of this Section is properly
performed in a timely manner.
2. Remedial Work: Should concrete toppings and mortar setting beds be

required due to failure to execute work as required by this Section, the cost
of this shall be at the Contractor’s expense. Accordingly, redesign of the
structure and additional bracing etc., necessary to accept the additional
loads of toppings and mortar setting beds and adjustments to suspended
ceilings and adjusted mechanical and electrical systems caused thereby
shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03346
Page No. 2
3. Mechanical, Electrical and cast-in fixings: Contractor to coordinate the

installation of all mechanical and electrical pipes, conduits and boxes; all
cast-in fixing plates to ensure the work of this Section is complete.
4. Equipment: Tools, equipment and powered rotary trowels shall be of the

highest standard and in good condition.
5. Trial Areas: An area of 4 bay modules in the building shall be designated

by the Engineer for the Subcontractor to demonstrate his abilities and to
obtain the Engineer’s approval. Concrete and workmanship that is not
approved shall be removed and the work repeated until approval is
obtained, all at the Contractor’s expense. Approved installation shall
remain as part of the completed work. The approved trial area shall
become the minimum standard to which the remainder of the work shall
match.
6. Concrete to receive finishes: Coordinate with and refer to Section 07572

Traffic Coating, Section 07500 – Membrane Roofing and Division 9
Finishes, for references to finish substrate of concrete.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Surface Hardener: Pre-mixed, non-rusting high strength mineral aggregate to BS

882.
2. Combination Concrete Dust Sealing Hardener Compound: to ASTM C309 Type 1,

Class B.
3. Cement: Portland grey, normal BS 12.
4. Concrete Sand: Natural sharp angular to BS 882, graded 3 mm down, washed

free of chlorides and free of sulphate, sampled and tested to BS 812.
5. Water: Clean fresh, potable, free of sulphate, chlorides, organic and other
deleterious matter as per BS 3148.
6. Foaming Agent for Lightweight Screeds.
2.2 GROUT MIX
1. For Filling Surface and Minor Cracks, Saw Cuts and Tooled Joints: 1 part cement
to 2 parts fine concrete sand wetted with lates additive to provide a pourable mix.
Grout mix in this section shall cover crack filling not treated under Section 03345:
‘Concrete Crack Repair’.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
1. Protect concrete during finishing and curing operations from wind and rapid
drying.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03346
Page No. 3
3.2 TOLERANCES
Completed surfaces shall not vary more than 6 mm in 3000 mm from dead level, non-
accumulative, except where slopes to drains are required as shown on the drawings.
3.3 SCREEDING AND FLOATING
1. Strike off and screed concrete after it’s placed to correct elevations, levels and
slopes and consolidate with a wooden darby or bullfloat. Complete levelling and
consolidation before free moisture (bleeding) rises to surface.
2. After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off and levelled, the
concrete shall not be worked further until ready for floating. Floating with a hand
float or with a bladed power trowel equipped with float shoes, or with a powered
disc float shall begin when the water sheen has disappeared and when the
surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation. During or after the first
floating, plainness of surface shall be checked. All high spots shall be cut down
and all low spots filled during this procedure to produce a surface within Class B
tolerance throughout. (Finishes with Class B to tolerances shall be true planes
within 6 mm in 3 m, as determined by a 3 straightedge placed anywhere on the
slab in any direction). The slab shall then be re-floated immediately to a uniform
sandy texture.
3. Floors shall be finished to a hard, dense surface free from pinholes and
imperfections.
4. Roof screeds to be supplied and installed under the specified roofing membrane
section.
3.4 STEEL TROWEL FINISH - SMOOTH
After floating, the surface shall be power trowelled and finally hand trowelled. The first
trowelling after power floating shall produce a smooth surface which is relatively free of
defects but which still show some trowel marks. Additional trowellings shall be done by
hand after the surface has hardened sufficiently. The final trowelling shall be done when a
ringing sound is produced as the trowel is moved over the surface. The surfaces shall be
thoroughly consolidated by the hand trowelling operation. The finished surface shall be
essentially free of trowel marks, shall be uniform in texture and appearance and shall be
plane to a Class A tolerance. (Finishes with a Class A tolerance shall be true planes
within 3 mm in 3 m, as determined by a 3 straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in
any direction).
3.5 HARDENED AND DUST SEALER TO CONCRETE
1. Apply surface hardener and finish concrete to surface hardener manufacturer’s

printed instructions. Concrete surface hardener to occur in above-grade
mechanical and pump room, from Ground Floor and above.
2. Apply surface hardener in two shakes to total coverage of 5 Kg/m sq. of floor
surface.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03346
Page No. 4
3. Apply dust sealing compound to finished concrete floors in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. See finish schedule for locations.
3.6 MOIST CURING – refer to Section 03300.
3.7 CONTROL JOINTS
1. Provide saw-cut or hand edger trowel control joints where indicated on structural
drawings to layouts shown or as designated by the Engineer. In lieu of other
indications or directions, control joints shall occur over beams and in diamond
pattern to perimeter of columns.
2. Care shall be taken that control joints are sawn at the correct time after finishing of
concrete to ensure sawing is not done too soon or delayed too long (within 24
hours from concrete pour).
3. Commence sawing as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent

excessive ravelling. Ensure saw does not touch or disturb reinforcing steel. Saw
cuts shall not vary by more than 12 mm from true joint alignment.
4. Make saw cut or trowelled control joints as shown on structural drawings.
5. Clean joints, fill with grout mix and strike off flush with surface of floor after
concrete slabs have fully cured.
3.8 REPAIRING CRACKS
1. Where superficial cracks occur in substrates and are not treated under Section
03345, Concrete Crack Repair”, and prior to the laying of finish materials (paint,
carpet, ceramic tiles, traffic coating, resilient flooring, waterproofing and roofing)
rout out the cracks, grind level as necessary, and fill flush with grout.
3.9 CONCRETE FINISH SCHEDULE
1. All concrete floors, stairs and landings, shall be moist cured and steel trowelled to
a smooth finish.
2. All Concrete slabs to receive screed finish shall be moist cured and broom
finished.
3. All concrete slabs to receive seamless applied coatings, paint, carpet, ceramic tile
and waterproofing to be moist cured and steel trowelled to a smooth finish.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03410
STRUCTURAL PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
Page No. 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide structural pre-cast pre-stressed concrete work in accordance

with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Works on this section is related to cast-in-place concrete. Refer to section 03300

in all respects of materials, mixing, reinforcement etc.
1.2 STANDARDS
Standards and codes which are generally applicable to the work of this section are listed
hereinafter along with QNBS ( Qatar National Building Specifications ) :
BS 12 Specification for Portland Cement.

BS 1881 Methods of Testing Concrete.
ACI 301 Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
ACI 315 Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structure.
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
ACI 525 Minimum Requirements for this Section Pre-cast Construction.
A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply

with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the standards and codes
listed in Clause 1.02 of Section 03300 and also the “PCI Manual for Quality
Control of Plants and Products of Pre-cast and Pre-stressed Concrete Producers.
(PCI Manual – 116 (1985).
B. This Specification Section shall govern all structural pre-cast and pre-cast pre-
stressed concrete work for the project except where more stringent or specialized
requirements are indicated. All work shall be performed to secure for the project
homogeneous concrete having the required strength, surface finish, materials,
durability, and weathering resistance, without planes of weakness or other
structural defects, and free of honeycombs, air pockets, voids, projections, offset
of plane and other defacements of concrete. Be fully responsible for any defects
or damage in the building arising from faulty materials or workmanship and the
costs of remedial measures in order to ensure that the completed work complies
with the Contract Documents.
C. Base Construction methodology on the construction indicated in the Contract

Documents. No alterations or substitutions of the structural systems shown on the
drawings are permitted unless otherwise specified.
D. Supervise and coordinate all phases of the structural pre-cast and pre-cast pre-
stressed concrete construction process and be methods of manufacture and
practices of handling raw materials and manufactured concrete shall be reviewed
by the Engineer prior to execution of the structural pre-cast and pre-cast pre-
stressed concrete work.
E. Only materials of known quality shall be incorporated in the work. All materials
shall be properly selected, reviewed and approved by the Engineer before use.
And maintained during shipment, storage and use. Construction systems and
techniques shall be properly selected, reviewed and approved by the Engineer
before use, and maintained throughout the complete structural pre-cast and pre-
cast pre-stressed concrete construction phase. Adequate spare equipment, parts,

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03410
Page No. 2
additional components and repair facilities shall be available for all tools and
equipment.
F. Regardless of approvals by the Engineer, be responsible for all materials,

methods of structural pre-cast and pre-cast pre-stressed concrete work, and if any
work does not satisfy the Contract Documents, implement removal, replacement
or remedial work and revise procedures or materials to prevent recurrence of
unacceptable work at no additional cost to the Employer.
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Structural pre-cast and pre-stressed concrete work shall be executed by an

approved specialist subcontractor unless the Contractor can satisfy the Engineer
that he (the Contractor) has sufficient experience and expertise in this field to
execute this work himself in which case his tradesmen and their supervisory
personnel engaged in such work must have successful experience with work
comparable to that shown and specified including organized quality control and
testing procedures.
B. Pre-stressing shall be done by methods and with related equipment that are in
conformance with general accepted systems of pre-stressing.
C. All pre-tensioning work shall be under the immediate control of a person

experienced in this type of work. He shall exercise rigid control of all operations as
necessary for full compliance with all requirements. He shall be available at the
casting site at all times during placement of tendons, reinforcing, stressing
operations and concreting.
1.4 TESTING
A. Concrete shall be tested. Refer to Section 03300 “Cast-In-Place Concrete” Clause

1.06 ‘Quality Control’ for testing requirements.
B. Conduct load tests in accordance with ACI 318 erection and also after erection
and casting of topping slab to substantiate the performance characteristics of
structural pre-cast and pre-cast pre-stressed elements so designed by the
Engineer.
1. Review itinerary with the Engineer prior to testing.
2. Provide calibrated instrumentation for measuring and recording loads,

deflections, stresses and strains.
C. The Engineer will evaluate the adequacy of the Contractor’s quality control. In
addition to the requirements hereinafter specified under Paragraph “MIX Design”,
the Contractor shall:
1. Furnish labour required to facilitate testing.
2. Inform the Engineer with at least one day’s advance notice when concrete
is to be placed.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03410
Page No. 3
3. Provide storage facilities for concrete test cubes.
4. Provide material samples and access to materials as required for testing.
D. Be responsible for the expense of testing or inspection resulting as a

consequence to the following:
1. Work not evidencing compliance with this Specification.
2. Additional testing such as additional cubes for early breaks, etc., for
construction purposes.
3. Testing to verify the adequacy of work done without prior notice, without
proper supervision, or contrary to standard construction practice.
4. Providing additional tests as specified in Section 03300 “Cast-In-Place

Concrete”.
E. The Engineer may station a qualified inspector at the batch plant during the entire
time of batching, and shall continuously test, inspect, and report on the following:
1. The batching equipment and procedures.
2. The conformance of the materials (cement, aggregates, water and

admixtures) to the approved materials.
3. The proportioning of the concrete.

4. Mix transport equipment.
F. The Engineer will station a qualified inspector at the casting site to continuously
test, inspect and report on the following:
1. For each forty cu.m. of each different concrete type or portion thereof cast
per day, the following tests will be performed with the applicable standards.
a. Six strength tests using 150 x 150 x 150 mm cubes per B.S. 1881,
made from a mix selected at random. Break 3 cubes at age 7 days
and three cubes at age 28 days. Additional test specimens may be
cast for construction progress control purposes.
b. Two slump Tests: ASTM C143.
c. Two Temperature Tests: Use thermometer calibrated to +/- 0.5%

accuracy. Immerse the thermometer probe into concrete batches
selected at random at time of placement. Stabilized temperature of
concrete shall be less than the specified 30oC limit.
2. Check all reinforcing, strands, debonding and jacking installations to verify

conformance with Contract Documents and approved shop drawings.
3. Check all embedded items to verify conformance with Contract Documents

and approved shop drawings.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03410
Page No. 4
4. Check all formwork to verify conformance with Contract Documents and

approved shop drawings.
5. Check all openings and provisions for full coordination with all trades in the
Contract, as shown on approved shop drawings.
G. The Contractor shall provide facilities and equipment for the conducting of all tests
specified herein except for the strength test which should be carried out by an
independent testing agency. Test specimens may be cured by immersion.
H. All welding of steel supports, anchorages, connections and attachments will be

visually inspected and measured by the Engineer.
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall prepare and provide his quality control programme for
structural pre-cast and pre-cast pre-stressed concrete work with particular
attention to details, pre-checking processes, procedures and close supervision. In
order to assure that proper work is performed to prevent later corrective actions,
the Contractor shall provide at least one man full time to provide quality control for
structural pre-cast and pr-cast pre-stressed concrete work. This assignment will
not relieve the Contractor’s other quality control personnel of their duties relative
to the quality control of the structural requirements and surface finish of the
structural pre-cast and pre-cast pre-stressed concrete work.
B. The Contractor shall arrange for the training of his quality control personnel who
will perform quality control of structural pre-cast and pre-cast pre-stressed
concrete work. Training shall include but is not limited to materials, evaluation,
special mix design techniques, mix placement, vibrator selection and use,
formwork details, formwork, protection and release agent use, reinforcing steel,
tendons, debonding, inserts and jacking detailing and installation, finishing
equipment and techniques, corrective procedures and protection of complete
work.
C. The Contractor’s quality control personnel shall be responsible for verifying all
details necessary to produce the final structural design objectives. The
Contractor’s quality control personnel shall also verify the quality of the structural
pre-cast and pre-stressed concrete work and guide the production of results which
will be within acceptable physical tolerances.
1.6 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Within a reasonable time prior to commencement of structural precast and pre-

cast pre-stressed concrete work, the Contractor shall schedule a pre-construction
meeting at a mutually agreeable time with the Project Manager and his
designated representatives, to discuss design, materials, methods of work and
forming systems for structural pre-cast and pre-cast pre-stressed concrete work.
B. Prior to this meeting, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all pertinent
information including written procedural outlines, description of forming systems,
characteristics of all materials. The above information shall be received by the
Engineer at least 30 days prior to the pre-construction meeting.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03410
Page No. 5
C. During the pre-construction meeting the Contractor shall present an outline plan
for all concrete work to be accomplished and indicating special procedures
relative to the structural pre-cast and pre-cast pre-stressed concrete work. The
outline shall include reviews of sources of materials, commentary on source,
source variations during the course of the work, storage and use of materials,
description of all equipment necessary for batching, mixing, conveying, placing,
forming, reinforcing, pre-stressing, compacting, and finishing of structural pre-cast
and pre-cast pre-stressed concrete.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer’s Literature: Submit to the Engineer in accordance with

requirements of the Contract Documents, copies of manufacturer’s specifications
and installation instructions for each item of proprietary material used, showing
compliance with these specifications.
B. Design Mixes: Submit to the Engineer copies of mix designs with support
material, as described under Paragraph “MIX DESIGN”.
C. Mill Certificates: Submit to the Engineer copies of manufacturer’s certificate of

mill tests of all cement, reinforcing steel, and anchorage devices, and typical
stress-strain curves for pre-stressing steel.
1. Pre-stressing steel shall be tested for tensile strength and elongation at

rupture and also for relaxation. Each reel or lot number shall be tested and
tagged for identification purposes. Each tendon to be shipped to the
casting site shall be assigned an individual lot number and shall be tagged
accordingly.
D. Shop Drawings: Submit to the Engineer in the manner prescribed in the Contract
Documents, layout plans and detailed fabrication and placement drawings for
each structural pre-cast and pre-cast pre-stressed element. The shop drawings
are to include the following information.
1. Size, grade, profile and dimensions of all materials used.
2. Connection and anchorage details.
3. Lifting devices, locations and handling limitations.
4. Steel reinforcement details.
5. Tendon layout and dimensions locating tendons in horizontal plane at all

points. Detail horizontal curvatures of tendons at block-outs and
anchorage.
6. Tendon profiles showing any required placement support devices. Show

clearly the location of each tendon and the method of tending support.
7. All openings, sleeves, inserts and other provisions in full coordination with
all trades in the Contract.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03410
Page No. 6
8. Provide structural calculations and written descriptions of procedures

covering the following items:
a. Jacking force and jacking pressure.
b. Maximum temporary jacking force and jacking pressures.
c. Certified jack calibrations and method of identification. Submit

certificates of calibration from an acceptable testing laboratory to
the Engineer for all jacks used.
d. Sequence of tendon jacking for each different tendon layout.
e. Method of determining tendon slack, if any.
f. Method of determining anchor force, or force remaining in tendons

after anchorage is complete.
g. Method of sealing tendons.
9. Identification marks.
E. A record shall be kept for every piece of pre-cast element produced showing the
following:
1. Type and number.

2. Date of pour.
3. Concrete test results.
4. Ref. Shop drawing number.
5. Type and duration of curing.
6. Date of delivery to site.
7. Date of fixing in position.
F. Erection Procedures: Submit to the Engineer a detailed outline of sequence and

methods of erection.
G. The initial camber of single tees at erection time is estimated at:
8 mm for PB1
As the actual cambers may vary by +/- 15%, the Contractor shall ensure that only
beams with cambers varying by +/- 3 mm are erected in adjoining areas of the
same floor level. To facilitate this the Contractor shall store beams arriving to site
in groups in accordance with their actual camber/age.
H. Test Reports: Submit to the Engineer copies of all testing and inspection reports
required under Clause “TESTING”.
I. Calculations: Submit to the Engineer detailed calculations to substantiate design

of proposed framing elements and connections except where the Contractor has
checked and declared his full acceptance of the design prepared by the Engineer.
1.8 INPSECTION

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03410
Page No. 7
A. Pre-tensioning tendon and reinforcement placement shall be reviewed by the

Engineer after placement within the forms and concrete pours shall not be made
until acceptance of the placement of said pre-tensioning tendons and
reinforcement. Sufficient notice, minimum three (3) days, shall be given by the
Contractor prior to concrete pours to allow for the review of the work.
1.9 ALTERNATIVE DESIGN
A. Sections and dimensions shown on drawings shall be strictly followed by the

Contractor. Alternative shapes or deviations are not permitted.
B. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the design of the pre-cast pre-
stressed units. Accordingly he shall either check and declare his full acceptance of
the design prepared by the Engineer or in case of having reservations furnish a
design prepared by a qualified licensed engineer for the structural pre-cast and
pre-cast pre-stressed concrete units and connections to meet the needs of
fabrication, reinforcing, pre-stressing, stripping, handling, storage and erection
operations complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
A. Transport, store and handle structural pre-cast and pre-cast pre-stressed units in
a manner to avoid undue strains, hair cracks, staining, or other damage. Deliver
units from casting site to project site in accordance with schedule and proper
setting sequence. Store structural pre-cast and pre-cast pre-stressed units free of
the ground and protected from wind or rain splashes. Cover units, secure covers
firmly, and protect the units from dust, dirt or other staining materials.
1.11 PROTECTION
A. During fabrication, construction and after erection, protect castings to avoid

possibility of any damage.
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: The products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are

specified for the purpose of establishing minimum quality standards. Products
equal in quality to, or better than those specified will be considered acceptable.
The decision of acceptability will rest with the Engineer.
B. General: Obtain cement, aggregates and water from single source, sufficient to
complete the entire structural pre-cast and pre-cast pre-stressed concrete work
and to assure regularity of appearance and uniformity of colour. Provide all
materials in accordance with and meet all applicable requirements of Section
03300 “Cast-In-Place Concrete”.
C. Reinforcing Bars: Reinforcing bars shall be as specified in Clause 2.01/F in

Section 03300.
D. Pre-stressing Tendons

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03410
Page No. 8
1. Strand: Strands used in pre-tensioning tendons shall be 7 wire, 270 ksi,

12.7 mm diameter strands having a nominal cross section of 98.75 mm2
and specified characteristic strength of 183.7 KN. Strands shall conform to
ASTM A 416 “Specification for Uncoated Seven-Wire Stressed-Relieved
Strand for Pre-stressed Concrete” Grade 270, OR to BS 5896
“Specification for High Tensile Steel Wire and Strand”.
2. Coating: Unbonded parts of tendons shall have the pre-stressing steel for
that part permanently protected against corrosion by a properly applied
coating of epoxy material. The coating shall remain ductile and free from
cracks and shall not become fluid over the entire operating or anticipated
range of temperatures. The coating shall be chemically stable and be non-
reactive to material used for sheathing. The coating material shall adhere
to and be continuous over the entire tendon length to be unbonded.
3. Sheathing: The sheathing for unbonded shall have sufficient tensile

strength and water-resistance to resist unrepairable damage and
deterioration during transport, storage and installation. The sheathing shall
be continuous over the tendon length to be unbonded. The sheathing shall
prevent the instrusion of cement paste and the escape of coating material.
E. Inserts, Embedments and Anchorages in Pre-stressed Work: These shall be

proprietary as required for compliance with performance characteristics indicated
and as follows:
1. All pre-stressing steel shall be secured at the ends by acceptable

anchoring devices which shall be of such nature that wires will not kink,
break down, or otherwise be damaged.
2. Anchorage devices shall hold the pre-stressing steel without slip of more
than 3 mm at a load equal to the applied load on the wire at pre-stressing.
3. Distribution plates shall consist of welded steel or cast steel bearing

assemblies that will permanently support and distribute the load from the
anchoring devices as follows:
a. The maximum concentrated bearing stress in the concrete shall not

exceed that permitted by ACI 318.
b. Bending stresses in the plates induced by the pull of the pre-

stressing steel shall not exceed 1400 kg/cm2 for structural steel
and 1050 kg/cm2 for cast steel, except if acceptable test data
indicates that higher stresses are satisfactory. For high strength
steel, correspondingly higher stresses may be permitted.
c. Materials shall meet requirements of ASTM A 36 for structural

shapes, or ASTM A 148 for cast steel, or higher quality materials as
required to meet stress requirements.
d. Design, fabrication and erection shall meet the latest AISC

Standards, Welding AWS Standards including Qualification Test of
Welders.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03410
Page No. 9
e. Bolts and nuts shall be high-tensile steel and shall conform to

ASTM A 325.
f. Distribution plates may be omitted, if the bearing area of any

anchoring device is sufficiently large so that the local concentrated
bearing compressive stresses do not exceed the stresses permitted
above or cause local failure.
F. Debounding Compound for Dowel Bars: Debounding compound shall consist of

66% of 200 pen bitumen blended hot with 14% light creosote and, when cold,
brought to the consistency of paint by the addition of 20% solvent naphtha or
other approved compound meeting the following requirements.
1. It shall not retard or in any other way affect the setting of concrete.
2. The average bond stress on bars coated with the compound with half their
length, as shown on the Drawings, cast into concrete specimens and
subjected to pull out tests at 7 days shall not exceed 1380 N/m2 (20
lbf/in2) and the total movement of the dowel bar relative to the concrete
shall be not less than 0.25mm (0.010 inches) at that stress. The concrete
specimens shall be 150 x 150 mm (6” x 6”) in section and 450 mm (18”)
long and made with the same mix proportions as used in the Works.
2.2 MIX DESIGN
A. Properties of Mix: Adjust design mixes as required to obtain the strength specified.
1. Compressive Strength
a. Structural Pre-cast Concrete
(i) Half “T” Beams, Floor Planks, Tapering Slabs, Lintels and
other Members Unless Stated Otherwise: 300 Kg/sq.cm
characteristic cube strength minimum at 28 days and 250
Kg/sq.cm at the time of stripping.
b. Structural Pre-cast Pre-stressed Concrete Units.
(ii) Tee Beams: 500 Kg/sq. Cm. Characteristic cube strength

minimum at 28 days and 375 Kg/sq.cm. at the time of
transfer.
2. Slump: 50 mm +/- 12 mm.
3. Air Entrainment: 3% minimum, 5% maximum
2.3 FORMWORK
A. ACI 347: As required to consistency maintain dimensional and surface finish

controls specified in Sub-Clause 3.01C “Tolerances”. Formed surfaces of the
structural pre-cast and pre-stressed elements are to be at least as and pre-cast

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03410
Page No. 10
pre-stressed elements are to be at least as smooth, flat and joint free as 19 mm

plywood formed finish.
B. Pre-cast single tees are designed as an exposed structure that will only receive
appropriate putty and paint. Steel moulds, therefore shall be smooth, rigid and
welded at locations that will not adversely affect appearance. Joints in moulds
must be made smoothly by grindings. Locations of joints shall be approved by the
Engineer before fabrication of mock-up.
C. Construct forms of non-staining metal, fiber glass reinforced polyester, or other

approved material. Fabricate and reinforce for close control of dimensions,
shapes, profiles, curvatures, smooth and perfect edge, and corner finishes and
details. Make forms sufficiently rigid so that pre-cast units will meet the casting
tolerances. Construct forms tightly to prevent leakage of water or mortar. Form
joints will not be permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work.
2.4 MOCK-UP
A. The Contractor shall produce one sample mock-up as directed by the Engineer. If
the first mock-up is not accepted by the Engineer (visually and/or structurally), the
Contractor shall provide further mock-ups until the Engineer’s approval is given.
B. Use beam PBI for the visual mock-up and for the structural testing.
C. Test beam(s) shall be tested in two stages:
Stage 1 - Non-composite.
Stage 2 - Composite till failure.
2.5 FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Quick drying, non-staining type. Obtain manufacturer’s supplied solvent for

cleaning pre-stressing strands, rebars and embedded items.
2.6 BEARING PADS
A. Elastometric neprene, conforming to Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges

(Section 25) adopted by the American Association of State Highway
Transportation Officials.
1. Harness: 70.
2.7 GROUT
Submit to the Engineer epoxy grout of the Type and Specification suitable for the required
application.
2.8 EMBEDDED STEEL
A. ASTM A36
1. Galvanize loose stock for welding after fabrication.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03410
Page No. 11
2. After welding prime exposed surfaces of embedments and loose stock with
zinc chromate.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 FORMING
A. General: Forms and casting beds are to be firmly seated so as not to deflect or be
displaced under concreting or tensioning loads. Correct for thermally induced
strains or forces.
1. For member penetrations larger than 150 mm coring or field cutting is not
permitted unless prearranged with and approved by the Engineer.
2. Clean and coat forms with release agent prior to installation or reinforcing
or embedments.
B. Refer to Section 03300 “Cast-In-Place Concrete” for materials and other

requirements of formwork.
C. Tolerances: Permissible deviations of formed surfaces are not to exceed

tolerances outlined in PCI Manual 116, summarized and/or modified as follows:
1. Dimensions
a. Length: +/- 5mm.

b. Width: +/- 3mm.
c. Thickness: Stem +/- 3 mm; flange +/- 2.0mm.
d. Embedment or Penetration Location: +/- 0.20%.
2. Straightness: +/- 3 mm.
3. End Squareness: +/- 3mm.
3.2 STEEL PLACEMENT
A. Place mild steel and pre-stressing steel in accordance with properly executed
placement drawings.
B. Embedments, inserts and lifting devices are to be firmly anchored to resist

misplacement during concreting.
C. Tolerances: Maximum permissible deviation from detailed placement.
1. Mild Steel Reinforcing: Surface clearance +/- 6 mm.
2. Pre-stressing Tendons and Anchorages: +/- 3 mm.
3. Embedments
a. In plane: +/- 1/200.

b. In position: +/- 6 mm.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03410
Page No. 12
D. Broken strands and strands showing severe fabrication defects shall be removed
and replaced.
E. Unbonded part of tendons shall be coated with rust preventive, lubricating mastic
and enclosed in a sheath that will permit the tendons for that part to return to their
natural length.
F. Each tendon shall be marked and clearly identified for its location in the work.
Tendons may be handed mechanically or manually. Belt or webbed slings are
recommended when tendons are handled mechanically.
G. Tendon placement shall not vary more than 3 mm vertically from the points
dimensioned. Tendons may not be moved laterally to clear openings.
H. Concrete between tendons and openings is slabs shall be at least 150 mm.
Reinforcing steel shall be required at corners of all openings.
I. Profiles are maintained by tying tendons to reinforcing steel, clips or other

supports with wire ties. Tendons should be supported at a maximum spacing of
1.2 m centre to centre.
J. When welding or burning near tendons, care should be exercised to prevent

tendon from over-heating, or molten slag coming in contact with the tendon.
Grounding of welding equipment to tendon will not be allowed.
K. See Section 03300 “Cast-In-Place Concrete” for additional requirements for all
reinforcing bars.
3.3 TENSIONING THE TENDONS
A. Pre-tensioning: When pre-tensioning, the tension shall be fully maintained by

some positive means during the period between tensioning and transfer. The
transfer of stress shall take place slowly to minimize shock which will adversely
affect the transmission length.
1. In the long-line method of pre-tensioning, sufficient locator plates shall be

distributed throughout the length of the bed to ensure that the wires or
strands are maintained in their proper position during concreting. Where a
number of units are made in line, they shall be free to slide in the direction
of their length and thus permit transfer of the pre-stressing force to the
concrete along the hole line.
2. In the individual mould system, the moulds shall be sufficiently rigid to

provide the reaction to the pre-stressing force without distortion.
2. Deflected Tendons
a. Where possible, the mechanisms for holding-down or holding-up tendons

shall ensure that the part in contact with the tendon is free to move in the
line of the tendon so that frictional losses are nullified. If, however, a
system is used which develops a frictional force, this force shall be
determined by test and due allowance made.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03410
Page No. 13
b. For single tendons, the deflector in contact with the tendon shall have a
radius of not less than five (5) times the tendon diameter for wire or ten
(10) times the tendon diameter for a strand and the total angle of deflection
shall not exceed 15o.
c. The transfer of the pre-stressing force to the concrete shall be effected in

conjunction with the release of hold-down and hold-up forces, so that any
tensile stresses in the concrete resulting during the process do not exceed
permissible limits.
d. All tendons shall be stressed by means of hydraulic jacks, equipped with

accurate reading calibrated hydraulic pressure gauges to permit the stress
in the pre-stressing steel to be computed at any time. A certified calibrated
curve from a recognized testing laboratory shall accompany each jack. If
inconsistencies between the measured elongation and the jack gauge
reading occur, the jack shall immediately be recalibrated.
e. Tendon force measured by gauge pressure must agree with 5% with the
tendon force calculated by elongation measurement.
f. All individual tendon allegations shall be within 5% of that calculated. The

total tendon elongation sum of any structural member or system shall be
equal to the average calculated elongation of all tendons required by the
member or system +/- 2%. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for
re-tensioning of all elements until such criteria is satisfied.
g. In no case shall the steel be tensioned above 80% of the ultimate strength
of the strand. The anchor force shall not exceed 70% of the ultimate
strength of the strand.
3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING
A. Batch, transport, deposit, consolidate and strike off the concrete to produce dense
homogeneous concrete elements.
B. Surface Finishes
1. Tee Beams and Ledger Beams
a. To Receive Bonded Topping: Broomed perpendicular to axis with

stiff brush just sufficient to remove the outer mortar skin and
expose the larger aggregate without disturbing the aggregate.
b. Exposed: Hard trowelled.
c. Concealed: Floated.
C. Curing: Retain moisture to assure complete hydration of the Cement.
1. Membrane forming curing compounds shall not be used on surfaces to

which topping is eventually to be bonded.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03410
Page No. 14
2. Steam Curing:
a. Do not apply steam until concrete undergoes initial set (2 to 4

hours).
b. Heat Gain in Enclosure: Maximum 4oC per hour.
c. Maximum Heat in Enclosure: 65oC.
3.5 HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORTAION
A. Remove the structural pre-cast and pre-cast pre-stressed elements from the form
without damaging or overstressing and store or place for transportation on a
stable bed that will not allow further distortion of the member. Separate stacked
members with suitable battens and bracings.
B. Coat all exposed tendon ends and exposed metal inserts with rust preventive
paint as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Mark each member with an identifying reference or piece mark, and the date of
casting. All piece marks are to be correlated with test reports and plan layouts or
erection drawings.
D. Transport the structural pre-cast and pre-cast pre-stressed element with sufficient
batterns, bracing, and supports so as not to overstress by vibration or impact
loadings.
3.6 SURFACE TREAMENT AND REPAIR
A. General: Minor cracks and spalls not affecting the structural integrity of the
element can be patched with epoxy type bonding agents and patching
compounds:
1. Cracks and honeycomb, in anchorages, bearings or otherwise critical

zones will be unacceptable unless repair can be affected and
substantiating testing performed.
2. Do not attempt structural repair without the Engineer’s knowledge and

approval.
3.7 INSTALLATION
A. General: Erection responsibilities include the safe and proper placing, aligning,
and levelling of the structural pre-cast and pre-cast pre-stressed elements on the
accepted bearing surfaces and affecting their proper securement.
B. Survey: Before placement of structural pre-cast and pre-cast pre-stressed

elements, survey the base structure to confirm proper line and grade and bearing
surface conditions.
C. Guying, Bracing, and Shoring: Install in proper sequence and maintain all
temporary supports shown or required to control alignment, deflection, and stress

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03410
Page No. 15
levels. Retain temporary supports until framing elements braced thereby have
attained integral stability in accordance with the design.
D. Adjustment and Correction: Compensate and correct for misaligning affect of

temperature, draw from welding, bolting or erection sequence or grouting.
E. Erection Tolerances: Comply with the following erection tolerances.
2. Variations From Plumb: 6 mm in any 6 m run; 12 mm total in any 12 m or

longer run.
3. Variation From Level or Elevation: 6 m in any 6 m run; 12 mm in any 12 m

run; total 12 mm at any location.
4. Variation From Position in Plan: +/- 12 mm maximum at any location.
5. Offsets in Alignment of Adjacent Members at Any Joint: 1.5 mm in any 3 m

run; 6 mm maximum.
F. Welding: In accordance with AWS recommendations:
1. Do not weld until all adjacent elements to be connected have been

aligned, firmly seated and braced.
2. Control heat building-up by limiting voltage, electrode size, and rate.

Spalled or heat damaged concrete around wedments is not acceptable.
F. Grouting: Complete joints, gaps and connections by filling with grout as shown on
Drawings and as approved by the Engineer.
3.8 FIELD CUTTING
A. Field cutting of holes may be done only with the Engineer’s concurrence and only
with power saws or core drills.
1. Maximum hole size is 150 mm diameter or as limited by member size or

strand location.
2. Cracks, spalls and sharp corners created by field cutting are to be ground,
eased, and patched with epoxy type bonding and patching compounds.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03500
CONCRETE SCREED
Page No. 1
1. GENERAL
2. Coordination with the work of Sections 01400, 03300, 03346, 07120, 07145,
09310, 09315, 09800, 10050 and the work of Divisions 15 and 16.
1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS
1. The following standards, codes and other documents are referenced in this
section. Where applicable QNBS (Qatar National Building Specifications) shall be
referred.
2. Reference Number Title
BS 12 Specification for Portland Cement

BS 812 Specification for Testing Aggregates
BS 882 Specification for Aggregates from
Natural Sources for Concrete
BS 1199 Floor Screeds
BS 1881 Methods of Testing Concrete
BS 4027 Specification for Sulphate-Resisting
Portland Cement
BS 5075 Concrete Admixtures
BS 5328 Concrete
ACI 3042 Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods
ASTM C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C88 Test Method for Soundness of
Aggregates by Abrasion and Impact in
the Los Angeles Machine.
ASTM C131 Test method for unit Weight, yield and

Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete
ASTM C289 Test Method for Potential Reactivity of

Aggregates (Chemical Method)
ASTM C309 Specification for Liquid-membrane

Forming compounds for curing concrete
ASTM C494 Specification for Chemical Admixtures

For Concrete.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE – SAMPLE AND TESTING OF MATERIALS
1. Submit samples as specified in Section 01300 and as follows:
2. Samples of the following:
1. Cement: A mixed sample.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03500
CONCRETE SCREED
Page No. 2
2. Fine aggregate and sand for mortar: 0.03m3 for each mix of concrete.
3. Water: Sufficient samples of water used for mixing of concrete.
3. After the Engineer is satisfied that the samples with their sources are truly
representative samples and sufficient quantities of these materials are readily
available for the completion of all concrete work, then they shall be sent to the
laboratories for testing in accordance with Section 01400.
4. The Contractor shall supply and deliver to the laboratory all samples and have all
laboratory tests made at his own expense, as performed under this section.
5. During construction, sample and test all concrete, aggregates, cement, and water
as frequently as deemed necessary by the Engineer.
1. Before concrete screed is placed, supply the Engineer with details of mixes,
aggregates, additives, and surfaces of supply. State where each mix is to be
used.
2. Tests on cement: Supply the Engineer with official certificates of the

manufacturers concerning the specification and quality of the different type of
cement.
3. Test of Aggregates:
1. Test aggregates for organic impurities by comparison of setting times and

3-day compressive strengths.
2. Test for chlorides as Cl by analysis following acid extraction in accordance

with BS 812.
3. Test for sulphates as SO3 by analysis following acid extraction in

accordance with BS 1377.
4. Test for potential alkali reactivity in accordance with ASTM C289.
5. Test for grading (as described in BS 882), by sieve analysis in accordance

with BS 812.
6. Test for shape in accordance with BS 812.
7. Test for relative density by weighing in air and in water, in accordance with
BS 812.
8. Test for soundness of sulphate resistance test in accordance with ASTM

C88.
9. Test of Admixtures: Provide certificates from suppliers, and results of tests by a

nominated laboratory approved by the Engineer, to confirm compliance with the
relevant specifications.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03500
CONCRETE SCREED
Page No. 3
10. Reports: Submit to the Engineer copies of reports on all tests in a form approved
by the Engineer.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
1. Ordinary Portland Cement: Conform to the requirements of BS 12.
2. Sulphate-Resistant Cement: Conform to the requirements of BS 4027.
3. Water
1. Water for mixing of concrete and for curing of concrete shall be fresh,
clean, and free of oil, acids, alkali, sewage, deletectious mineral or organic
matter.
2. Inorganic contamination shall not exceed the limits in Table 12 in

C.I.R.I.A. Guide. It shall not contain any impurities in amounts sufficient to
cause a change in the time of setting concrete compressive strength of
mortar of more than 5 percent, compared to results obtained with distilled
water.
3. It shall not have pH lower than 6.
4. Water for curing concrete in addition to the above requirements, shall not
contain impurities in sufficient amount to cause discolouration of the
concrete.
4. Fine Aggregates
1. General: Conform to the requirements of BS 882, except where more

stringent requirements are set out in this specification. Do not mix or store
fine aggregates from different sources of supply in the same pile, nor use
them alternately in the same class of construction or mix.
2. All fine aggregates shall be free injurious amounts of organic impurities

and producing colour darker than the standard shall be rejected.
3. Fine aggregates shall be pre-washed well and uniformly graded from

coarse to fine and shall be approved by the Engineer. The maximum
percentage by weight passing a No. 100 ASTM (0.1mm) sieve shall not
exceed 5% of the total weight of fine aggregate. Not more than 10%
should be retained on a 5 mm sieve.
4. Fine aggregates shall not contain more than 0.06% CL by weight, subject
also to the requirements of this section.
5. Fine aggregates shall not contain more than 0.4% S03 by weight, subject
also to the requirements of this section.
5. Admixtures

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03500
CONCRETE SCREED
Page No. 4
1. Use admixtures to concrete screed only when approved by the Engineer in

writing before use.
2. Do not use any admixtures, which contain calcium chloride.
3. The use of admixtures is to comply fully with manufacturer’s instructions,

and all admixtures are to be obtained from a single source when more than
one is used. Each admixture is to be dispensed separately into the mix.
4. Air-entraining agent shall comply with the requirements of BS 5075, Part 2.
5. Retarding agent, with or without water-reducing function, shall comply with

the requirements of BS 5075, Part 1.
6. Standard plasticizing and normal water-reducing agent shall comply with

the requirements of BS 5075, Part 1.
7. Superplasticising agents shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C494

(F & G).
8. Carry out trials of any admixture proposed for use, before installing in the
finished work. Use the cements, aggregates, and water, which are to be
used in the specific work.
6. Bonding Agent: Epoxy resin bonding agent for bonding screed to concrete slab.
2.2 COMPOSITION & PROPORTIONS OF FLOOR SCREED CONSTITUENTS
1. Composition
1. Screed shall be prepared on site or premixed and supplied by an approved

ready-mix supplier.
2. Screed shall consist of Portland Cement, Sand and Water. Chemical

additive may be added to improve workability.
3. A bonding material shall be used to bond the screed to the substrate

concrete. The material shall be cement sand grout, cement sand latex
grout or an epoxy bonding agent.
2. Proportions
1. In general proportions the mix such that the compressive strength of

screed shall be at least that of the substrate material with a minimum value
of 25 N/mm2 at 28 days.
2. Other required properties of the screed shall be:
Maximum water cement ratio : 0.45

Minimum cement content : 360 kg/cu.m
Minimum bond strength : 1 N/mm2

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03500
CONCRETE SCREED
Page No. 5
3. Bonding Material
Proportion bonding material mixes to obtain a minimum bond strength of

1/N mm2.
4. Submit all mixes for approval by the Engineer.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
1. Before starting work ensure that bases are sufficiently flat to permit specified
levels and flatness of finished surfaces, bearing in mind the permissible minimum
and maximum thickness of the screed / topping. Ensure bases are clean and free
from plaster, dirt, dust and oil.
2. Where any screed is described as “proprietary”, all materials, the mix proportions,
minimum/maximum thickness and workmanship must be in accordance with the
recommendations of the stated manufacturer even though that manufacturer may
not supply all of the required materials.
3. Lay an area of screed in advance of the remainder, in an approved location, size 5

sq.m. and obtain approval of appearance before proceeding.
4. Conduits: Haunch up in cement: sand 1:4 on both sides of conduits before laying
quilt for floating screeds. Conduits, which are to be cast into screeds to be
overlaid with 500 mm wide strip of steel fabric to BS 4483, reference D49. Place
the reinforcement at mid depth between the top of the conduit and the screed
surface.
3.2 APPLICATION - TYPES
1. Partially Bonded Construction: Before surface of base slab has completely

hardened brush off all surface laitance with a stiff broom. Thoroughly clean base
slab and keep well wetted for several hours before laying screed. Remove free
water then brush in recommended bonding agent: cement slurry.
2. Unbonded Construction: Lay separating sheet of polythene not less than 65

microns thick (250 gauge) on base and lap all joints not less than 50 mm.
3.3 APPLICATION
1. Apply epoxy resin bonding agent by brush or roller to the prepared concrete
surface.
2. Mix 3 parts clean dry sharp sand to part OPC (by weight) and add sufficient water
to obtain a semi dry mix.
3. Add 10 litres SBR latex at a rate of 10 litres per 50 Kg OPC and mix, obtain a wet
but non-flowable consistency.
4. Using guiding lathes/battens of predetermined thickness, apply the non-flowable

screed to the bays and compact by tamping.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03500
CONCRETE SCREED
Page No. 6
5. Fully compact by double beam vibrator or plate vibrator or, where this is not
practicable by hand.
6. Unless otherwise specified cast screed continuously as far as possible without

defined joints, using “wet screeds” between strips or bays. Obtain approval for
positions of bay joints.
7. Joints in screeds to be cast in bays of not more than 25 m2.
8. Sudden irregularities are not permitted. When measured with a slip gauge to BS
8204 : Part 1, Figure 3 or equivalent, the variation in gap under a straightedged
(with feet) placed anywhere on the surface to be not more than the following:
Screeds to receive toppings or beds 15-30 mm thick : 10 mm under a 5 mm

straightedge.
2 mm under a 1 m straightedge.
3.4 CURING / FINISHING
1. Timing: Carry out all finishing operations at optimum times in relation to the
setting and hardening of the material. Do not wet surfaces to assist surface
working. Do not sprinkle cement onto surface.
2. Smooth Floated Finish: Use a hand float, skip float or power float to give an
even surface with no ridges or steps.
3. Trowelled Finish to receive applied floor finishes: Float to an even surface

with no ridges or steps. Power trowel to give a uniform smooth but not polished
surface free from trowel marks and other blemishes, and suitable to receive the
specified flooring material.
Adequate protects the surface from construction traffic.
If, because of inadequate finishing or protection, the surface of the screed is not
suitable to receive the specified flooring material, it must be made good by
application of a smoothing compound to the satisfaction of the finished flooring
subcontractor. Allow for the cost of any such making good.
4. Trowelled Finish for wearing surfaces: Float to an even surface with no ridges
or steps. As soon as the surface is sufficiently hard, steel trowel by hand or
machine. Re-trowel at least twice at intervals, until a hard closed finish is obtained
and there is little or no effect from further trowelling.
5. Dewatered Trowelled Finish for wearing surfaces: Immediately after

compaction of the concrete, apply the vacuum dewatering process in accordance
with the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.
Without delay float the surface using a power float to give an even surface with no
ridges or steps.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
03500
CONCRETE SCREED
Page No. 7
As soon as the surface is sufficiently hard, steel trowel by hand or machine. Re-
trowel at least twice at intervals, until a hard closed finish is obtained and there is
little or no effect from further trowelling.
Finished surfaces must be uniform, smooth and free from trowel marks and other
blemishes.
6. Curing: Unless otherwise specified: Immediately after laying, protect surface from
wind, draughts and strong sunlight. As soon as screed / topping have set, closely
cover with polythene sheeting and keep in position for not less than 7 days. Do
not heat screeds / toppings or the building artificially during first 4 to 6 weeks after
laying, thereafter raise temperature slowly.
7. Take adequate precautions to prevent damage to screeds / toppings, including

covering by suitable means. Make good all defective work in screeds before
applying finishes.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
04200
CONCRETE BLOCK MASONRY
Page No. 1
1. GENERAL
2. Supply and installation of concrete block masonry and related accessories

necessary to complete the Works, to the Engineer’s approval.
3. Supply and installation of concrete block masonry or reinforced concrete lintels.
4. Fire-Rated Walls: Generally are required at service shafts, at service stairs, at

elevators, storage rooms’, at electrical and transformer rooms, and additionally as
shown on Drawings, Room Schedules and required by Authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1. The work under this Section shall comply BS 8000 Part 3, BS 6073 Parts 1 and 2,
BS PD 6472 and BS 5628.
2. The work under this Section shall comply with Local Municipality Applicable
Advisory Notes and regulations, and Qatar Municipality advisory note 007
(ordinance No. 44).
3. Do work to requirements of the referenced standards and as specified in this

Section.
4. Obtain one set of referenced British Standard and Local Municipality Advisory
Notes and regulations for Building Material specification and keep on site for
review by Authorities having Jurisdiction, by the Engineer, Contractor and
Subcontractors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Samples, Drawings:
1. Submit for approval by the Engineer three samples of each type of

masonry unit and accessory, including data sheets indicating sizes,
material composition etc., before delivery to site.
2. Identify all samples with project number, date, Contractor’s name, and
description of the sample, i.e. manufacturer’s name. Product name and
type.
3. After approval, samples will be retained on site for use as standard of

acceptance until completion of Contract.
4. Materials built into the Work shall match approved samples.
5. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings as specified in Section 01300.

Shop drawings are required for the concrete block masonry in-fill walls

Doha, Qatar
Marchy 2008
04200
Page No. 2
behind granite cladding. Show reinforcement, engineering calculations,

material types and quality and strengths, and interface details with
adjacent constructions. These walls are required to support vertical and
lateral loads of the cladding including cladding anchorages and positive
and negative wind forces. Shop drawings shall bear professional seal and
signature of the Contractor retained structural engineer responsible for the
engineering design of these walls.
2. Testing
1. Perform compressive strength tests in accordance with BS 6073 for

concrete blocks with a min. compressive strength of 10.0 Mpa and submit
results for the Engineer’s review and approval.
3. Certification
1. Submit manufacturer’s certificates attesting that materials supplied are as

per referenced standards.
2. On completion of works, submit a certificate signed by the installer, which

states that the work of this Section is installed as specified in this Section.
No final payment for work of this Section will be made without receipt by
the Engineer of this certificate.
1.4 MOCK-UP
1. Construct a mock-up wall in the building of a typical wall type. The wall shall be
floor in height. Location shall be as designated by the Engineer. Modify the mock-
up wall as may be necessary to obtain approval by the Engineer. Approved mock-
up wall may remain as part of the completed building.
2. Mock-up shall contain approved materials, Concrete block masonry work shall
match approved mock-up wall.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS – CONCRETE BLOCK (CONC BLK)
1. Concrete Block, General: to BS 6073, Parts 1 and 2, to suit applicable conditions,

hollow, normal weight, min. 12.5 Mpa, cured to max 20% moisture content, fully
cured at least 28 days prior to delivery to the site, complete with all special shapes
and sizes required, including bullnose block and 100% solid blocks for corners
and for support of wall-mounted items. Blocks exposed in the completed Work
shall be free from cracks, splits, spalls chippages and other defects.
2. Concrete Block for fire-rated Construction: to BS 6073, Parts 1 and 2, normal

weight, min. 12.5 Mpa and at least 75% solid, cured to max. 20% moisture
content, fully cured at least 28 days prior to delivery to the site, complete with all
special shapes and sizes required, including bullnose block and 100% solid blocks
for corners and for supports of wall-mounted items. Blocks exposed in the
completed work shall be free from cracks, splits, spalls, chippages and other
defects.

Doha, Qatar
Marchy 2008
04200
Page No. 3
3. Tolerances: Dimensions of block in any direction (length, height and thickness)

not to vary from nominal size by more than 3 mm.
2.2 MATERIALS – MORTAR AND RENDERING
1. Cement: Portland, grey, normal to BS PD 6472.
2. Hydrated Lime: to BS 890.
3. Masonry Cement: Bagged masonry cement equivalent to 1:1:6 mix specified may
be used in lieu of cement/lime mortar.
4. Aggregate for Masonry Mortars: to BS 1200, graded 3 mm down in accordance

with Table 1 therein, washed free of chlorides (salt) and sulphates, sampled and
tested to BS 812.
5. Water: potable, free of organic matter, free of debris, free of chlorides (salt), free
of sulphates and free of silt, with Ph value in the basic range of 7 – 9.
6. Calcium Chloride: Do not use calcium chloride.
7. Latex Admixture for Rendering: styrene-butadiene copolymer latex specifically

designed for use with cement compositions.
2.3 MATERIALS – MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
1. Strap and Frame Anchors: Stainless steel in accordance with BS 1449: Part 2 :
1983 to Grade 304 S15.
2. Insulation Between Tops of Concrete Block Partitions and Underside of

Structure: mineral wool or fibrous glass board of 1.1 lb density, machine cut,
recessed each side of wall to accept caulking/smoke seal, placed under minimum
25% compression when installed.
3. Horizontal reinforcing Galvanized Steel Mesh or Ladder Type: to BS EN

10142 of Fe PO2G quality type Z275 and mild steel rods complying with BS 4449,
hot dip galvanized to the Engineer’s approval.
4. Vertical Reinforcement: Steel bars type 2 high yield deformed steel bars
complying with BS 4449 as per Section 03300.
2.4 MORTAR MIXING AND PROPORTIONS
1. Proportion mortar dry, 1 part cement, 1 part hydrated lime and 6 parts aggregate
and mix thoroughly. Add and thoroughly and uniformly mix in enough water to
make mortar tightly ball in a man’s hand and to slightly ooze through fingers as
the hand is closed.
2. Mix no more mortar at a time than can be used within one half hour. Mortar not
used within the one half hour time shall be disposed of. Do not re-temper mortar.
2.5 RENDERING MIXING AND PROPORTIONS

Doha, Qatar
Marchy 2008
04200
Page No. 4
1. General: Proportion and materials in accordance with manufacturer’s printed

instructions.
2. Bonding Slurry: Proportion 1.5 to 2 parts cement to 1 part latex admixture and
mix to a creamy consistency free of lumps.
3. Rendering: proportion 3 parts sand to 1 part cement with 10 litres of latex

admixture per each 50 kg of cement. Provide trial mix and check the quantity of
admix to the substrate prior to proceeding with the works.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 PLACING OF MASONRY
1. Units shall be laid on solid beds of mortar, webs and shells of hollow units to be
covered, vertical joints between units shall be solid filled.
2. Cutting of masonry units shall be executed by power driven masonry saw. Cut
units to accommodate wall dimensions, conduits, steel framing, fixtures, recesses
and other work.
3. Line pegs shall be removed as the work progresses, resulting holes filled and
tooled before mortar has set.
4. Masonry units shall be set out with a storey rod so that coursing lines up at steel
shelf angles, sills, heads of windows and doors with full courses.
5. Walls shall be kept level at all times. Carry up walls in a uniform manner, no part
being raised more than 1000 mm above any adjacent unbuilt course, and no area
of walling higher than 600 mm, above any course which is not fully set. Angles
and reveals shall be kept true, square and plumb. Broken walls must be laid up
with a lead.
6. Walls shall be constructed as true planes and when tested with a 3000 mm
straight edge placed anywhere on the all in any direction shall be true to plane
within 3 mm and plumb within 6 mm. Each horizontal joint shall be level and at
same height in all walls around the room and true to the lines and dimensions
indicated on the drawings. Vertical joints in alternate courses shall be plumb and
in line. Unsatisfactory work shall be removed and replaced.
7. Units shall be laid up in running (stretcher) bond with vertical joints in successive
courses centring on mid point of the unit below. Joints to be dead level and
uniform in width.
8. Intersecting concrete block walls shall be tied together in a masonry bond.
9. Where fire-rated walls are called for, construct walls with block of proper solids
content to provide the required rating.
10. Provide special units at jambs, heads, sills, corners and bonding blocks as
required. External corners shall be bullnosed throughout.

Doha, Qatar
Marchy 2008
04200
Page No. 5
11. Units shall be accurately cut and fitted at head of windows, window stools, heads
of doors and other openings as necessary to accommodate the hollow metal door
frames, window frames, window stools, etc.
12. Build hollow metal frames into masonry work at correct elevations using anchors
furnished with frames. Frames to be set and maintained square, plumb and true.
Frame which are to be set on finished floor are to be anchored both jambs with
bolts and expansion shields.
13. Masonry units shall be laid free of smears, mortar slicks, stains, cracked, broken
edges and corners and other defects detrimental to the finished appearance. If
any chipped or broken units are discovered in the finished wall, the Engineer will
require their immediate removal and replacement with new units at no additional
cost to the Contract.
14. Extend masonry partitions, unless shown otherwise, to within 20 mm of underside

of structure. Fill the 20 mm gap with insulation under 25% compression, so placed
that space is left each side of the finished wall to accept joints sealant. At fire-
rated enclosures ensure gap at top is filled and sealed to meet wall fire rating and
BS 476 Part 20 fire resistance, whichever is greater; see section 07270 for smoke
seals.
15. Installation in masonry all nailing, ground, inserts, anchors and other items
supplied by other trades, and where required so as to receive anchor bolts for the
securing of wall cabinets, shelves, vanities, etc.
3.2 JOINT FINISHING
1. Unless otherwise specified, rod all joints in exposed masonry work (concave). Use
a plastic pointing tool which will not cause staining of the mortar.
2. Concrete block which is to be plastered directly or which is to receive tiles applied

with a mortar bed, shall have the joints raked back 12 mm for the full thickness of
the joint.
3. Use flush joints for concrete block walls which are not exposed in the finished
work, or plastered directly.
3.3 CHASES, GROOVES AND BOXES
1. Confer with other Sections to determine the location and size of openings to be
left in the masonry for heating, ventilating, plumbing and electrical pipes, ducts,
boxes, or other items. Coordinate and ensure that the structure is not weakened.
2. Where metal outlet boxes panels or other similar items occur in concrete block
walls, cut such openings with a saw in order to provide square and clean edges.
3. Leave reglets where required for the installation of metal flashings and sheet
metal.
4. Install access panels as provided by Division 15 and 16. Coordinate work and
access panel locations as per Drawings and with Division 15 and 16.

Doha, Qatar
Marchy 2008
04200
Page No. 6
3.4 LINTELS AND BEARING BLOCKS
1. Install reinforced concrete block lintels over openings in concrete block walls.
Construct lintels with special concrete lintel blocks. Lintels shall have underside
and faces finished and shall be of the same material as wall faces. Lintels shall
bear minimum 200 mm and bearing on supporting masonry and shall be isolated
with two layers of heavy asphalt coated paper.
2. Install solid concrete masonry bearing blocks at the jambs of all concrete block or
steel lintels. The bearing blocks to be of the same material as the adjacent wall
surfaces.
3. Concrete and reinforcing steel for block lintels and bearing blocks shall be as
specified in Section 03300. Use concrete, not mortar to fill blocks.
4. Contractor, at his option, may provide cast-in-place concrete lintels, in lieu of

concrete block lintels.
3.5 GROUTING
1. To provide Lateral Support:
1. Intersecting bearing walls shall be tied together with a prefabricated “Tie

Section” of wall reinforcement or strap anchor set in the second bed
course and every third course thereafter, full height of wall.
2. Tops of masonry walls up to 45 mm thick shall be secured to cast-in-place

concrete slabs above with strap anchors securely fixed to the slab and
securely embedded into mortar joints of the wall. Space anchors not more
than 400 mm apart.
3.7 LATERAL SUPPORTS FOR MASONRY WALLS (Walls thicker than 45 mm)
1. Minimum size 100 x 100 x 150 mm long x 6 mm thick galvanized painted steel;
angles along top of concrete block walls exceeding 3600 mm in length and
laterally unsupported by masonry walls at right angles to them. Fasten angles to
structure above with anchors, and space at not over 1800 mm o.c. on both sides
of the walls, staggering the angles, that when combined, angles are not over 900
mm o.c.
3.8 HORIZONTAL REINFORCING
1. Reinforce all concrete block walls and partitions with horizontal reinforcing as
follows.
2. Reinforcement to be set in mortar bed joints and lapped at least 150 mm at all
splices and at corners and intersections.
3. Reinforcement to terminate at each side of expansion and control joints.
4. Reinforcement to be continuous and set in the second bed course 200 mm and in
every second bed course 400 mm thereafter, to full height of wall or partition.

Doha, Qatar
Marchy 2008
04200
Page No. 7
5. Bed joint of the top course of block is to be reinforced in all cases.
6. Reinforcement to be set in the second and third bed joints 200 mm apart
immediately above lintels and below sills of openings and shall extend at least 900
mm beyond the jambs.
3.9 CONTROL JOINTS
1. Construct vertical control joints in masonry walls at maximum 6000 mm o.c. and/or
where directed by the Engineer. Joints shall be constructed full height of the walls
or partitions. Joints shall be formed by using one half and full blocks to form a
continuous straight vertical joints and placing continuous tarred or waxed paper or
asphalt emulsion on the end half-cell of the blocks; the resulting centre key cavity
is to be completely filled with mortar as each course is placed. Vertical joint
between the block ends shall be raked out to a depth of 12 mm full height, both
sides and left ready to receive caulking specified under Section 07900.
3.10 RENDERING FOR MASONRY AND FOR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1. Apply rendering to the exterior face of concrete block masonry infill/back-up at

exterior walls, where indicated on Drawing and Schedules.
2. Apply tendering to all exposed cast-in-place concrete walls and soffits, and to
exposed concrete block masonry not specified to be plastered in Division 9 of the
Specifications. Refer to Finish Schedule for finishes.
3. Apply rendering in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and as

follows:
1. Clean substrates and apply bond coat with a stiff brush to a most surface,
forcing material into concrete, block and mortar pores.
2. Apply rending over bond coat, filling joints in block work fully and to obtain
a uniform thickness over the block constructions of 6 mm and make
suitable to accept protective spray coat.
3. Moist-cure rendering.
3.11 CLEANING
1. As the work proceeds, carefully remove mortar splashes from masonry surfaces
and adjoining surfaces. After completing each section of the all, clean down
surfaces and make good where required.
2. In all cases, first clean a sample area of masonry in an approved location and
obtain approval by the Engineer before completing work.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
Marchy 2008
05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page No. 1
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide all structural steel in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
1.2 STANDARDS
A. All structural steel except as otherwise shown, shall comply with the applicable
provisions and recommendations of the following Codes, Specifications and
Standards:
Comply with the following standards:
BS EM 10025 Structural Steel
BS 639 Covered Electrodes for the Manual Metal Arc-welding of

Carbon – Manganise steels.
BS 729 Hot Dipped Galvanized Coatings.
BS 3692 ISO metric precision Nexagon Bolts, Screws and Nuts.
BS 4360 Specification for Weldable Structural Steel
BS 4395 Specification for high strength fiction grip bolts and

associated nuts and washers for structural engineering.
BS 4848 Hot rolled structural steel sections
BS 5135 Specification for metal – arc welding of crab and carbon

manganise steels.
BS 5493 Protective Coating of Steel Structures against corrosion.
BS 5531, 1988 Code of Practice for Safety in Erecting Structural Frames.
BS 5950 Structural use of steel work in Buildings comply also with

National and Cleaning for Steel
Comply also with the following:
1. ASTM A6-83 Specification for the General

requirements, for Rolled Plates, Shapes, Sheet
Piling, and Bars for Structural Use.
2. ASTM A36-81A Standard Specification for Structural

Steel.
3. ASTM A325-83C Specification for High Strength Bolts for

Structural Steel Joints.
4. ASTM A325-83 Specifications for High Strength Bolts for

Structural Steel Joints (Metric)

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page No. 2
5. ASTM A490-83A Specification for Heat-Treated, Steel

Structural Bolts.
6. ASTM A490M-82 Specification for High Strength Steel

Bolts for Structural Steel Joints (Metric)
7. ASTM E709-80 Practice for Magnet Particle Examination
8. AWS D1.1-86 Structural Welding Code – Steel.
9. AISC S326 Specification for the Design, Fabrication

and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings (1978).
10. NSSSBC National Structural Steelwork

Specification for Building Construction. Copies can
be obtained from British Construction Steelwork
Association Ltd, 4 Whitehall Count, Westminister,
London, SW1A, ZES, United Kingdom.
11. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel

Buildings and Bridges.
12. Industrial Fasteners Institute “Fastener Standard Book”.
13. AISC S314 Specifications for Structural Joints Using

ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 (Nov. 1985)
14. SSPC Steel Structures Painting Manual,

Volume 2, Systems and Specifications.
15. Comply with Qatar Municipality Requirements.
B. Copies of all the above codes and standards shall be submitted to the Engineer.
Should the above referred documents contain conflicting requirements the more
stringent shall govern.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit to the Engineer for approval shop drawings for all
structural steel components all in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents showing the following:
1. Shop fabrication drawings which show type of material, size and weight of
members and other information necessary for the fabrication of each
member and for shop assembly of members of the structure. The drawings
shall include the type, size location and extent of all welds and bolts. The
drawings shall clearly distinguish between shop and field, bolts and welds.
2. Field assembly and erection drawings which show all field assembly prior
to erection and after erection. The drawings shall indicate all details,

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page No. 3
schedules, procedures and diagrams showing field assembly and

sequence of erection. The information shall indicate locations of shorings
and how shoring is stabilized and controlled. The drawings shall indicate
elevations of shored points and splice locations. The procedures shall
indicate step by step erection sequences including intermediate surveys
and allowances for temperature. Diagrams shall indicate erection
equipment size and weight and additional elements which may be required
to support or stabilise elements during erection.
3. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer written

procedures for fabrication of the steel work. The procedure shall describe
the complete welding process including machine, current, voltage, preheat,
filter metal, welding system (manual, semi-automatic or automatic),
positions of welding, number of passes for each weld size, preparation of
surfaces prior to welding, etc. These procedures shall indicate the
Contractor’s quality control measures, monitoring and repair procedures.
B. Manufacturers’ Literature
1. Submit to the Engineer manufacturer’s specifications and installation

instructions for the following products, including laboratory test reports and
such other data to show compliance with these Specifications (including
specified standards):
a. Structural steel, (each type) including certified copies of mill reports

covering the chemical and physical properties, country and rolling
mill of origin, and including a statement and that testing has been
performed in accordance with ASTM or equivalent standards.
b. High strength bolts (each type) including nuts and washers.
c. Welding electrodes (each type).
d. Shop coat primer paint, field touch-up paint.
e. Coal tar epoxy paint.
f. Bearing materials or assemblies.
C. Testing Reports
1. The following reports shall be submitted in triplicate directly to the

Engineer by the Testing Laboratory, with copy to the Contractor:
a. Shop Welders Certification.

b. Field Welders Certification.
c. Magnetic particle tests, shop welds and field welds.
d. Ultra-sonic tests, shop welds and field welds.
e. High strength bolted connection tests, shop and field.
1.4 TESTING

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page No. 4
A. The Contractor shall engage, at his own expense, an independent certified

Testing Laboratory approved by the Engineer to inspect with high strength bolted
connections and welds, and to perform all tests and submit test reports to the
Engineer as herein specified.
B. The Contractor shall submit evidence regarding qualification of the proposed

Testing Laboratory.
C. The Contractor shall provide the Testing Laboratory with the following:
1. A complete set of shop fabrication and erection drawings.
2. Cutting lists, order sheets, material bills, shipping bills and mill test reports.
Provide certified copies of mill test reports of bolts, nuts and washers,
including names and locations of mills and shops and analyses of
chemical and physical properties.
3. Information as to time and place of all rollings and shipment of material to

shops.
4. Representative sample pieces requested for testing.
5. Full and ample means and assistance for testing all material.
6. Proper facilities, including scaffolding, temporary work platforms, hoisting

facilities, etc., for inspection of the work in the mills, shop and field.
D. Bolted connections shall be inspected by the Testing Laboratory in accordance

with AISC Specifications for “Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325-83C, ASTM
325M 83 and ASTM 490-83A or ASTM 490-82”.
E. Welding shall be inspected and tested by a Testing Laboratory approved by the

Engineer during fabrication and erection of structural steel as follows:
1. Certify all welders in accordance with AWS and make inspections and
tests as required. Record types and locations of all defects found in the
work, and measures required and performed to correct such defects.
2. In addition to visual inspection of all welds, magnetic particle and ultra-

sonic inspection shall be made of all welds indicated on the Drawings.
Magnetic particle inspection shall be made on the root pass and finished
weld.
3. The method of magnetic particle inspection shall be in accordance with

ASTM E 109. Any type of crack or zone of incomplete fusion or penetration
will not be acceptable.
4. Ultra-sonic inspection shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.1.
F. Each bolting crew and welder shall be assigned an identifying symbol or mark and
all shop and field connections shall be so identified so that the inspector can refer
back to the crew or person making the connection.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page No. 5
G. The Testing Laboratory shall be responsible for conducting and interpreting the
tests, shall state in each report whether or not the test specimens conform to all
requirements of the Contract Documents, and shall specifically note any
deviations therefrom.
H. Access to places where material for this Contract is being fabricated or produced
shall be provided to the Engineer and the Testing Laboratory for the purpose of
inspection and testing.
I. The Engineer and the Testing Laboratory may inspect structural steel at the plant
before shipment; however, the Engineer reserves the right to reject any material,
at any time before final acceptance, which does not conform to all of the
requirements of the Drawings and Specifications.
J. The Testing Laboratory shall perform the specified tests and submit reports to the
Engineer. Corrective measures, including additional and more complete testing,
which may result from these tests shall be the Contractor’s responsibility; all costs
of which shall be paid for by the Contractor.
K. The Contractor shall coordinate and allow for necessary time for the Testing
Laboratory to complete all testing and inspections prior to shop painting.
L. The Testing Laboratory shall prepare test specimen from steel samples cut from
delivered material and shall conduct tension tests in accordance with ASTM. The
Contractor shall mill order 1.0 metre extra length for the members noted on the
Drawings to provide the steel for testing.
1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. The Contractor shall fabricate and erect the structural steelwork as shown on the
drawings and specifications.
B. No substitutions of the structural system shown nor member sizes or steel

strengths will be permitted. No reduction in member sizes shall be permitted if
steel strength exceeds that specified.
C. No substitutions of rolled sections with welded plate sections will be permitted or

considered.
A. Do not handle structural steel until paint has thoroughly dried. Care shall be
exercised to avoid abrasions and other damage.
B. Stack material above ground out of mud add dirt and provide for proper drainage.
Protect from damage or soiling by adjacent construction operations.
C. Do not deliver material to the project site until the proposed method and sequence
of erection has been reviewed by the Engineer. Method and sequence shall be
planned so as to avoid delay or damage to the work of other trades.
D. Storage of fabricated steel at the job site shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor. Material stored at the job site shall not exceed design loads on

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page No. 6
existing or newly constructed structures so that members will not be distorted or

otherwise damaged; and shall be protected against corrosion or deterioration.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Structural steel work shall be executed by an approved specialist Subcontractor

unless the Contractor can satisfy the Engineer that he (the Contractor) has
sufficient experience and expertise in this field to execute this work himself in
which case his tradesman and their supervisory personnel engaged in such work
must have successful experience with work comparable to that shown and
specified including organized quality control and testing procedures.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. All structural steel shall conform to ASTM A50 Grade 50 (minimum yield strength
50,000 psi or 3,500 Kg/sq.cm) unless noted otherwise.
2.2 BOLTS
A. All bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A490 and
A325. All bolts shall be cold-forged with rolled threads.
2.3 WELDING ELECTRODES
A. All welding electrodes shall be E70XX and shall comply with the provisions of
AWS Specifications A5.1, A5.5, A5.17, A5.18, A5.20.
B. All welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds using not less than the
minimum size based on thickness of the thicker part jointed.
1. Thickness to 12 mm – min. size 4 mm.

2. Over 12 mm to 20 mm – min. size 6 mm.
2.4 BEARING PADS
A. Fibre Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Shall conform to standard specifications for

highway bridges, Section 25, adopted by American Association of State Highway
Officials.
2.5 PAINT
A. Primers
1. For surfaces to have short term weather exposure that will receive
sprayed-on fireproofing: Fast drying, iron oxide, complying with SSPC –
Paint 13-64 or FS TT-P-636Co., minimum dry film thickness 25 microns.
2. For interior surfaces to be painted with coal tar epoxy: Anti-corrosive

primer, complying with B.S. 5493, minimum dry film thickness 50 microns.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page No. 7
B. Coal Tar Epoxy Paint: KF3B, complying with B.S. 5493, minimum dry film
thickness of each coat 100 microns.
C. Use spray application for painting. The minimum thickness shall be maintained on
all corners, edges and ends of pieces. The surface to be painted shall be dry and
above 2oC; the temperature of the air shall be over 5oC. Do not paint outdoors in
rainy and dusty weather. Allow paint at least 24 hours drying time in good weather
before recoating.
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and inspection of structural steel will be performed by an independent

structural steel testing agency engaged by the Contractor, at his own expense and
approved by the Engineer. Provide the testing agency with the following:
1. A complete set of accepted documents required under Paragraph

“Submittals”.
2. Cutting lists, order sheets, material bills, and shipping bills.
3. Information as to time and place of all rollings and shipment of material to

shops.
4. Representative sample pieces as requested by the testing agency.
5. Full and ample means and assistance for testing all material.
6. Proper facilities, including scaffolding, temporary work platforms, etc., for

inspection of the work in the mills, shop and field.
B. The inspector will perform his duties in such a way that fabrication and erection
are not unnecessarily delayed or impeded, and as follows:
1. The Inspector will make all tests and inspections as required by “Structural
Welding Code”.
2. The edges of material to be welded will be ultrasonically examined for

evidence of laminations, inclusions or other discontinuities. The extent to
which such defects will be permitted and the extent of repair permitted
shall be determined by the Inspector and made in accordance with ASTM
A6, Paragraph 9. Repairs made by welding shall be done in compliance
with the requirements of AWS D1.1 and the accepted welding procedures.
3. The root layer of all multiple pass welds and the backside of groove welds
made from both sides, after back gouging or chipping, will be examined by
magnetic particle inspection (or dye penetration if magnetic particle
inspection is not feasible).
4. All shop and field welds shall be listed as stated on the drawings.
5. The technique of radiographic inspection will be in accordance with the

requirements of AWS D1.1. A double film technique will be used. One

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page No. 8
copy of each film will be sent to the Engineer, the other will be retained by
the Inspector.
6. Where inspection reveals defects, the extent of inspection will be

increased as much as necessary to ensure that the full extent of the
defects in a joint has been found and to ensure that the same defects are
not present in welds made on similar parts or under similar circumstances.
7. Work that is not acceptable will be designated by “Repair” or “Reject”, as

applicable.
8. Shop welds will be inspected in the shop before the work is painted or
approved for shipment.
9. The Inspector will maintain a daily record of the work he has inspected and
its disposition. Reports of tests will be made in form prescribed in AWS
D1.1. One copy of each of the reports will be submitted to the Engineer on
a weekly basis.
10. The Inspector will make all tests and inspections of high strength bolt
connections as required by AISC S314.
3.1 BENCH MARKS
A. The Contractor shall employ the services of a qualified well experienced engineer,
in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, who shall
establish permanent bench marks, field check all elevations of concrete on which
structural steel is to be placed and locations of anchor bolts, reporting any
discrepancies to the Engineer and obtaining the Engineer’s approval before the
work proceeds.
3.2 ERECTION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accurate setting and levelling of all
bearing plates or setting plates. Bearing plates or setting plates shall be levelled
on steel wedges or shims or as otherwise detailed. Bearing and setting plates
shall be grouted as specified.
B. Furnish templates for accurate setting of all anchor bolts. Furnish shim plates or
developed fills where required to obtain proper fit and alignment.
C. Oxygen cutting of structural steel in excess of 3 mm for “fitting-up” purposes shall

not be done except with the prior approval of the Engineer.
D. The use of an oxygen cutting torch for correcting fabrication errors will be
permitted only when the member is not under load, and only after prior written
approval of the Engineer to the procedures to be followed in the event corrective
work is necessary.
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCE
A. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for the correct fitting of all structural
members and for the elevation and alignment of the finished structure. Any

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page No. 9
adjustments necessary in the steel work because of discrepancies in elevations

and alignment shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
B. Unless otherwise noted, the structure shall be levelled and plumbed to an

accuracy of 1 to 1000, but not to exceed 12 mm. The actual centrelines by more
than 12 mm at any point. The difference between offsets to the actual centrelines
of truss chords at adjacent panel points shall not exceed 3 mm. All levelling and
plumbing shall be done based on the mean operating temperature of the
structure. Allowances shall be made for the difference at time of erection and the
mean temperature at which the structure will be when completed and in service.
C. All measurements relating to the above shall be on the theoretical centreline of the
members.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. No welding or bolting shall be done until as much of the structure as will be

stiffened by the welding or bolting has been properly aligned.
B. Drift pins shall not be used to enlarge unfair holes in main material. Holes that
must be enlarged to admit bolts shall be reamed. Burning and drifting may be
used to align unfair holes in secondary bracing members only, when acceptable to
the Engineer.
C. When high strength bolts or high strength bearing bolts are used, the AISC
specifications shall apply including values as noted therein, and installation by
either “turn of nut tightening” or with torque can be read from the wrench dial.
Care should be taken that the wrench is properly calibrated. Nuts shall be in
motion when torque is measured. In using power wrenches, the recommendations
of the wrench manufacturer shall be followed. Use Hardened washer under bolt
head or nut whichever is turned in tightening, unless the specified standards
require hardened washer under both head and nut.
D. Bolted connections shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of Para.

TESTING and as indicated on the Drawings.
E. Welded connections shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of Para.

TESTING and as indicated on the Drawings.
3.5 SURVEY
A. Make an accurate survey of actual locations of steel members immediately upon

the completion of erection of steel but before removal of shoring and promptly
submit same to the Engineer. Should locations vary beyond the allowable
tolerances, take necessary corrective measures and modify details and/or
procedure as required.
B. Survey the final erected structural steel after release of shoring but prior to
removal of shoring elements and prior to the application of any other work,
reporting any discrepancies from Contract requirements to the Engineer.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Page No. 10
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05500
METAL FABRICATION
Page No. 1
1. GENERAL
Provides metal fabrication work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
2. Fabrication, supply and installation of all miscellaneous metal items specified

herein, shown on Drawings and not specified in other Sections of the
Specifications, and required by work of this Contract.
3. Work of this Section includes all steel required for support of ceiling-height glazed
screens, partitions, doors screens, etc., including bridging steel around ductwork.
4. Work of this Section is considered as Specialist Work.
1.2 REFERNECE STANDARD AND CODES
1. Comply with the following:
BS 4 Hot rolled steel fabrication
BS476 Part 8 fire tests on building materials and

Structures
BS 641 Dimensions of small reverts for general purpose.
BS 693 General requirements for oxy–acetylene

welding of mild steel.
BS 729 Hot dip galvanized coatings on iron & steel articles.
BS 1077 Fusion welded joints in copper.
BS 1224 Electro plated coatings of nicked and chromium steel tubes.
BS 1615 Anodic oxidation coatings of aluminium.
BS 1706 Electro-plated coatings of cadmium and zinc on iron and

steel
BS 1723 Brazing
BS 1724 Bronze welding by gas
BS 1856 Metal arc welding
BS 2630 Projection welding
BS 3019 TIG welding for stainless steel

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05500
METAL FABRICATION
Page No. 2
BS 4360 Cold rolled steel.
BS 4174 Self tapping screws
BS 5950 Structure use of steel work in buildings
BS 6180 Loads and forces on railing and post
The following codes of current issues form part of this section.
CP 143 Part 2 Galvanized co-rugated steel

Part II Lead
Part 12 Copper
Part 15 Aluminium
CP 499 Metal railings and balustrading.
NFPA 100-9 National fire protection association standard
1. Work of this Section shall be executed by a subcontractor having a minimum five

(5) years experience in the fabrication and installation of miscellaneous metals.
Subcontractor shall be capable of providing the best quality of shop and field
practice known to recognised miscellaneous metal subcontractors specialising in
this type of work.
2. Information submitted involving engineering services including design, execution,

operations procedures and shop drawings, shall be prepared by under the direct
supervision of a qualified engineer with well experience in Doha, Qatar. He shall
check all drawings and calculations before submission to the Engineer, and shall
certify that he has made such checks by signing the information submitted.
3. Subcontractor shall employ especially trained and experienced workers in this

type of work.
4. Subcontractor shall have a full time, senior, experienced and qualified

representative at the site to direct the work.
5. Weld all stainless steel shall be by means of TIG welding to BS 3019.
6. Weld all steel as follows:
1. Gas welding to BS 693.

2. Metal arc welding to BS 1856.
3. Projection welding to BS 2630.
7. Regulatory Agencies: Do work of this Section to requirements and approval of

Authorities having Jurisdiction.
8. Engineering: Have engineering performed by a fully qualified engineer to design

and engineer structures and in particular, steel stair railings, vanity and counter
shelf supports.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05500
METAL FABRICATION
Page No. 3
9. Inspection: Materials and workmanship shall be at all times subject to inspection

by the Engineer.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1. Design to comply with requirements of BS 5950.
2. Engineer and securely install stair railings and counters to support self loads and
live loads, to requirements and approval of Authorities having Jurisdiction.
3. All railings and posts shall be designed to withstand all loads and forces as
required under BS 6180: 1982, and to conform to NFPA 100-97 section 5.
4. Anchors, fasteners and braces shall be structurally stressed not more than 50% of
allowable stress when maximum load conditions are applied.
5. Maximum deflection for any members shall not exceed 1/360 of the span under
specified live load.
6. Design supports, where required, to withstand their own weight, the weight of the
items to be supported, loads imposed by the motion of supported items, where
applicable, and all live loads, static and dynamic, which might be applied to the
supported items in the course of their normal function. Design supports to
accommodate structural deflection as specified above.
7. Vanity shelves shall be supported by stainless steel brackets and angles

anchored to walls.
8. Design framing system to support exterior suspended granite spandrels.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. Submit as per Section 01300.
2. Shop Drawings and Structural Calculations:
1. Clearly indicate all materials being supplied, connections, attachments,

reinforcing, anchorage, galvanising locations of exposed fastenings and
priming.
2. In the case of pre-manufactured items, submit manufacturer’s product

literature, clearly identifying model being proposed, that meets specified
requirements.
3. In the case of either shop drawings or pre-printed pages, underline or

otherwise clearly identify any deviation from the Specifications or
Drawings.
4. Submit necessary templates and instructions, where fastenings or anchors

have to be built in by other Sections.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05500
METAL FABRICATION
Page No. 4
5. Shop drawings and calculations to bear the stamp and seal of engineering
establishment supplied and paid for by manufacturer/supplier under this
Section. Prior to submission, the Contractor shall check, sign, stamp and
record all documentation.
3. Certification
1. Submit certificates are indicating source, grade, type of materials supplied

for work under this Section.
2. Submit certificate stating that materials and workmanship provided are in

accordance with the requirements of this Section.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
1. Structural Steel: to BS EN 10025; Grade 5275J2G3.
2. Steel Angles: to BS 4848, Part 4 equal and unequal legs and fabricated from
steel to BS EN 10025 Grade S 275J2G3.
3. Steel Tubes: to BS 1387.
4. Hot Rolled Steel Sections: to BS4 and fabricated from steel to BS 4360.
5. Cold Rolled Steel Sections: to BS 1449 and fabricated from steel to BS 4360.
6. Hot Finished Structural Hollow Sections: to BS 4848 Part 2 and fabricated from
steel to BS EN 1021-1, Grade S275J2H.
7. Stainless Steel Sections: AISI type 304, sizes as shown on Drawings or

otherwise calculated and specified. Finish to be selected by the Engineer.
8. Steel Grating: All steel grating to be in the tender documents.
9. Aluminium: Aluminium extrusions shall be in accordance with BS 1476 alloy HE9

with the mechanical properties of the WP condition. Anodized finish to BS 1615
(general) and BS 3987 (exterior work). Aluminium sheet to be in accordance with
BS 1470 alloy NS4-H6 (1/4 hard).
10. Galvanizing: To BS 729 min. average coating thickness 140 microns.
11. Bituminuous Paint: to MIP-P-6883A and BS 6949.
12. Butyl Tape: Polyisobutylene butyl tape, sizes and widths to suit conditions.
13. Material Filler: Sealant silicone type approved by the Engineer.
14. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lock Washers, Machine Screws, Bolts and Anchor
Bolts: BS 3692 Gr.8.8 galvanized steel where in contact with galvanized steel
and stainless steel where in contact with stainless steel; cadmium plated in other
locations.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05500
METAL FABRICATION
Page No. 5
15. Steel Chequered plate: Steel Chequered plate of manufacturer’s standard

design. Treads shall have integral nosing.
2.2 FABRICATION
1. Verify all dimensions on the site before preparing drawings or proceeding with
shop work. Fit and shop-assemble insofar as possible, the various sections of the
work and deliver to the project site in the largest practical sections.
2. Fabricate metal work complete with all components required for anchoring to
concrete; bolting or welding to structural frames; standing free; or resting in
frames or sockets in a safe and secure manner.
3. Fabricate all steel railings and balustrading in conformance with the design
requirements of NFPA 100-97 Section 5.
4. Fabricate work true to dimensions, square, plumb and level. Joints and
intersecting members shall be accurately fitted with adequate fastenings.
5. Finished work shall be free from distortion and defects detrimental to appearance
and performance.
6. Welding shall comply with AWS recommendations and specified BSI standards.
7. Unless otherwise specified, noted or approved, all connections shall be welded.

File or grind exposed welds smooth and flush. Do not leave grinding marks.
8. Where welding is not possible, connections shall be bolted or secured in an

approved manner. Exposed fastenings shall be countersunk, bolts cut off flush
with nuts and made as inconspicuous as possible. Exposed fastenings where
approved shall be of the same material, colour and finishes as the base metal on
which they occur.
9. Connections to structural steel members shall be welded. No bolting or drilling of

holes shall be done unless approved in writing by the Engineer.
2.3 WELDING
1. Welding of Steel: The welding of steel is to be carried out by one of the following
methods:
• Gas welding to BS 693 for mild steel.

• Metal are welding to BS 1856 for mild steel.
• Metal are welding to BS 938 for steel tubes to BS 1755.
• Projection welding to BS 2630.
• Other approved methods.
2. Welding of Stainless Steel: Welding of stainless steel shall be by means of TIG

welding to BS 3019 Part 1, or by other methods approved by the Engineer.
3. Welding of Aluminium Alloy: The welding of aluminium alloy shall be carried out
by one of the following methods.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05500
METAL FABRICATION
Page No. 6
a. Welding to BS 3019 Part 1.

b. MIG welding to S 3571 Part 1.
c. Gas welding to BS 1126.
d. Other approved methods.
4. Welding of Copper, Brass, Bronze: Welding of copper, brass, bronze and other
metals shall be carried to relevant British Standards and to other approved
methods.
5. Finishing of Welding Joints:
1. But joints which will be visible in completed work: to be smooth, flush with
adjacent surfaces.
2. Fillet joints which will be visible in completed work to be executed neatly;

grind smooth where specified.
2.4 GALVANIZING AND PRIMING
1. Galvanizing: Provide a zinc coating for those items indicated on Drawings or

specified to be galvanized to BS 729 and as follows:
2. Thoroughly de-scale steel work for which galvanizing is not specified before
delivery to project site. Remove roughness and irregularities, clean with a wire
brush remove oil and grease and prime with one shop coat of specified primer.
3. Prime all other steel, whether exposed in the finish work or not, using one shop
coat of specified primer.
4. After installation make good primed coat with touch-up primer.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION OF JOB CONDITIONS
1. Inspect the work of other trades on which the work of this Section depends.
Report in writing any defects or discrepancies to the Engineer.
2. Commencement of work implies acceptance of existing job conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
1. Install miscellaneous metals work in the correct locations and positions, plumb,
level, structurally sound, securely fastened, free from defects detrimental to
finished appearance and to the Engineer’s approval.
2. Install the work of this Section using skilled craftsmen and in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations where applicable.
3. After installation, spot prime field bolt heads and nuts, field rivets, field welds and
any abrasions or damage to the shop coat of primer.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05500
METAL FABRICATION
Page No. 7
4. Perform drilling of steel, concrete and masonry to fasten the work of this Section.
Ensure all fixings are clear of concrete reinforcement.
5. Receive and install those items specified in divisions 15 & 16 (mechanical and
electrical) to be installed under this Section.
3.3 STEEL SECTIONS
1. Provide steel sections which are:
1. Not shown on Structural Drawings.

2. Shown in outline, but not identified on Structural Drawings.
3. Not noted on Drawings to be supplied by another Section.
4. Not specified to be supplied under another Section.
2. Cutting of steel sections in the field to be done under this Section and as directed.
The cost of field cutting shall be borne by the trades requiring such cutting.
3. Where sections are required to be built into masonry or concrete, supply such
members to respective trades.
3.4 ANCHORS, BOLTS AND OTHER ANCHORAGES
1. Provide all anchors, bolts and expansion bolts or other means of anchorage
required for building into floors, walls, soffits and ceilings, where it is necessary to
secure metal and wood to concrete, masonry or steel work, other than
anchorages specified under other Sections. Supply anchor bolts, nuts and similar
hardware to the respective Sections for fastenings.
3.5 CONCEALED SUPPORTS AND FRAMING
1. Provide support and framing as shown on the Drawings, construct supports from
rolled steel or stainless steel sections as indicated, assembled by welding.
2. Design supports to withstand their own weight, the weight of the items to be
supported, loads imposed by the motion of supported items, where applicable,
and all live loads, static and dynamic which might be applied to the supported
items in the course of their normal function. Design supports with a safety factor of
3. Design supports further as required to accommodation structural deflection.
3. Provide accessories, inserts and fixings necessary for attachment of support to

building structure. Drill supports as required to receive attachment of supported
items. Arrange supports to avoid conflicts with pipes, ducts, connections, thermal
and vapour barrier construction, framing provided under other Sections, and such
that supports and their fixings are fully concealed from view within the finished
Work. Finish: prime paint, intermediate coat and finish coat.
3.6 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL ANGLES, CHANNELS AND FRAMING
1. Provide steel angles, channels and framing as shown, detailed or required for
completion of the Works, Members shall be of sizes, shapes and at spacing
shown or as required for completion of the Work.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05500
METAL FABRICATION
Page No. 8
2. Ceiling support under ductwork: whenever suspension systems occur under

ductwork, and the duct width is wider than 500 mm, provide all necessary steel
angles, plates, channels and framing to span across under the duct work to
provide support connection system for the suspended ceiling. Co-ordinate this
section with the ceiling contractor’s work.
3. Ceiling height partitions, screens, etc.: Provide steel angles, channels and
framing, including miscellaneous steel required for the support of these elements
at the ceiling junction.
4. Finish: Miscellaneous framing for support of exterior items to be hot-dipped,

galvanized, prime painted, intermediate coat and finish coat. Other miscellaneous
framing to be prime painted, intermediate and finish coat unless noted otherwise.
3.7 SUMP PIT COVERS AND FRAMES
1. Fabricate gas-tight sump pit covers and frames of sizes shown on drawings.
Frames to be fabricated from 50 mm x 50 mm x 6 mm thick. Steel angles, corners
mitred, welded and ground flush and smooth. To back of angle, weld on hooked
bar anchors for embedment. To top of angles, plug weld on 8 mm thick x 13 mm
wide steel bar stop at outer edge.
2. Sump pit covers shall be 9.5 mm thick steel checker plate. Cut covers to
accommodate pumps and piping. Drill covers for countersunk flat head machine
screws for fixing, drill and tap frames for screws. Provide 3 mm thick neoprene
gasket material, fit and secure to frame with adhesive to form tight seal between
frame and covers. Use stainless steel bolts for securing sump pit cover plates.
3. Hot dip galvanized covers and frames after fabrication and apply primer,
intermediate coat and finish coat under this section as specified.
3.8 TRENCH GRATING AND FRAMES
1. Car park grating to be in galvanized steel with bearing bars at 30 mm o/c and
cross bars at 100 mm o/c.
2. Grating in Kitchen to be made from stainless steel AISI 304 with square hold U
section bars.
3. Fabricate grating in sections to permit easy handling, and to suit grating supports.
Band all edges and open ends of grating sections.
4. Provide angle frame with strap anchors at 600 mm o/c.
5. Securely anchor grating sections with tamper proof fastenings.
6. Finish: (except for stainless steel) Hot dipped galvanize gratings and frames after
fabrication.
3.9 STEEL ACCESS LADDERS AND LOADING DOCK LADDER
1. Fabricate stringers of 75 mm wide x 13 mm thick flat bar stock, rungs minimum

500 wide of 20 mm diameter steel bars 300 mm o.c. Shoulder – weld rungs to

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05500
METAL FABRICATION
Page No. 9
stringers. Secure stringers 150 mm steel free from vertical wall surface with 75
mm wide x 13 mm thick, steel strap anchors at top, bottom and intermittently at
not over 1500 mm o.c.
2. Fasten ladders to concrete walls behind granite cladding plumb, rigid and secure.
Fasteners shall be minimum 9.5 mm, secured into lead expansion shields in
drilled holes in wall. Heights to suit site conditions. All fastenings in stainless steel.
3. Install steel access ladders as shown on Drawings.
4. Finish:
1. Access ladders into ‘sump pits’ and ‘water storage tanks’ are to be
stainless steel AISI type 304.
2. All other access ladders in exposed to view locations are to be steel hot
dipped galvanized after fabrication, and finished with prime coat and 2
coats finish as per specifications in this contract.
3.10 LIFT PIT LADDERS
1. Provide permanently mounted, vertical steel ladders for access to Lift Pits.
Ladders shall be mounted to side wall of well at bottom terminal landing. Ladders
shall be mounted adjacent to hall door strike jamb, within 400 mm of landing door.
Ladders shall be minimum 400 mm wide, have steel rungs at intervals of not more
than 300 mm, have no less than 100 mm knuckle clearance between rung centre
line and facing construction. Ladders shall extend at least 1.22 metres above the
bottom lading sill level. Securely fasten ladder to pit floor slab and well
construction. Refer to Division 14 for Lift and Pits.
3.11 METAL RAILINGS TO CONCRETE STAIRS
1. After fabrication, steel work shall be thoroughly de-scaled, any roughness and
irregularities removed by grinding, cleaned with a wire brush, have oil and grease
removed from the surface and be given one shop coat of priming paint.
2. Do not finish paint steel to be encased in concrete, nor surfaces and edges to be
field welded. If pre-painted, remove paint for field welding for a distance of at least
50 mm on all sides of the joint prior to welding.
3. After installation, spot prime field bolt heads and nuts field welds and any
abrasions or damage to the shop coat of the primer.
4. Install balustrades, wall rails, brackets and handrails complete as per Drawings.
5. Interior balustrades shall be plug-welded to steel and shall be secured to walls

with fixing plates.
6. Connections between handrails and balusters and in lengths of handrails shall be

continuously welded.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05500
METAL FABRICATION
Page No. 10
7. Where fastenings or anchors have to be built-in by other trades, supply same with
necessary templates, instructions and supervision to ensure satisfactory
installation. Supply metal anchoring devices.
8. Where interior balustrades are set in concrete, set upright in sleeves with epoxy
grout. Supply sleeves.
9. Surplus welding material shall be ground off and internal and external corners
shall have sharp lines. Remove grinding marks.
10. Finish: Prime paint, intermediate coat and finish with 2 coats.
3.12 JOINERY SUPPORTS AND BRACKETS
1. In garage at all concrete columns, shear walls, masonry corners, provide stainless
steel corner guard angles complete with anchors.
2. Fabricate 150 mm x 150 mm x 6 mm thick x 1200 mm long stainless steel AISI

Type 304 finish corner angles, with suitable anchors for concrete and strap
anchors for conc. Block at 450 mm o.c. Corner angles mounted 150 mm above
floor level.
3. Coordinate work with Sections 03300 and 04200.
3.13 PRECAST CONCRETE FRAMING SYSTEM
1. Design and fabricate structural system, from hot rolled structural steel, to support
exterior pre-cast concrete panels.
2. Coordinate this work with section 03410 – Structural Pre-cast Pre-stressed

Concrete.
3. Finish: Prime paint, intermediate coat and finish coat.
3.14 BOLLARDS
1. Fabricate bollards of steel pipe 150 mm diameter, height above and below grades
as shown on drawings with 6 mm minimum thick walls and 6 mm thick welded cap
plate. All welds ground flush and smooth.
2. Hot dip galvanized bollards after fabrication.
3. Provide all bolts, to anchor bollards to structure.
4. Coordinate work with Section 03300 for concrete fill.
5. Finish: Prime paint and two finish coats.
3.15 STEEL FRAMES FOR OVERHEAD DOORS
1. Coordinate with section 08300: Overhead doors.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05500
METAL FABRICATION
Page No. 11
2. Provide where shown, galvanized steel channel head and jambs, minimum 6 mm
thick x width required to suit overall wall thickness.
3. Provide 6 mm x 38 mm x 12 mm long steel strap anchors welded to back of steel

channel heads and jambs at maximum 600 mm o.c.
4. Locate strap anchors maximum 200 mm from ends of channels.
5. Provide minimum 6 mm thick steel plate mounting pads, spring anchor plates,
operator anchor plates and other anchoring devices required for the receipt of
doors, hardware and operators.
6. Galvanized all sections following fabrication.
7. Finish: Prime paint and finish with two coats.
3.16 STEEL ANGLE AT EDGE OF LOADING DOCK
1. Provide 100 mm x 100 mm x 6 mm galvanized steel angle. To back of angle, weld

on hooked bar anchors for embedment into concrete.
2. Hot dip galvanize angle after fabrication.
3. Install level and true into slab edge, prime coat and finish with two coats.
3.17 STEEL SUPPORTS FOR MOVABLE PARTITIONS (INTERIOR)
1. Supply and install steel supports for overhead hung movable partitions. Refer to
Section 10650 for supply and installation of doors.
2. Design and fabricate supports to loads determined by partition suppliers.
3. Loading shall be suitable for support of partitions in stacked position at each end.
4. Ensure location and all track directional changes are fully supported.
3.18 HOIST BEAMS
1. Design and provide hoist beams where indicated and required, including all
fasteners and supports for lift hoist beams and hoist beams for water pumps.
3.19 STEEL FRAMING SUPPORT FOR BASIN VANITY SHELF
1. Design and fabricate galvanized steel, channel and angles for vanity supports as
shown on the drawings.
2. Install supports and brackets plumb, level rigid and secure, complete with
stainless steel anchors, mounting hardware, expansion shields and the like.
3. In hollow masonry – use chemical fastenings.
3.20 FIELD PAINTING

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05500
METAL FABRICATION
Page No. 12
1. Paint all bolt heads, washers, nuts, field welds and previously unpainted items.
Touch-up with matching paint, all shop primer damaged during transit and
installation and apply intermediate coat and finish coat.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05700
ORNAMENTAL METAL
Page No. 1
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide “Ornamental Metal” work in accordance with the requirements of

the Contract Documents.
B. Refer to section 01300 (Submittals)
1.2 STANDARDS
A. “Ornamental Metal” work, hereby defined to include any item (custom and/or
proprietary), fabricated from stainless steel and non-ferrous metal shapes, plates,
bars, tubes, extrusions, forgings and castings, which is not included as a part of
an overall system specified in another Section of these Specifications.
B. Finishes for ornamental metal shall comply with the National Association of
Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM), “Metal Finishes Manual”.
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Employ only experienced tradesmen for fabrication and installation, who are
capable of producing work of the highest standard of quality in the industry. Work
in this Section shall be executed by an approved specialist Subcontractor.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer’s Literature: Submit to the Engineer manufacturers’, fabricators’

and finishers’ specifications products to be used in the fabrication of custom
ornamental metal work, including paint products and other metal finishing
materials.
B. Samples: Submit to the Engineer 150 x 150 mm samples of each required metal
finish, except exposed mill finishes and primed for paint finishes. Prepare samples
on same type of material as to be used in the work. Samples will be reviewed by
the Engineer for colour, texture and reflectivity only. Compliance with all other
requirements is to exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit to the Engineer shop drawings for the fabrication and
erection of all assemblies of all custom ornamental metal work and proprietary
products which are not otherwise completely shown by manufacturers’ data
sheets. Include plans and elevations at not less than 1:10 scale, and include
details of sections and connections at not less than 1:4 scale as directed by the
Engineer. Show anchorage and accessory items and finishes.
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Examine the substrate and conditions under which the ornamental metal work is
to be installed. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
2. PRODUCTS

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05700
ORNAMENTAL METAL
Page No. 2
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Metal Surfaces: For the fabrication of ornamental metal work which will be
exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface
blemishes. Do not use materials which have stains and discolourations
including welds which do not match the material, or do not match the
Engineer’s sample in colour and grain characteristics.
2. Surfaces Flatness and Edges: For exposed work provide materials which
have been cold-rolled, cold-finished, cold-drawn, extruded, stretcher
levelled, machine cut and otherwise produced to the highest commercial
standards for flatness with edges and corners sharp and true to angle or
curvature as required.
3. Alloys and Tempers: Wherever alloys or tempers of metals are not shown
or specified, or are shown or specified only by series or other general
designation, provide the specific alloy which will weld and machine
properly, and will finish to match the Engineer’s sample and other work in
the same area, which is shown or specified to have the sane finish. Use
the temper or hardness which will provide the greatest strength and
durability, consistent with necessary forming, fabrication and finishing
processes.
A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 317, except as otherwise shown. Comply with the
following general standards, with specific type, alloy, heat treatment and finish as
shown or as directed by the Engineer to produce the specified work.
1. Plate: ASTM A167.
2. Bar Stock: ASTM A 276.
3. Tubing: ASTM a 269.
4. Castings: ASTM A 296, iron-Chromium, nickel.
5. Extruded Shapes: Manufacturer’s standards.
B. Aluminium: Provide the forms and types shown and specified for each item of
work (Aluminium Association nomenclature), and comply with the following
general standards. Except for requirements to attain necessary colour match,
compatibility, workability, strength, hardness and similar qualities, provide Alloy
6063-T5 or 6061-T6 (except for castings). Where no other finish is shown or
specified, provide standard mill finish:
1. Plate (and Sheet): ASTM B 209.

2. Bars, Rods and Wire: ASTM B 211.
3. Extruded Shapes and Tubes: ASTM B 221 or B 308.
4. Extruded Pipe: ASTM B 429.
5. Drawn Seamless Tube: ASTM B 210
6. Castings: ASTM B 26 or B 108.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05700
ORNAMENTAL METAL
Page No. 3
7. Forgings: ASTM b 247.
C. Bronze: Provide the forms and types shown and specified for each item of work.
Provide in standard commercial tempers and hardness, as required for fabrication,
strength and durability. Finish designation shown on the drawings are NAAMM
Standards; alloys are Copper Development Association nomenclature.
1. Plate and Bars: Alloy 220, complying with ASTM B 36, or as required to
match Engineer’s sample.
2. Castings: Comply with ASTM B 145 or B 146, except vary the percentages
of copper, zinc, tin and lead to attain colour match with other work.
D. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide the alloy and type required for
strength, workability, compatibility and colour match after grinding smooth and
finishing the fabricated product.
E. Fasteners: Same basic metal or alloy as the metal fastened, and finished to match
in colour and texture. Comply with FS FF-S92 for machine screws. Provide the
type of fasteners shown and provide flat-head screws for exposed fasteners,
unless otherwise shown.
F. Anchors and Inserts: Either furnish inserts to be set in concrete and masonry
work, or provide other anchoring devices are required for the installation of
ornamental metal work. Furnish cast iron, malleable iron or hot-dip galvanized
inserts. Provide toothed steel expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.
G. Aluminium Primer Paint: FS TT-P-645 Alkyd, Zinc Chromate.
H. Bituminous Paint: SSPC-PS 9.01 – 64T (cold-applied asphalt mastic), for extra
thick film.
I. Lacquer: Clear methacrylate, of type recommended by the fabricator for protection

of the finished metal surface.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate from the thicknesses, sizes and shapes shown, or if not shown, as
required to produce work of adequate strength and durability, without
objectionable deflections. Use proven details of fabrication, as required to achieve
proper assembly and alignment of the various components of the work.
B. From exposed work turn to line and level, with flush surfaces and accurate angles.
Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 0.8 mm, unless otherwise
shown. Mitre exposed corner joints and machine fit to a hairline joint.
C. Weld corners and seams continuously and in accordance with the

recommendations of AWS, AA and CDA. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush,
to match and blend with adjoining surfaces.
D. Provide brackets, plates and straps with each assembly, as may be required for
proper support and anchorage to other work.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05700
ORNAMENTAL METAL
Page No. 4
E. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap ornamental metal work as may be required to receive
finish hardware and similar items of work.
F. Complete the fabrication and assembly of units prior to chemical treatment or the
application of coatings, so that untreated or uncoated edges will not be exposed.
2.3 RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS
A. Comply with ANSI 12.1 A 58.1 for railings around floor openings and exposed
edges of floors, stairs, ramps, etc. and similar locations. Also, provide handrails on
walls at stairs and similar locations as required by ANSI A 12.1. Installed railings,
and supports shall withstand a 110 kg load applied at any point, downward or
horizontally or 75 kg/m along the top rail, whichever is greater.
B. In tubular members, where mechanical joints are necessary, use bar-stock inserts
with flat-head screws located on the least visible surfaces. Where bends are
shown, form members to a smooth, uniform radius without distortion of the cross-
sectional shape.
C. Mitre and cope members at corners and intersections. Bevel, weld and grind
smooth without fillets to form smooth transitions and maintain sharp lines.
D. See section 05520 – Metal Stairs and Railings.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND TRIM
A. Provide all miscellaneous framing and trim as shown or required for a complete
and finished installation. Refer to Drawings for details.
2.5 BRONZE FINISH - GENERAL
A. Polished bronze shall be produced to have the following finish, M21-C12-06X

(polished bronze, clear air dried methacrylate coating or lacquer), as required to
match the Engineer’s sample.
2.6 STAINLESS STEEL FINISH - GENERAL
A. As shown on drawings or specified, apply mechanical finishes to the fabricated

work (AISI and NAAMM nomenclature) with texture and reflectivity as required to
mach the Engineer’s sample.
2.7 ALUMINIUM FINISH
A. Fluoropolymer Resinous Coating: Colour as selected, using min. of 75%

Fluorocarbon resin” and applied to a min. dry film thickness of top coat of
(0.025mm). Finish shall meet the following:
1. Dry Film Thickness: Within minus 5% to plus 25% of specified thickness,

testing device at processor’s option.
2. Abrasion Resistance: ASTM D 968. Coefficient of abrasion to average 70.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05700
ORNAMENTAL METAL
Page No. 5
3. Pencil Hardness: F minimum.
4. Salt Spray: ASTM B 117 withstand 1,000 hours in 5% salt fog at (35oC)
and retain adhesion, corrosion resistance, colour and gloss with no more
than a “few” blisters to larger than No. 4 (ASTM D 714).
5. Humidity Test: ASTM D 2247 withstand 1,000 hours, and retain adhesion,
corrosion resistance, colour and gloss.
6. Weatherometer: ASTM G 23 withstand 500 hours exposure in sunshine

Arc Weatherometer, Model XW-R, under 60/60 dew cycle condition with no
significant evidence of chalk, colour or gloss change.
7. Formability: ASTM D 1737 No failure in adhesion or rapture of coating

when bent 180 degree around 1/8” mandrel.
8. Gloss: ASTM D 523 Average specular gloss of 30 for glossmeter geometry

of 60 degree.
9. Adhesion: No removal of finish after (1.5mm) cross hatching to base metal,

impacting to the point of metal rupture, and subjecting to application and
quick removal of cellophane tape.
2.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect exposed mechanical finishes by covering with adhesive paper or other

suitable covering prior to shipment from the fabrication or finishing shop.
B. Protect exposed chemical finishes by spray coating with lacquer to not less than
0.5 mils thick, prior to shipment from the fabrication or finishing shop.
C. After completion of specified finishes on exterior work and work to be built into
exterior and below-grade walls and decks, coat concealed surfaces which will be
in contact with concrete, masonry, wood or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of
bituminous paint to prevent corrosion and galvanic action. Do not extend coating
onto exposed surfaces.
D. Protect installed ornamental metal works from all damage until completion of the
Works.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set ornamental metal work accurately as measured from established building

lines and levels, plumb and in true alignment with previously completed work.
B. Anchor securely in place in the manner shown using concealed anchorage

wherever possible.
C. Fit mechanical joints together accurately to form tight joints and uniform reveals
and spaces for joint fillers and sealants. Restore any finishes that have been
damaged by shipment and installation.

Doha, Qatar
March 2008
05700
ORNAMENTAL METAL
Page No. 6
D. Do not cut or abrade finishes which cannot be completely restored in the field.
Return units with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by
complete refinishing.
E. Remove protective coverings when there is no longer any danger of damage to

the ornamental metal work from other work yet to be performed and in the same
location. Restore protective coverings which have been removed or damaged
during shipment or installation of the work, if such other work is yet to be
performed.
F. Separate dissimilar metals with di-electric separator to prevent molecular

breakdown.
-End of Section-

Doha, Qatar
March 2008

Structural Specs Vol (1) .2 Part1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Structural Specs Vol (1) .2 Part1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Volume 2 – Part 1 STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATION

01001 General Information 14

01010 Summary of Work 10

01042 Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical 2

01045 Cutting and Patching 2

01050 Field Engineering 3

01200 Project Meetings 2

01400 Quality Control - Testing Services 4

01430 Testing of Glazed Curtain Wall 4

01432 Site Inspection of Glazed Curtain Wall and Windows 3

01470 Inspection and Testing of Water Proofing 3

01500 Construction Facility and Temporary Control 9

01700 Contract Close Out 3

02200 Earthworks (Excavation and Backfilling) 11

02221 Excavation Perimeter Retention System Installation 5

02515 Concrete Pavers 5

02525 Exterior Granite Pavers and Cladding 5

03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 38

03345 Concrete Crack Repair 2

03346 Concrete Floor Finishing 4

03410 Structural Precast and Prestressed Concrete 15

Volume 2 – Part 1 STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATION

03500 Concrete Screed 7

04200 Concrete Block Masonry 7

05120 Structural Steel 10

05500 Metal Fabrication 12

05600 Ornamental Metal 6

SYNA WAQF ABLLAN RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS

1.1 LOCATION OF PROJECT SITE

1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT WORKS

2. Block 127: One Residential Building of B+G+7

Basement Floor : Parking Floor

Ground Floor : Parking Floor

1st Floor to 7th. Floor : Apartment Floor

Roof and Upper Roof : Water Tanks and Mechanical Equipment

Block 128: Four Residential Buildings of B+G+7

Basement Floor : Parking Floor

Ground Floor : Parking Floor

1st Floor to 7th. Floor : Apartments Floor

Roof and Upper Roof : Water Tanks and Mechanical Equipment

Block 129: Four Residential Buildings of B+G+7 and Mosque

SYNA WAQF ABLLAN RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS

Basement Floor : Parking Floor

Ground Floor : Parking Floor

1st Floor to 7th. Floor : Apartment Floor

Roof and Upper Roof : Water Tanks and Mechanical Equipment

9. Mechanical systems in the building include, heating, ventilation, air-conditioning,

11. External works comprise walkways; steps; roadways; curbs in a combination of

SYNA WAQF ABLLAN RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS

1.3 WORK PERFORMED UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS

2. Any special equipment, systems, or any other work deemed to be

Any undue interference occasioned by other contractors employed directly by the

1.4 ITEMS FURNISHED BY THE EMPLOYER

SYNA WAQF ABLLAN RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS

1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS

1. All references to codes, regulations, specifications and standards refereed to in

2. Proof of Compliance: Whenever the Contract Documents require that a product

1.6 ABBREVATIONS AND SYMBOLS

1. Reference to a technical society, institution, association or governmental authority

SYNA WAQF ABLLAN RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS

AOAC Association of Official Agricultural Chemists

SYNA WAQF ABLLAN RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS